JP2021049045A - Pinball game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of further improving game properties.SOLUTION: When variation of special symbols is started, a pinball game machine can displays a normal performance on a performance display device. During a variable display of the special symbols, the pinball game machine can execute an operation performance for instructing a player to execute an input operation onto operation input means. Triggered by the input operation onto the operation input means during the execution of the operation performance, or triggered by termination of the operation performance, the pinball game machine can start a specific performance. After the termination of the specific performance and before a stop display of the special symbols, the pinball game machine can display a special performance for suggesting transfer to the normal performance, on the performance display device. After the termination of the special performance, the pinball game machine can start the normal performance, where duration times of the special performance are different according to presence/absence of the input operation onto the operation input means during the operation performance or timing when the input operation onto the operation input means is made during execution of the operation performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 61

Description

It relates to a ball game machine whose production is executed while the game is in progress.

Conventionally, among various types of ball game machines, the so-called first-class pachinko game machine has a plurality of symbols changed in a display area such as a liquid crystal display provided in the substantially center of the game board. Display (hereinafter, such display is referred to as "design variation" or "variation display", etc.). This game machine shifts to a special game called a big hit, in which more prize balls can be obtained than in a normal game when the combination of symbols when the movement of symbols in a plurality of rows is stopped becomes a specific mode. Known as a thing. In the variable display of symbols in the display area, not only a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed, but also the variable display time is usually set in a state where one more symbol is aligned and a big hit is obtained, as in a state called a so-called reach screen. The production is designed to raise the expectations of the player, such as making it longer than that. In addition, the player's expectation is raised by the effect of using characters in images such as patterns to give a story to the variable display and the advance notice effect that suggests the high degree of expectation for transition to special games. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-230714

Many gaming machines that adopt the above-described configuration already exist as conventional models. In order to differentiate from conventional models, further improvement in playability is required.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of further improving game playability.

In the ball game machine of a certain aspect of the present invention, a winning / failing determination is made based on a game board in which a game area is formed, a start port provided in the game area, and a lottery value acquired when the ball enters the start port. The winning / failing determination means to be executed, the special symbol display device in which the special symbol is variablely displayed and the result of the winning / failing determination is shown by the stop display of the special symbol, and the special symbol indicating that the winning / failing determination is a predetermined result in the special symbol display device. When the stop display is displayed, a special game control means that enables the player to execute a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game after the stop display, and an input operation means that accepts an input operation from the player are provided. It is possible to display a normal effect on the effect display device at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. It is possible to execute an operation effect for instructing the player to perform an input operation to the input operation means during the variable display of the special symbol. It is possible to start the specific effect when the input operation to the input operation means during the execution of the operation effect is triggered or when the operation effect is completed. It is possible to display a special effect suggesting a transition to the normal effect on the effect display device after the end of the specific effect and before the stop display of the special symbol. The normal effect can be started after the end of the special effect, and the input operation to the input operation means is performed depending on the presence or absence of the input operation to the input operation means during the execution of the operation effect or during the execution of the operation effect. The duration of the special effect varies depending on the timing.

It should be noted that any combination of the above components, and those in which the components and expressions of the present invention are mutually replaced between methods, devices, systems, computer programs, recording media storing computer programs, data structures, and the like are also used. , Is effective as an aspect of the present invention.

According to an aspect of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of further improving the gameability.

It is a figure which shows the basic structure on the front side of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the basic structure on the back side of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the functional block of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure of a main board. It is a figure which shows typically the hit / fail judgment table. It is a figure which shows typically the range setting of the winning / failing lottery value for each set value. It is a figure which shows typically the symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern table schematically. It is a figure which shows typically the advance hit / fail judgment table referred to in the advance hit / miss judgment. It is a figure which shows typically the advance hit / fail judgment table corresponding to a game setting. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a sub-board. It is a figure which shows the outline of the mobile cooperation system typically. It is a block diagram which shows the hardware composition of a main board and a sub board schematicly. It is a block diagram which shows the hardware composition of an effect control device schematicly. It is a flowchart which shows the control start processing of the main board in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process of S124 in FIG. 15 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process of S126 in FIG. 15 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of S120 in FIG. 15 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of an interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the control start processing of the sub-board in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of S518 in FIG. 20 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process when the command is received from the main board. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process when the timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process when a sub CPU receives a command from a control CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process when the timer interrupt for various device control occurs. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the special symbol variation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the decorative pattern variation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a special game. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a small hit game. It is a perspective view which shows the basic structure on the outer surface of a slot machine. It is a rear view of the housing door part exposed when the housing door part is opened. It is a front view which shows the internal structure of the housing base part exposed when the housing door part is opened. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of a reel. It is a functional block diagram of a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a basic game in a slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the hardware composition of the main control unit and the sub-control unit schematicly. It is a block diagram which shows the hardware composition of the effect display control part schematicly. It is a flowchart which shows the main program control processing of the main control device in a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control unit. It is a figure which shows the flow of a variation effect schematically. It is a figure which shows the production pattern of the advance suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows typically the first half of the production process of the advance suggestion effect pattern 1. It is a figure which shows typically the latter half of the production process of the advance suggestion effect pattern 1. It is a figure which shows typically the latter half of the production process of the advance suggestion effect pattern 2. It is a figure which shows typically the production process of the advance suggestion effect pattern 3. It is a figure which shows a part of the production process of a pre-suggestion effect pattern 4 schematically. It is a figure which shows a part of the production process of a pre-suggestion effect pattern 5 schematically. It is a figure which shows typically the production process of the advance suggestion effect pattern 6. It is a figure which shows a part of the production process of a pre-suggestion effect pattern 7 schematically. It is a figure which shows a part of the production process of a pre-suggestion effect pattern 9 schematically. It is a figure which shows typically the effect process of the advance suggestion effect pattern 10, 11. It is a figure which shows typically the effect process of the advance suggestion effect pattern 12. It is a figure which shows typically the effect process of the advance suggestion effect pattern 15. It is a figure which shows typically the production process of the advance suggestion effect pattern 19. It is a figure which shows typically the effect process of the advance suggestion effect pattern 20. It is a figure which shows typically the first half of the production process of the advance suggestion effect over a plurality of fluctuations. It is a figure which shows typically the latter half of the production process of the advance suggestion effect over a plurality of fluctuations. It is a figure which shows typically the production process in which a specific effect does not occur after the end of the advance suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the expectation degree of the battle reach production via a normal route and a special route. It is a figure which shows the display example of the effect selection screen. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect process when a button effect is executed. It is a figure which shows an example of the production process of a button fanning effect and a button effect. It is a figure which shows typically the effect process that the decorative symbol comes off and is fixed and stopped after the execution of a special effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation of the production process in which the time is adjusted by the special production. It is a figure which shows typically the effect process that the decorative symbol hits and stops after the execution of a special effect. It is a figure which shows typically the effect process in which a decorative pattern changes again after the execution of a special effect. It is a figure which shows typically the production process of a step-up effect. It is a figure which shows typically the production process of a special step-up effect. It is a figure which shows typically the production process of the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the game flow schematically. It is a figure which shows an example of the production process of a special pseudo-ream zone. It is a table which shows an example of the symbol combination at the time of temporary stop of a decorative symbol. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination at the time of a fixed stop of a decorative symbol. It is a figure which shows typically the effect pattern which can be executed in a special pseudo-ream zone. It is a figure which shows the effect pattern that the pseudo variation is executed 12 times. It is a figure which shows the effect pattern which the pseudo variation is executed 18 times. It is a figure which shows the pseudo-variation scenario schematically. It is a figure which shows an example of a pattern change pattern and a band color change pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of a pattern change pattern and a band color change pattern. It is a table which shows an example of the symbol combination of a premier pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of a pattern change pattern and a band color change pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of a pattern change pattern and a band color change pattern. An example of the combination of the pattern change pattern and the band color change pattern is shown.

(Prerequisite technology)
In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of games corresponding to the conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machine are mixed. The second game is preferentially executed so that the first game and the second game as the plurality of games are not executed at the same time. Further, in order to achieve both of these playability, a plurality of start winning openings, a plurality of special symbol display devices, and a plurality of hold lamps are provided. It is designed so that the number of big hits in the second game is generally larger than the number of big hits in the first game. For example, the second game has a higher probability of becoming a big hit with a probability change, and the second game has a larger number of unit games constituting a special game when a big hit occurs (opening time of the big winning opening). A long open unit game and a short open unit game with a short open time are mixed in one special game, and even if the number of unit games is the same, the second game is a longer open unit game than the first game. The second game is designed to have a relatively higher profit than the first game, such as (including the case where the number of games is large). On top of that, at first, aim for the first hit in the first game, and after the big hit in the first game gives a shorter time, aim for the second game repeatedly and get a lot of balls. Realize.

FIG. 1 shows a basic structure on the front side of a pachinko gaming machine. The pachinko gaming machine 100 is mainly composed of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board. The gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front frame 102, a transparent plate 103, a door 104, an upper ball plate 105, a lower ball plate 106, a launch handle 107, a speaker 108, an effect button 109, and a cross key 110. Includes decorative lamp 111. The outer frame 101 has an opening portion and is a frame body for fixing the pachinko gaming machine 100 at a position where it should be installed. The front frame 102 is a frame body that matches the opening portion of the outer frame 101, and is attached to the outer frame 101 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame 102 includes a mechanism for launching a game ball, a mechanism for detachably accommodating the game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like.

The transparent plate 103 is formed of glass or the like and is supported by the door 104. The door 104 is attached to the front frame 102 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball plate 105 has a mechanism for storing the game balls, sending the game balls to the launch rail, extracting the game balls from the lower ball plate 106, and the like. The lower ball plate 106 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Speakers 108 are provided on the left and right sides of the upper part of the door 104, and sound effects and music sounds according to the game state and the production are output by means for controlling the production. Most of the resin members constituting the appearance of the door 104 are translucent, and the decorative lamp 111 is provided inside the transparent member. The decorative lamp 111 is an LED that emits light in various colors according to the game state, the effect, etc. by means for controlling the effect, and plays a role of the effect by blinking or the like.

The game board 80 has a first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, a large winning opening 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, and a general winning port 33 on the game area 81 partitioned by the rail 82. , Out port 34, effect display device 60, center decoration 64. The center decoration 64 is a decorative resin member provided so as to form a screen frame of the effect display device 60 over the substantially central portion of the game area 81 and the upper portion and the right portion thereof, and is a flow path of the game ball and the effect display device. It has 60 functions such as protection and decoration. A stage 65 on which the inflowing game ball rolls is formed at the lower part of the center decoration 64, and the falling direction from the stage 65 is the direction of entering the first starting port 11 and the first starting port 11 depending on the rolling method. It is distributed to the side direction that does not enter the ball. At the upper part of the center decoration 64, a movable accessory 66 that is driven according to the content of the effect and performs an effect is provided. In the game area 81, a plurality of mechanisms such as game nails and windmills (not shown) for forming a flow path of the game ball are installed. In this specification, "winning ball", "winning prize", and "falling in" may be synonymous with each other. In addition, each winning opening and each entry opening may be composed of a "passing opening" (also called a "gate" or "through chucker") of a type through which a game ball passes, and the "entry ball" may be formed. "Prize," "fall," and "pass" may also be synonymous with each other.

The first starting port 11 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first game, and the second starting opening 12 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second game. The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 are configured so that the ball can be aimed at one side depending on the launch strength of the game ball according to the player's intention. The first starting port 11 is provided at a substantially central lower portion in the game area 81, and the second starting port 12 is provided directly below the first starting port 11. Left-handed, that is, when the ball is hit relatively weakly aiming to flow to the left passage of the center decoration 64, it is possible or easy to enter the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12, while right-handed. That is, when the ball is hit relatively strongly aiming to flow to the right passage of the center decoration 64, the ball can enter the second starting port 12 or is easy to enter, but cannot enter the first starting port 11. Alternatively, a flow path is formed by arranging the game nails so as to make it difficult to enter the ball. However, normally, the upper part of the opening of the second starting port 12 is covered with the first starting port 11 to prevent the inflow of the game ball. Therefore, unless the expanding mechanism of the second starting port 12 is opened, the second starting port 12 is opened. It is impossible or difficult to enter the ball at 12. The winning / failing lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player, and is executed every time a ball is entered into the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12. To.

The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be provided at positions separated from each other to such an extent that it is possible to strike a target depending on the firing strength of the game ball. The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be installed separately on the left side and the right side of the game area 81, respectively, so that it is difficult for a game ball aiming at one of them to enter the other. For example, the first starting port 11 is provided at a position where it is possible or easy to enter the ball when it is left-handed, that is, when it is aimed to flow to the left passage of the center decoration 64 and fired relatively weakly. The second starting port 12 is provided at a position where it is possible to enter the ball or it is easy to enter the ball when the ball is hit right-handed, that is, when the ball is launched relatively strongly aiming at flowing into the right passage of the center decoration 64.

The first starting port 11 includes a first starting winning detection device 16. The first start winning detection device 16 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 11, and generates first starting winning information indicating the entry at the time of entry. The second starting port 12 includes a second starting winning detection device 17, an ordinary electric accessory 90 (so-called electric tulip) which is an expansion mechanism, and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory 90. Be prepared. The second start winning detection device 17 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting opening 12, and generates second starting winning information indicating the entry at the time of entry.

The first operating port 31 is provided at a position on the left side of the game area 81 and includes the first passage detection device 36. The first passage detection device 36 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the first operating port 31, and generates passage information indicating the passage at the time of passage. The second operating port 32 is provided at a position on the right side of the game area 81 and includes the second passage detection device 37. The second passage detection device 37 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the second operating port 32, and generates passage information indicating the passage at the time of passage. The passage of the game ball through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 triggers an open lottery to determine whether or not to expand the ordinary electric accessory 90. When the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol, which is a symbol showing the determination result of the open lottery, is variably displayed on the normal symbol display unit 45. Therefore, the open lottery is also called "ordinary symbol lottery". After a predetermined time has passed from the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol stops. When the normal symbol stops at the hit symbol, the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded by the driving force of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91, and the possibility of entering the second starting port 12 is increased. As a modification, the number of operating ports may be one, and the game area 81 may be provided at a position on the left side.

Each of the three general winning openings 33 includes a general winning detection device 38 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The general winning detection device 38 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 33, and generates general winning information indicating the entry at the time of entry.

The large winning opening 20 includes a large winning opening detection device 25 for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a large winning opening solenoid 92 for opening and closing the large winning opening 20. The grand prize detection device 25 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the grand prize opening 20, and generates the grand prize opening winning information indicating the entry at the time of entry. The big winning opening 20 is a horizontally rectangular winning opening that opens as a "big hit" when the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 stops in a predetermined mode. The big winning opening 20 is provided at a position on the upper right side of the out opening 34. As a modified example, another large winning opening may be provided at the lower center of the game area 81 or above or below the large winning opening 20, and a plurality of large winning openings may be provided. The out port 34 is a discharge port through which a game ball that has not entered any of the winning ports is discharged, and includes an out detection device 39. The out detection device 39 is a sensor that detects a game ball that is discharged through the out port 34, and generates discharge information indicating the detection at the time of detection. The out opening 34 is provided at the lowermost center portion of the game area 81 so that all the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings can be guided and passed through. A plurality of out detection devices 39 may be provided side by side while securing a game ball passage having a sufficient width to prevent the out port 34 from being clogged with balls.

A symbol display unit 120 is arranged below the outside of the game area 81 on the game board 80. The symbol display unit 120 includes a first special symbol display unit 41, a second special symbol display unit 42, a first special symbol hold display unit 71, a second special symbol hold display unit 72, a normal symbol display unit 45, and a normal diagram. Each display unit such as a hold display unit 75, a game status display unit 76, and an abnormality notification unit 77 is provided. Specifically, the first special symbol display unit 41 corresponding to the first game and the second special symbol display unit 42 corresponding to the second game are arranged side by side at the lower left position, and the first special symbol The variation of 51 and the second special symbol 52 is displayed.

The first special symbol 51 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the first winning / failing lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 11, and is a special game when stopped in a predetermined hit mode. A big hit will occur. The second special symbol 52 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the second winning / failing lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 12, and is a special game when stopped in a predetermined hit mode. A big hit will occur. The first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42 are 8-segment LEDs composed of, for example, 7 segments forming a "figure 8" and 8 segments of 1 segment representing a "dot". It is a display device of. With an 8-segment LED, a numerical value equivalent to 8 bits can be expressed by combining 8 segments. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 represented by the combination of segments do not necessarily form the body of letters or numbers, and may be generally meaningless symbols formed by the combination of each segment. .. These symbols are replaced one after another at high speed and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42, or a predetermined display (for example, "-") and non-display (for example, all lights are turned off) are displayed. By displaying the symbol corresponding to the determination result after being repeated for a predetermined time, the symbol variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is realized. The first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42 use LED dot arrays that are not 8-segment LEDs, and a plurality of types of first special symbol 51 and second are used depending on the combination of lighting patterns and lighting colors. The special symbol 52 may be expressed.

Further, since the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 do not necessarily have to have a directing role, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol at the lower left of the game area 81 are required. The display unit 42 displays the image in an inconspicuous size. However, when adopting a method of expressing the special symbol itself without using a decorative symbol by giving it a directing role, the special symbol is displayed on another display device such as a liquid crystal display instead of the 8-segment LED. It may be configured to be made to.

A first special symbol holding display unit 71 is provided above the first special symbol display unit 41 as a holding lamp for special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the first game, and a second special symbol display unit 42 is provided above the second special symbol display unit 42. The second special symbol hold display unit 72 is provided as a hold lamp for the special symbol change corresponding to the game of. The first special figure reservation display unit 71 is composed of two lamps, and the number of the winning / failing lottery values held in the first game is determined by the number of lighting or the number of blinking lamps (hereinafter, the number of the winning / failing lottery values held). (Simply also called "holding number") is displayed. The number of holds on the first special figure hold display unit 71 is the number (number) of acquisitions of lottery values based on winning a prize in the first start port 11 while the first special symbol 51 is changing or the special game is being executed. Indicates the number of winning balls that are present and the symbol change has not yet been executed. The second special figure hold display unit 72 is also composed of two lamps, and displays the number of holdes in the second game according to the number of lights or the number of blinks. The number of holds in the second special figure hold display unit 72 is the number of times (number) of lottery values obtained based on winning a prize in the second start port 12 while the second special symbol 52 is changing or the special game is being executed. Indicates the number of winning balls that are present and the symbol change has not yet been executed. The number of hold of the winning / failing lottery value is also displayed at the lower part of the screen of the effect display device 60 in a form represented by the number of lighting of the hold lamp image.

A normal symbol display unit 45 is provided on the right side of the symbol display unit 120. For convenience, the ordinary symbol display unit 45 is composed of two lamps, and the display state of the ordinary symbol is expressed by the lighting combination thereof. First, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is expressed by blinking the first lamp and the second lamp at the same time, and finally, the stop symbol of the normal symbol is expressed by the combination of the lighting states of the first lamp and the second lamp. Is expressed. For example, turning on the first lamp and turning off the second lamp expresses the stop symbol of disconnection, turning off the first lamp and turning on the second lamp expresses the first hitting mode, and the first The second hit mode is expressed by lighting both the lamp and the second lamp.

Further, on the right side of the normal symbol display unit 45, a normal symbol hold display unit 75 is provided as a hold lamp for changing the normal symbol. The normal symbol hold display unit 75 is also composed of two lamps, and displays the number of hold of normal symbol fluctuations according to the number of lamps lit or the number of blinks. The number of reserved normal symbol changes is the number of game balls that have passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 during the changing of the normal symbol, and the number of normal symbol lottery for which the normal symbol change has not yet been executed. Is shown.

The symbol display unit 120 is provided with a game status display unit 76 and an abnormality notification unit 77. The game state display unit 76 is a display unit that displays a display corresponding to a game state such as a specific game state, which will be described later, and is composed of, for example, one lamp and one 7-segment LED. For example, each game status is notified by turning on the lamp when the probability is fluctuating, blinking when the ball is easy to enter, and turning off when the normal state is in the normal state, and the 7-segment LED is displayed during the execution of the special game. Displays the number of unit games (number of rounds) to be executed in the special game. The abnormality notification unit 77 is a display unit that notifies a part of the abnormality of the game machine, and is composed of, for example, a plurality of lamps, and notifies the abnormality by a lighting pattern according to the type of abnormality. In addition, these display units may not be centrally arranged in the symbol display unit 120, and each display unit may be individually configured, or may be divided into a plurality of display devices which are appropriately arranged. Further, the notification of the gaming state such as the specific gaming state may be configured to be performed only for a predetermined period such as a certain time after returning from the power failure.

At the substantially center of the game area 81, an effect display device 60 is provided so that the screen is exposed from the screen frame formed by the center decoration 64, and the decorative symbol 61 linked to the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 is provided. Display the fluctuation of the production image including. Hereinafter, such a display is referred to as "design variation" or "variation display" or the like.

The effect display device 60 is a display device including a liquid crystal display that variablely displays the decorative symbol 61 in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52. The decorative symbol 61 is a symbol for visually producing the determination result display of the lottery shown by the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. As the decorative symbol 61, the effect display device 60 displays, for example, a moving image in which a plurality of rows of symbols imitating a game of a slot machine are varied in a central region of the screen. In this embodiment, the symbols composed of the numbers "0" to "9" are displayed in three columns and varied, and the hit or miss is indicated by the combination of the three symbols that are finally stopped and displayed. Each of the plurality of symbols constituting the decorative symbol 61 is composed of numbers, letters, or symbols decorated with colors and patterns, and these numbers, letters, and symbols are common to all symbols. It may be configured by adding a different pattern to each and integrating them. This pattern is a pattern on which a motif related to the theme of decoration or production set in the model of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is drawn, and may be, for example, a pattern on which a character of a person or an animal is drawn. The decorative design 61 is switched between the case where the design including the design is integrally displayed and the case where the design is separated and only the numbers, letters, and symbols are displayed in a variable manner according to the development of the effect. It may be configured to be. In the background of the variable display of the decorative symbol 61, a moving image having a directing effect related to the theme of the decoration or effect set for the model of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is displayed in conjunction with the variation of the symbol.

The effect display device 60 is composed of a liquid crystal display which is a high-definition dot matrix type display device, but the width of the display area may be about half the width of the game area, or a large size exceeding half. There may be. In the case of a large size, the game ball passage on the right side of the effect display device is formed with a passage width sufficient for one game ball to pass through, and if the player launches the so-called "right-handed" with the maximum strength, the right-hand passage will almost certainly occur. The game ball can be passed through, and it can be distinguished from the so-called "left-handed". The effect display device 60 may be composed of a combination of a plurality of display devices as well as a case of being composed of a single display device. In the case of a plurality of displays, displays of different sizes such as a combination of a main liquid crystal and a sub liquid crystal may be combined, the sub liquid crystal may be arranged at a position adjacent to the main liquid crystal, or a position other than the game board, for example, a firing handle. It may be installed in the vicinity of (upper ball plate, right decorative lamp, etc.). When installed in the vicinity of the launch handle, it may be configured in the form of a touch panel that can be operated and input by the player. The effect display device 60 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be configured by a display device such as an organic EL display, a mechanical display means such as a drum rotation type, or a display means such as an LED matrix type. ..

The effect button 109 is an operation input means that the player presses to input a predetermined instruction to the game machine according to the effect content, and the effect content or the like is changed according to the pressing mode. The effect button 109 is provided on the front frame 102. The effect button 109 is normally stored in the front frame 102, but a rod-shaped member is attached to the back side of the effect button 109, and the rod-shaped member and the effect button 109 are oriented substantially perpendicular to the board surface. It is provided so that it can be projected. The rod-shaped member and the effect button 109 function as an effect lever 112 in a state of projecting to the outside, and the player can hold the effect button 109 and pull the effect lever 112 downward. This also allows the player to input a predetermined instruction to the game machine. The cross key 110 is an operation input means for the player to input a direction instruction to the game machine, and is provided on the outer wall surface on the left side of the upper ball plate 105.

The game method and control flow performed in the game machine having the above configuration will be outlined. When the player rotates the launch handle 107 by hand, the game balls stored in the upper ball plate 105 are guided one by one to the rail 82 and launched to the game area 81 with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle. .. When the player fixes the rotation position of the firing handle 107 by hand, the firing of the game ball is repeated at regular time intervals. The game ball launched to the upper part of the game area 81 hits a plurality of game nails, a windmill, a center decoration 64, and the like, and falls in a direction corresponding to the way of hitting. When a game ball falls into each of the general winning opening 33, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, and the large winning opening 20, the winning ball according to the type of the winning opening is the upper ball plate 105 or the lower. It is paid out to the ball plate 106. The game balls that fall into each winning opening such as the general winning opening 33 are treated as safe balls, and the game balls that fall into the out opening 34 are treated as out balls. The specification may be such that the discharge of the safe sphere is excluded from the detection by the out detection device 39, or the safe sphere is also guided to the area where the out detection device 39 is provided and all the discharge is detected by the out detection device 39. May be. Alternatively, the specification may be such that the guide of the safe ball and the detection of the safe ball by the out detection device 39 are not performed, and the total of the number of detected balls of the safe ball added to the number of detected balls of the out ball is used as the number of discharged balls.

Further, when the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol is variably displayed on the normal symbol display unit 45, and is stopped and displayed after the lapse of the variable display time determined prior to the display. When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first hit mode or the second hit mode, the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded based on the hit mode of the stopped and displayed symbol and the game state when the stop is displayed. .. That is, when the gaming state when the symbol is stopped is the normal gaming state and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first hit mode, a short opening of 0.1 seconds is executed as the opening of the normal electric accessory 90. Further, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first hit mode in the specific game state (for example, the easy ball entry state), the normal symbol is in the second hit mode in the normal state and the specific game state (for example, the easy ball entry state). When the stop display is displayed, a long opening for 6 seconds is executed as the opening of the normal electric accessory 90. Here, the winning probability of the normal symbol and the execution probability of the long opening are set so as to differ depending on the game state. Specifically, in the open lottery in the normal state, the normal symbol wins with a probability of 1/100, and the execution probability of the short opening in that case (the probability that the winning symbol of the first winning mode is selected) is 1 /. 3. The execution probability of long opening (probability of selecting the hit symbol of the second hit mode) is set to 2/3. Further, in the open lottery in the specific game state (for example, the ball entry easy state), the normal symbol is hit with a probability of 99/100, and the selection probability of the first hit mode and the second hit mode is the same as that in the normal game state. However, it is set so that the long opening is executed regardless of the winning mode. In this way, in the easy-to-enter state, the function of changing the hit probability of the normal symbol (probability change from 1/100 to 99/100) and the function of extending the opening time (the opening time when the stop is displayed in the first hit mode is 0). The ease of entering the second starting port 12 is improved by (extending from .1 second to 6.0 seconds). The function of extending the operating period of the ordinary electric accessory 90 (long opening) is sometimes called "opening extension".

As described above, by setting the probability of long opening to be higher than the probability of short opening in the normal state, long opening is executed at a constant rate even in the normal state when the normal symbol is won. .. As a modification, on the contrary, in the normal state, the probability of short opening may be higher than the probability of long opening, the specification may have the same probability of both, or the specification may always be short opening. Good. Further, when the ball is in the easy-to-enter state, the ease of entering the second starting port 12 may be enhanced by using three functions including a function of shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. In that case, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is, for example, 10 seconds in the normal state and 2 seconds in the easy-to-enter state. The winning probability of the open lottery in the normal state may be set to zero (0/100), and the normal electric accessory 90 may be expanded only when the open lottery is performed in the easy-to-enter state. Further, when the normal electric accessory 90 expands, it may be notified in advance to that effect, the hold of the normal symbol change may be pre-read and notified before the start of the change of the normal symbol, or the normal symbol may be notified. It may be notified during the fluctuation.

As a modification of the opening mode when the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 is opened for a long time, the total opening time is increased to about 6 seconds by repeating the opening for 2 seconds, which is longer than the short opening, three times. It may be an embodiment. Further, a plurality of combinations of the opening time and the number of opening times may be prepared, and one of them may be selected. For example, when the 2-second opening is performed 3 times, the total opening time is the same as when the 6-second opening is performed once, but the former is longer than the latter when the interval period is included. Therefore, especially in the configuration of the modified example in which the second starting port 12 is arranged in the right-handed direction, the former player enters the ball assuming that the player who notices the opening adjusts the hitting direction to the second starting port 12 from that point. It can be said that the chance is long. Further, it may be configured so that there are a plurality of hit types of ordinary symbols, and the opening mode of the expansion mechanism may be different depending on the hit types. For example, when the normal symbol is the first hit, the 0.1 second opening is set once in the normal state, the 1 second opening is set three times in the easy-to-enter state, and the second hit is the normal state. Then, the 6-second opening may be performed once, and the 2-second opening may be performed twice in the easy-to-enter state.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in the first special symbol display unit 41, the second special symbol display unit 42, and the effect display device 60. , And the decorative symbol 61 are displayed in a variable manner. The variable display of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is stopped after the lapse of the variable display time determined prior to the display. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in a variable manner according to a variable pattern in which the variation mode from the start to the stop of the variation is defined. The decorative symbol 61 is variablely displayed according to a variable effect pattern in which the variation mode from the start to the stop of the variation is defined. A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns and fluctuation production patterns are prepared, and each has various fluctuation times, long and short. While the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are variablely displayed according to the variation pattern, the decorative symbol 61 is variablely displayed according to the variation effect pattern having the same variation time. In the variation pattern, the variation display time is set for each pattern as the end condition of the symbol variation, and the variation of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 occurs when the variation display time elapses. It will be stopped. Hereinafter, the variation display of the decorative symbol 61 displayed according to the variation effect pattern will be illustrated, and the variation effect pattern will be briefly described. Details of the variation pattern and the method of determining the variation effect pattern will be described separately.

As an example of the variation display of the decorative symbol 61, first, when the variation starts, the symbols are varied in all three rows like the reel rotation of the slot machine, and when the variation end timing is approached, the symbols are stopped one by one in the final stop mode. The symbol combination as is displayed. As an operation when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol 190 is stopped, it may be controlled to stop a plurality of rows at the same time instead of one row at a time so that the effect display other than the decorative symbol is noticed during the variable display, or the effect display other than the decorative symbol may be noticed in a shorter fluctuation time. It may be possible to display the symbol variation. In addition, as an operation at the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol 190, it is controlled so as to delay the start of the fluctuation of some columns according to the subsequent development (type of effect pattern, etc.) in the fluctuation to produce a feeling of expectation. You may do it.

Next, the variation effect pattern will be briefly described. The variable effect pattern includes a normal off-effect pattern, a reach-out effect pattern, and a reach jackpot effect pattern. The normal out-of-order effect pattern is an effect pattern when displaying a normal out-of-order symbol combination. The out-of-reach effect pattern is an effect pattern when displaying a combination of out-of-reach symbols through a reach state, which is a state in which one more symbol is aligned and a big hit is made. The reach jackpot effect pattern is an effect pattern when displaying the symbol combination of the jackpot after the reach state. In particular, the pattern when going through the reach state includes a pattern having various fluctuation times, long and short, and a reach pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time is called "normal reach", and a reach pattern with a long fluctuation time is called "super reach". ". The normal out-of-reach effect pattern, the reach out-of-reach effect pattern, and the reach jackpot effect pattern are classified into a normal pattern displayed in a normal state and a time-saving pattern displayed in a time-saving state, respectively. However, even in the normal state, if there is a second symbol variation corresponding to the entry of the ball into the second starting port 12, the probability that the jackpot will be accompanied by a probability change or the probability that the number of unit games of the special game will increase is the first. Since it can be said that the chance state is higher than the first fluctuation corresponding to the entry of the ball into the 1 start port 11, a pattern for chance effect indicating that the chance is a relatively advantageous jackpot may be used. In the embodiment, the time saving pattern is used in the time saving state, but since the time saving is accompanied in the probability changing state, the time saving pattern is also used in the probability changing state. However, in the modified example, the specification may be such that a pattern for probabilistic change different from that for time saving is used in the probable change state. Alternatively, a specification that uses a common pattern for time saving and probability variation may be used, or a specification that uses a probability variation pattern in the probability variation state without using the time reduction pattern in particular may be used.

When the number of hold of the winning / failing lottery reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3), the symbol variation time in the case of a loss is shortened than usual in order to improve the game efficiency (hereinafter, also referred to as "shortening variation"). Similarly, when the number of winning / failing lottery pending is 4, the symbol fluctuation time in the case of losing is further shortened as compared with the case of the above 3 in order to further improve the game efficiency (hereinafter, also referred to as "ultra-shortening fluctuation"). ). When the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 at the time of stopping are in the stop mode showing a big hit after the above-mentioned symbol variation, it is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. The game shifts to a special game, and the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 20 is started. The stop mode of the decorative symbol 61 showing the jackpot is, for example, a combination mode in which the types of the three symbols match.

There are two types of special games, normal special games and shortened special games, and there is a big difference in the profits from the winning prize balls. Usually, the special game is started by displaying the production screen called the start demo time. After the screen display of the start demo time, the big winning opening 20 is opened, and the opening is continued for about 30 seconds, or is temporarily closed after 9 or more game balls have fallen. The process from opening to closing of the large winning opening 20 is basically called a unit game, but there may be a case where a plurality of short-time openings are repeated during one unit game. After the opening and closing of the large winning opening 20 or the unit game is repeated a predetermined number of times, for example, 4 times or 10 times, the special game is usually ended by the display of the effect screen called the end demo time. In normal special games, you can expect enough balls to enter 9 or more balls per unit game, and you can get enough prize balls (also called "balls") by 10 unit games, which is a big profit. Is obtained. A special game in which 10 unit games are repeated is appropriately referred to as a "10R jackpot", and a special game in which 4 unit games are repeated is appropriately referred to as a "4R jackpot". Although the unit game is repeated 10 times, in some unit games, the unit game is substantially repeated a small number of times by opening the large winning opening 20 for a shorter time (for example, 1.6 seconds) than usual. It is also possible to realize a normal special game similar to the one (sometimes referred to as a "substantial nR jackpot").

On the other hand, in the shortened special game, the start demo time and the end demo time are short or almost nonexistent (0.1 seconds, etc.), and the large winning opening 20 is opened for 1.6 seconds in one unit game. This unit game is repeated twice to end the shortened special game. In the shortened special game, since the opening of the large winning opening 20 is only repeated twice for a very short time, it is almost impossible to enter the large winning opening 20, and the number of balls is substantially zero or a small number (for example, number). This is a special game that is equal to the number of balls to be paid out according to the number of balls entered in one round, such as about 10 balls to several tens of balls. A special game in which two unit games are repeated is also appropriately referred to as a "2R jackpot". Although the number of unit games is the same as that of the normal special game, the shortened special game can be realized by opening the large winning opening 20 for a shorter time than usual in all the unit games.

Further, when the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 and the decorative symbol 61 at the time of stopping are in the predetermined small hit mode after the above-mentioned symbol variation, the small hit game composed of one unit game. The opening and closing operation of the grand prize opening 20 is executed. In one unit game constituting the small hit game, the big winning opening 20 is opened for about 1.6 seconds, and the operation mode is similar to the 2R big hit in appearance.

When a special game occurs and the hit stop symbol at that time is in a specific mode (for example, "777"), the probability change, which is one of the specific games, is further started after the end of the special game. During the probability change, a winning / losing lottery with a higher probability of winning than the normal probability state is performed, and a new special game may occur relatively early. It should be noted that the fact that the judgment result of the winning / failing lottery is a specific big hit, that is, a big hit accompanied by a probability change is not clearly indicated from the appearance, and a latent probability change state that is not explicitly notified as a decorative pattern or production content may be used. In that case, the effect display device 60 does not clearly indicate whether the change is probable or non-probable even during the probable change. In addition, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, it may be clearly shown to the effect display device 60 whether it is a probabilistic change or a non-probable change.

In the normal game after the special game is completed, the easy entry state, which is one of the specific game states, is started. In the easy-to-enter state, the winning probability of the open lottery is increased more than usual, and the opening extension is executed so that the opening time of the normal electric accessory 90 is extended. Since the number of hits of the normal symbol per fixed time can be increased and the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port 12 is also increased, it is highly possible that the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 will increase. Therefore, as a result of increasing the chances of obtaining a prize ball by entering the second starting port 12, it is possible to continue playing while hardly reducing the number of balls held or gradually increasing the number of balls held.

In the easy-to-enter state, as one of the specific game states, the so-called time reduction, in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is shorter than that in the normal state, is further executed. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is returned to the original fluctuation time after a predetermined number of fluctuations, for example, 100 fluctuations are displayed, but reaches the fluctuation number. If a big hit occurs before, the time reduction will end once. Since the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is shortened in the shortened time, until a big hit occurs as compared with the case where the symbol fluctuates with the normal fluctuation time. The time can be shortened, and the ease of obtaining a big hit can be relatively increased. In the modified example, the specification may be such that the time reduction of the special symbol is not carried out in the state where the ball is easily entered.

FIG. 2 shows the basic structure of the pachinko gaming machine on the back side. The power switch 150 is a switch for turning on / off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The main board 200 controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and processes all game operations such as a lottery when winning a prize in the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12. The sub-board 300 includes a liquid crystal unit 151, controls the display content of the effect display device 60, and changes the effect display content particularly according to the determination result of the main board 200. The back setting mechanism 152 includes a prize ball tank 153, a flow path for the prize balls, a payout device 154 for paying out the prize balls, and the like. The payout device 154 pays out the game balls supplied from the prize ball tank 153 to the upper ball plate 105 according to the winning of each winning opening. The payout control board 155 controls the payout operation by the payout device 154. The launching device 156 launches the stored balls of the upper ball plate 105 into the game area 81 one by one. The launch control board 157 controls the launch operation of the launch device 156. The power supply board 158 supplies electric power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine 100. A performance display unit 159 is provided on the substrate of the main substrate 200. The performance display unit 159 is composed of four 7-segment LEDs that display, for example, a four-digit number for the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of launch balls, which is the total of safe balls and out balls.

A setting changing device 170 is provided on the board of the main board 200. The setting change device 170 is a device for changing a setting to one of a plurality of settings (also referred to as a game setting) corresponding to a plurality of game specifications. For example, six levels of settings (settings 1 to 6) are prepared as game settings, and the probability of a big hit can be different depending on the game settings. Specifically, the larger the numerical value among the settings 1 to 6, the more favorable the game specifications can be to the player. When each of the jackpot probabilities from the settings 1 to the setting 6 is M1 to M6, M1 ≤ M2 ≤ M3. The jackpot probability of each setting can be determined so that ≦ M4 ≦ M5 ≦ M6. It is not essential to assign different jackpot probabilities to different game settings, and the jackpot probabilities may be the same between different game settings. For example, the same jackpot probability may be assigned to all the game settings from setting 1 to setting 6.

The setting change device 170 has a setting key cylinder 171 for inserting a setting key held by an employee of the game store, a setting change button 172 for changing the setting to one of a plurality of game settings, and a set setting value. It includes a setting display unit 173 that lights up and displays, and a setting memory that stores the set setting value. The setting key cylinder 171 is a turnkey type switch for shifting to a state in which the setting can be changed (hereinafter referred to as "setting change state") or a state in which the setting can be confirmed (hereinafter referred to as "setting confirmation state"). First, the power switch 150 is turned off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 and the setting key is turned to turn it on, and then the power switch 150 is turned on to shift to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In order to shift to the setting change state, the power switch 150 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch (sometimes referred to as "RWM clear switch"). On the other hand, in order to shift to the setting confirmation state, the power switch 150 is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch.

When the state shifts to the setting change state, the number "1" indicating the setting 1 is displayed on the setting display unit 173 as the initial value of the game setting, and the setting can be changed by pressing the setting change button 172. The setting display unit 173 is composed of a 7-segment LED that displays a one-digit number. Each time the setting change button 172 is pressed, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 is changed in order such as 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → .... When the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the off state after changing the setting, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 at that time is stored in the setting memory and the setting change is confirmed. , You will be ready to play. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the setting confirmation state, the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173. In the setting confirmation state, even if the setting change button 172 is pressed, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 is not switched and the setting cannot be changed. After that, when the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the original state and turned off, the game becomes playable. When the setting key is turned off to enable the game, the setting display unit 173 is turned off and the current set value cannot be visually recognized.

The setting change button 172 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. In this case, if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key is not turned (setting key off state), RAM clear is executed. On the other hand, if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key is turned (setting key is on), the setting changes state when the RAM is cleared. Further, if the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch in the setting key-off state, the power is restored without clearing the RAM. On the other hand, if the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch in the setting key on state, the setting confirmation state is entered. Further, the setting display unit 173 may also be used as the performance display unit 159. In this case, the combined display unit may function as the performance display unit 159 in the game-enabled state, and may function as the setting display unit 173 in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In addition, the setting changing device 170 may not be provided so that the game setting cannot be changed.

<Functional block>
FIG. 3 shows a functional block of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Hereinafter, the functions realized by using each configuration will be described, but in the present specification, in order to match the physical configuration and the functional configuration, for example, a physical configuration such as a main board 200, a payout control board 155, a launch control board 157, etc. For the part already explained as, the term may be used as it is for convenience.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 includes a power supply board 158 that generates a power source to be used in the gaming machine based on an AC power supply (AC24V or the like) supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and a main control device that controls the basic operation of the game and the progress of the game. Main board 200, payout control board 155 as a frame control device for controlling prize ball payout, launch control board 157 for controlling launch of game balls to the game area, and directing operations and processing are controlled. The function is shared with the sub-board 300 as a sub-control device.

The main board 200 includes a first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, a large winning opening 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, and a general winning port group (first general winning port 33a, second general winning port). It is electrically connected to the port 33b), the out port 34, the symbol display unit 120, and the external information output terminal 160, and various control signals are transmitted and received to and from each of them. The payout control board 155 is electrically connected to the main board 200, the launch control board 157, and the payout device 154. The payout control board 155 transmits a launch permission signal to the launch control board 157 based on a prize ball payout transmitted from the main board 200, a signal indicating the control state of the main board 200, and the like to indirectly transmit the launch control board 157. And also controls the payout of prize balls by the payout device 154. The payout device 154 includes a payout motor 166 and a ball counting sensor 167. The launch control board 157 is electrically connected to the payout control board 155, the launch device 156, and the ball feed device 164, and the ball feed device 164 and the launch device 164 and the launch device are based on the launch permission signal transmitted from the payout control board 155. The device 156 is controlled to launch a game ball. The sub-board 300 includes an effect display device 60, a movable accessory 66 (drive motor 67, position detection sensor 68), a speaker 108, an effect input operation device 115 (effect button 109, cross key 110), a decorative lamp 111, and electrical. It is connected to and sends and receives various control signals to and from each.

Data transmission / reception between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300 is unidirectional from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300. It is arranged on the sub-board 300. Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from the configuration included in the sub board 300 to the configuration included in the main board 200, and data transmission can be performed. I can't even request it. Therefore, the sub-board 300 cannot refer to the information generated by the main board 200 unless the information is transmitted. Further, data is transmitted and received in both directions between the main board 200 and the payout control board 155, and between the payout control board 155 and the launch control board 157. However, as in the case between the main board 200 and the sub board 300, data can be transmitted and received in one direction from the main board 200 to the payout control board 155, or in one direction from the payout control board 155 to the launch control board 157. It may be configured to send and receive data.

Note that the functional blocks included in the main board 200, the payout control board 155, the launch control board 157, and the sub board 300 described below are merely examples, and as a modification, some functional blocks are mounted on other boards. It may be mounted. For example, the functional block included in the main board 200 may be mounted on the sub-board 300, or the functional block included in the launch control board 157 may be mounted on the payout control board 155. Good. Further, for example, a part of the functional block included in the main board 200 may be mounted on the main board 200, or the remaining part may be mounted on the payout control board 155. May be divided into a plurality of substrates to form one functional block as a whole.

<Main board 200>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the main board 200. The main board 200 includes a ball entry determination means 201, a performance display unit 159, a random number generation means 202, a first lottery means 211, a second lottery means 212, a preliminary judgment means 235, a general drawing lottery means 213, a hold control means 240, and a main board. Display control means 250, special game control means 260, small hit game control means 265, specific game control means 270, opening / closing control means 275, special figure adjustment means 276, main initial processing execution means 280, main power cut processing execution means 282, The main error detecting means 284, the setting changing means 286, the setting confirming means 287, and the command communication means 205 are provided.

<Entering ball determination means 201>
The ball entry determination means 201 determines the entry of a game ball into each winning opening. When the ball entry determination means 201 receives the first start winning information, it determines that the game ball has won the first start opening 11, and when it receives the second start winning information, the game ball has won the second start opening 12. to decide. When the winning ball determining means 201 receives the large winning opening winning information, it determines that the game ball has won the large winning opening 20, and when it receives the general winning information, it determines that the game ball has won the general winning opening 33. Upon receiving the passing information, the ball entry determination means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32. Upon receiving the discharge information, the ball entry determination means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the out port 34. The entry determination means 201 calculates the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of launch balls, which is the total of the safe balls and the out balls, and displays the ratio on the performance display unit 159. The ball entry determination means 201 is "number of payout balls" ÷ "number of out balls" x 100 when the probability of a big hit is a normal probability state and a normal ball entry state (so-called low probability and low entry ball). The value of is displayed on the performance display unit 159. Therefore, the performance display unit 159 displays the base in the low base state.

<Random number generation means 202>
The random number generation means 202 generates random numbers to be used for various determinations in the first lottery means 211, the second lottery means 212, and the general drawing lottery means 213. Specifically, the random number generation means 202 has random numbers from "0" to "65535" as random numbers (also referred to as "win / fail lottery values") used in the win / loss lottery by the first hit / miss determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222. A random number in the range is generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 is "0" to "255" as random numbers (also referred to as "symbol determination lottery value") used in symbol determination (symbol lottery) by the first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227. Random numbers in the range up to are generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 has "0" to "255" as random numbers (also referred to as "variation pattern determination lottery values") used in the determination of the variation pattern by the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232. Random numbers in the range up to "" are generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 generates a random number in the range of "0" to "99" as a random number used in the winning / failing lottery by the general drawing lottery means 213 by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 generates a random number in the range of "0" to "2" as a random number used when determining a normal symbol by a predetermined means. The "random number" here refers to a physical random number generated by a random number generation circuit, a genuine random number in a mathematical sense, a random number using a 16-bit counter, and a pseudo-random number such as a software random number using a random number generation algorithm. But it may be. Alternatively, it may be a random number generated by combining a hardware random number and a software random number. Further, as the random numbers acquired by the first lottery means 211 and the second lottery means 212, the random numbers generated by the same generation means may be acquired, or the random numbers generated by another generation means may be acquired. ..

<Public map lottery means 213>
When the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol lottery means 213 generates random numbers of a random number used for winning / failing lottery of the normal symbol and a random number used for determining the stop symbol of the normal symbol. Obtain from 202 and execute the lottery. The ordinary symbol lottery means 213 has a normal symbol winning / failing determination table (not shown) that is referred to for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct, and a normal symbol determination that is referred to for determining the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol to be displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 45. Hold the table. The normal symbol winning / failing judgment table defines the correspondence between the lottery value for winning / failing and the winning, and the normal symbol judgment table defines the correspondence between the lottery value for determining the stop symbol and the normal symbol. The hit / fail and stop symbols of the normal symbol are determined based on the hit probability and the symbol selection probability. When the lottery value for the winning / failing lottery of the ordinary symbol corresponds to the hit, the ordinary symbol lottery means 213 determines the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol by referring to the ordinary symbol determination table, and the lottery value for the winning / failing lottery of the ordinary symbol is set. When it corresponds to the deviation, the mode of the deviation symbol of 1 is always determined. When the result of the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol corresponds to a hit and the normal symbol stops at a predetermined symbol (first hit mode or second hit mode), the opening / closing control means 275, which will be described later, changes the mode of the stop symbol and the game state. The ordinary electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 is expanded accordingly. The expansion time is 0.1 seconds at the time of short opening and 6 seconds at the time of long opening. The lottery value of the ordinary symbol is temporarily held by the hold control means 240 described later. However, the lottery value is held only when the predetermined upper limit number of holds held by the hold control means 240 is not exceeded.

<First lottery means 211 and second lottery means 212>
The first lottery means 211 has a function of executing the first lottery related to the first game, such as a first lottery value acquisition means 216, a first hit / fail determination means 221 and a first symbol determination means 226, and a first variation pattern determination. The first winning / failing lottery is executed as a winning / failing lottery corresponding to the entry of the ball into the first starting port 11, including the means 231. Based on various lottery results by the first lottery means 211, the main display control means 250 makes a variable display of the first special symbol 51 on the first special symbol display unit 41. Further, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative symbol 61 is variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 60. The second lottery means 212 includes a second lottery value acquisition means 217, a second hit / fail determination means 222, a second symbol determination means 227, and a second variation pattern determination means 232, and corresponds to entry into the second starting port 12. The second winning / failing lottery is executed as a winning / failing lottery. Based on various lottery results by the second lottery means 212, the main display control means 250 makes a variable display of the second special symbol 52 on the second special symbol display unit 42. Further, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative symbol 61 is variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 60.

<First lottery value acquisition means 216 and second lottery value acquisition means 217>
The first lottery value acquisition means 216 acquires random numbers for various lottery and determination by the first lottery means 211 from the random number generation means 202 when the ball enters the first start port 11. Specifically, the first winning / failing lottery value for winning / failing determination by the first winning / failing determination means 221, the first symbol lottery value for determining the stop mode of the first special symbol 51 by the first symbol determining means 226, and the first variation pattern. The first pattern lottery value for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol 51 by the determination means 231 is acquired from the corresponding random number generation means. The second lottery value acquisition means 217 acquires random numbers for various lottery and determination by the second lottery means 212 from the random number generation means 202 when the ball enters the second starting port 12. Specifically, the second winning / failing lottery value for determining the winning / failing by the second winning / failing determination means 222, the second symbol lottery value for determining the stop mode of the second special symbol 52 by the second symbol determining means 227, and the second variation pattern. The second pattern lottery value for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol 52 by the determination means 232 is acquired from the corresponding random number generation means.

The first winning / failing determination means 221 executes a winning / failing determination for determining whether or not to shift to the special game based on the first winning / failing lottery value. The second winning / failing determination means 222 executes a winning / failing determination for determining whether or not to shift to the special game based on the second winning / failing lottery value. In the hit / fail judgment, more specifically, "big hit" indicating that the game shifts to the special game, "small hit" indicating that the game shifts to the small hit game, and "small hit" indicating that the game does not shift to the special game and the small hit game. It is determined which of the two is "off". The first hit / fail determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 hold a hit / fail determination table referred to in the hit / fail determination. In addition, in order to distinguish the hit / fail judgment executed at the start of the symbol variation from the preliminary hit / fail judgment described later, it is also appropriately referred to as "hit / fail judgment as the main judgment". In the present specification, when the term "table" or "selection criterion" is used, the correspondence between the first parameter such as the lottery value and the second parameter such as the value indicating the option is strictly defined by the table structure. In addition to pointing to data, it is also broadly included to be realized by a program structure that derives the second parameter from the first parameter as such a correspondence. Including them, the concept is substantially synonymous with "table" and is appropriately referred to as "selection criteria". Further, when a table structure is used, the selection criteria that are substantially one type may be composed of a combination of a plurality of structurally subdivided tables, but the term "multiple types of selection criteria" is subdivided. Shows the actual number of types of tables, not the number of converted tables.

The first hit / fail determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 hold a table corresponding to each hit / fail determination as a hit / fail determination table to be referred to in the hit / fail determination. Specifically, a hit / fail judgment table for hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means 221 (also referred to as “first hit / miss judgment table”) and a hit / fail judgment table for hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means 222 (“second hit / miss judgment table”). A table to be referred to is selected according to the winning / failing judgment to be executed while holding the "winning / failing judgment table"). In the plurality of winning / failing determination tables, the determination results of big hit, small hit, and miss are associated with the winning / failing lottery value, and the winning / failing probability is determined according to the range setting of the associated big hit. In addition, a plurality of types of winning / failing judgment tables corresponding to a plurality of game settings are prepared. Is prepared. If the probabilities of big hit, small hit, and miss are the same among the plurality of game settings, a win / fail determination table common to the plurality of game settings may be prepared.

FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing a hit / fail determination table. This figure shows a winning / failing determination table corresponding to a specific game setting, and shows a winning / failing determination table corresponding to setting 6. In the winning / failing judgment table of this figure, the judgment results of big hit, small hit, and miss are associated with the winning / failing lottery value, and the winning / failing probability of the big hit and the winning / failing probability of the small hit are associated with each associated range setting. Is decided. The first hit / fail determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 refer to the pass / fail determination table of the present figure in the hit / fail determination as the present determination. In both the first winning / failing lottery by the first winning / failing determination means 221 and the second winning / failing lottery by the second winning / failing determination means 222, a big hit is normally obtained only when the winning / failing lottery value falls within the range of 0 to 299. At the time of probability change, the range of big hits is expanded, and the big hits are obtained not only when the winning / failing lottery value corresponds to the range of 0 to 299 but also when it corresponds to the range of 300 to 2999. In this way, the range corresponding to the jackpot changes according to the gaming state. In this figure, a single hit / fail judgment table shows the jackpot range for both normal time and probability change, but the hit / fail judgment table may be prepared separately for normal time and probability change, and the first It may be prepared separately for one winning / failing lottery and for the second winning / failing lottery.

In this embodiment, even if the winning / failing lottery value does not correspond to the big hit range, if it falls within the predetermined range, it becomes a small hit. In the example of this figure, when the winning / failing lottery value acquired by the first winning / failing determination means 221 corresponds to the range of 56500 to 65535, a small hit is obtained, and the winning / failing lottery value acquired by the second winning / failing determination means 222 is 64000 to 65535. If it falls within the range, it will be a small hit. That is, the first winning / failing lottery has a wider range of small hits than the second winning / failing lottery, and small hits are more likely to occur. In this way, if it does not correspond to a big hit, it is originally all "off", but in the example of this figure, if it does not correspond to a big hit but also does not correspond to a small hit, the winning / losing lottery value range Is particularly expressed as "off". That is, when "hit or not" is considered from the viewpoint of "whether or not it is a big hit", "small hit" may be included in "missing" in a broad sense in the sense of "not a big hit". In addition, when "hit or not" is considered from the viewpoint of "hit or not", "small hit" may be included in "hit" in a broad sense together with "big hit". In this figure, an example is shown in which the judgment table for big hits and the judgment table for small hits are realized in the form of a single hit / fail judgment table, but even if each is realized as a separate table. Good. Further, the "small hit" may be provided only in one of the first game and the second game, or may not be provided in any of the games. In that case, the value corresponding to the small hit is not set in the corresponding hit / fail judgment table.

FIG. 6 schematically shows the range setting of the winning / failing lottery value for each set value. FIG. 3A shows the correspondence between the first winning / failing lottery value acquired by the first winning / failing determination means 221 and the winning / failing determination result. FIG. 3B shows the correspondence between the second winning / failing lottery value acquired by the second winning / failing determination means 222 and the winning / failing determination result. The range of the first winning / failing lottery value and the second winning / failing lottery value, which are big hits during normal times and probability changes, is 0 to 294 if the set value is "1", 0 to 295 if the set value is "2", and the set value "2". If it is "3", it is 0 to 296, if it is a set value "4", it is 0 to 297, if it is a set value "5", it is 0 to 298, and if it is a set value "6", it is 0 to 299. Therefore, as the set value becomes larger, the range of the winning / losing lottery value that becomes a big hit in the normal time increases, and the probability of becoming a big hit in the normal time increases. In addition, the range of the first winning / failing lottery value and the second winning / failing lottery value, which are big hits (that is, normally off) only at the time of probability change, should be 295 to 2949 if the set value is "1" and the set value "2". For example, 296 to 2959, for the set value "3", 297 to 2769, for the set value "4", 298 to 2979, for the set value "5", 299 to 2899, and for the set value "6", It is 300 to 2999. Therefore, as the set value becomes larger, the range of the winning / failing lottery value that becomes a big hit at the time of probability change increases, and the probability of winning a big hit at the time of probability change also increases. The range of the winning / failing lottery value is determined so that the ratio between the normal jackpot probability, which is a jackpot during normal times, and the jackpot probability, which is a jackpot during probability changes, is constant regardless of the set value. In this figure, the range of the winning / failing lottery value is defined so that the probability of the jackpot at the time of probability change is 10 times the probability of the jackpot at the normal time, and is common to all the set values "1" to "6". .. In addition, the range of the winning / failing lottery value is determined so that the probability of winning a small hit is constant regardless of the set value. In all the set values "1" to "6", a small hit is obtained when the range of the first winning / failing lottery value corresponds to 56500 to 65535, and a small hit is made when the range of the second winning / failing lottery value corresponds to 64000 to 65535. It will be a hit. The range of winning / failing lottery values outside the range of big hits or small hits is "out of line". In this figure, the jackpot probability is different for each set value, but the correspondence between the winning / failing lottery value and the winning / failing determination result may be determined so that the jackpot probability is the same between the different set values.

<1st symbol determining means 226 and 2nd symbol determining means 227>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 determine the stopped symbol at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol based on the symbol lottery value acquired from the random number generating means 202 and the result of the winning / failing determination. .. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 hold a plurality of symbol determination tables referred to for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol. Specifically, the first symbol determining means 226 holds a plurality of symbol determination tables according to the result of the hit / fail determination by the first hit / miss determination means 221 and the second symbol determining means 227 holds the hit / fail by the second hit / miss determination means 222. Holds a plurality of symbol judgment tables according to the judgment result. The first hit / miss determination means 221 holds a first symbol determination table at the time of a big hit, a first symbol determination table at the time of a small hit, and a first symbol determination table at the time of a miss, which is referred to at the time of a small hit. The second hit / miss determination means 222 holds a second symbol determination table at the time of a big hit, a second symbol determination table at the time of a small hit, and a second symbol determination table at the time of a miss, which is referred to at the time of a small hit. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 select a symbol determination table to be referred to according to the result of the hit / fail determination. In addition, in order to distinguish the symbol determination executed at the start of the symbol variation from the preliminary symbol determination described later, it is also appropriately referred to as "symbol determination as the main determination".

FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol determination table. FIG. 7 (a) is a table to be referred to when the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit, FIG. 7 (b) is a table to be referred to when the hit / fail judgment result is wrong, and FIG. 7 (c) is a table to be referred to. This is a table to be referred to when the hit / fail judgment result is a small hit. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 refer to the symbol determination table of the present figure in the symbol determination as the present determination. In each symbol determination table, the correspondence between the numbers "0" to "10" indicating the type of the special symbol and the first symbol lottery value or the second symbol lottery value is defined. The types of special symbols are associated with the hit / miss judgment results of big hit, small hit, and miss, respectively. "0" to "4" correspond to the big hit, and "5" to "9" correspond to the small hit. "10" corresponds to the disconnection. Each type is assigned a plurality of special symbols, that is, a plurality of generally meaningless symbols formed by a combination of segments.

As shown in FIG. 7 (a), the types of special symbols "0" to "4" are associated with the presence or absence of the jackpot and the probability fluctuation after the jackpot. Specifically, the type "0" indicates a 10R jackpot with a probability change as a specific jackpot, is associated with "0 to 99" in the case of the first symbol lottery value, and is "0 to 99" in the case of the second symbol lottery value. 144 ”. The type "1" indicates a 4R jackpot (or "substantially 4R hit") with a probability change as a specific jackpot, is associated with "100 to 149" in the case of the first symbol lottery value, and is associated with "100 to 149" in the case of the second symbol lottery value. It is associated with "145-149". The type "2" indicates a 2R jackpot accompanied by a probability change, and the type "2" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value "150 to 189". The type "3" indicates a 10R jackpot that is not accompanied by a probability change as a normal jackpot, and the type "3" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value "150 to 189". The type "4" indicates a 4R jackpot that is not accompanied by a probability change as a normal jackpot, and the type "4" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value "230 to 255". In this way, the selection probability for each jackpot type (that is, the content of the jackpot and the presence or absence of subsequent probability fluctuations) is determined by the size of the range of the symbol lottery value.

In addition, it is possible to provide more types of special symbols, and in that case, by configuring so that one jackpot type is determined corresponding to a plurality of special symbol types, the jackpot can be increased while increasing the symbol types. You can set fewer types. Alternatively, it is possible to subdivide into more types of jackpots in correspondence with the increased number of symbol types. Further, it is possible to provide different symbol types at the time of the first lottery and at the time of the second lottery. In this case, one jackpot type is configured to correspond to each of the type of special symbol selected at the time of the first lottery and the type of special symbol selected at the time of the second lottery. However, it is desirable to set the ratio of probability fluctuations to be the same in the first lottery and the second lottery.

As shown in FIG. 7 (b), the type "10" is associated with the symbol lottery value in the entire range in the case where the winning / failing determination result is wrong. Therefore, it is determined that the same special symbol will always be stopped and displayed in the case of deviation. It is also possible to provide a plurality of special symbols to be stopped and displayed in the case of disconnection.

As shown in FIG. 7 (c), the types of special symbols "5" to "9" are associated with small hits. The type "5" is associated with the range "0 to 49" of the symbol lottery value, and the type "6" is associated with the range "50 to 99" of the symbol lottery value. The type "7" is associated with the symbol lottery value range "100 to 149", the type "8" is associated with the symbol lottery value range "150 to 199", and the type "9" is the symbol lottery value range. It is associated with "200 to 255".

In this embodiment, in order to save the storage area in the main board 200, the table of FIG. 7 is also referred to as the pre-symbol determination table in the pre-symbol determination. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 determine that the value of "0" to "10" indicating the type of the special symbol as a result of the preliminary symbol determination is the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the indicated value and the number of holds. It should be noted that, as the preliminary symbol determination table, a table that can be further subdivided to enable complicated determination, or a table in which the determination range of the jackpot symbols that execute the same special game is summarized and simplified may be used. .. In addition, when the symbol is uniformly determined at the time of disengagement as in this embodiment, a specific symbol can be selected without referring to the acquired symbol lottery value and without preparing a symbol determination table for disengagement. You may decide.

<First variation pattern determining means 231 and second variation pattern determining means 232>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first variation pattern determining means 231 acquires, from the random number generating means 202, a variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation to be displayed on the first special symbol display unit 41 and the effect display device 60 is defined. It is determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns based on one pattern lottery value. The second variation pattern determining means 232 uses the variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation to be displayed on the second special symbol display unit 42 and the effect display device 60 is determined as the second pattern lottery value obtained from the random number generation means 202. Based on this, it is determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns. The first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 respectively refer to the variation pattern table when starting the symbol variation to determine the variation pattern of the symbol variation. Further, the first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 execute a preliminary pattern determination as to which variation pattern range the pattern lottery value corresponds to. The first fluctuation pattern determining means 231 and the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232, and the control means of the main board 200, refer to the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, and the start port. The pre-pattern judgment table used for information generation for the execution judgment of the look-ahead process at the time of entering the ball is held or shared. The fluctuation pattern defines the fluctuation time from the start to the stop of the fluctuation when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and has various fluctuation times, long and short, depending on the type. That is, in each fluctuation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation is defined, the variation display time is substantially set for each pattern as the end condition of the symbol variation, and the special symbol is set when the variation display time elapses. Fluctuation is stopped. The fluctuation pattern determination executed at the start of the symbol variation is also appropriately referred to as "variation pattern determination as the main determination" in order to distinguish it from the prior pattern determination. Further, in order to contribute to the selection of the variation effect pattern of the decorative pattern described later, it may be defined as a different type of variation pattern with the same variation time.

FIG. 8 is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table. The first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 refer to the table of the present figure (a) in the normal state, and refer to the table of the present figure (b) in the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 8A, when the winning / failing judgment result is incorrect in the normal state, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 4, "Super 1", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "0", is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 5 to 9, "Super 2", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "1", is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 10 to 19, "normal 1" which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "2" is selected, and when the pattern lottery value is 20 to 29, the normal reach of the pattern range number "3" is "normal". 2 ”is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 30 to 255, "out of reach" of the pattern range number "4" is selected. As "out of reach", different fluctuation patterns are selected according to the number of holdings. When the number of holdings is 0 to 2, the fluctuation pattern is 10 seconds, and when the number of holdings is 3, the fluctuation pattern is 7 seconds and the number of holdings. When is 4, a 4-second fluctuation pattern is selected.

In this figure, an example of mainly classifying into five types according to the fluctuation time will be described, but a plurality of fluctuation effect patterns are prepared for each of the fluctuation patterns in the sub-board 300, and dozens of types of variation effect patterns are prepared in total. Is associated with the lottery value range of each category.

The range of pattern lottery values assigned to "normal 1", "normal 2", and "out of reach" also differs depending on the number of reservations. When the number of holds is 0 or 1, it is as shown in this figure (a), but as the number of holds increases, the lottery value range of "normal 1" and "normal 2" becomes narrower, and the lottery value of "out of reach" The range becomes wider. The smaller the number of holds, the wider the lottery value range of the fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time, and the probability that the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time will be selected increases. Therefore, the smaller the number of holds, the longer the average fluctuation time, and the larger the number of holds, the shorter the average fluctuation time. By using a fluctuation pattern table in which the correspondence between the pattern lottery value range and the fluctuation pattern is different for each number of holds, it is possible to realize control in which a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is easily selected when the number of holds is small.

In the normal state, when the winning / failing judgment result is a 4R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 123, "Super 1", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "5", is selected and the pattern lottery value is set. If it is 124 to 248, "Super 2", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "6", is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 249 to 252, the normal reach of the pattern range number "7" is selected "normal 1", and if the pattern lottery value is 253 to 255, the normal reach of the pattern range number "8" is "normal". 2 ”is selected.

If the winning / failing judgment result is a 2R big hit or a small hit in the normal state, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 122, "Super 3", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "9", is selected and the pattern lottery value is set. If it is 123 to 255, "normal 3", which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "10", is selected.

When the first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 transmit the pre-determination result to the effect determining means 303 as a so-called look-ahead result, the value (0 to 10) of the pattern range number is set to the first correctness. It is transmitted together with a value indicating whether it is a lottery or a second winning / failing lottery and the number of holds. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 8, it is illustrated that a table is provided for each of the winning / failing determination results in the preliminary pattern determination. However, regardless of the winning / failing lottery result, the random number value is approximately 1 using the prior pattern determination table. In addition to deriving only information regarding which range the sub-board is located in, the control means side of the sub-board 300 may be controlled to determine what kind of variation is to be executed together with the preliminary pass / fail determination result.

In the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 8B referred to in the time saving state, the pattern lottery value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern for time saving. However, the correspondence between the range of the pattern lottery value and the fluctuation time is the same as that of FIG. “Reachless loss shortening” is a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time associated with the same lottery value range and pattern range number as “reachless loss” in FIG. 8 (a). For "shortening without reach", different fluctuation patterns are selected according to the number of holdings, a fluctuation pattern of 10 seconds when the number of holdings is 0, 1 and a fluctuation pattern of 1 second when the number of holdings is 2-4. Are selected respectively. The first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 may refer to different variation pattern tables, or may refer to different variation pattern tables according to the gaming state. For example, in a gaming machine in which the second lottery is set to be more advantageous than the first lottery and the second lottery is processed with priority over the first lottery, the second lottery is the first in spite of the easy entry state due to the shortened time. The situation in which the hold of the second lottery is exhausted and the first lottery is continuously executed is not preferable for the player. Therefore, in the out-of-ball fluctuation in the first lottery in the easy-to-enter state, a fluctuation pattern table is referred to in which a fluctuation pattern for a long time (for example, 10 seconds) that does not shorten the fluctuation time is uniformly selected regardless of the number of holdings. It may be that.

<Hold control means 240>
Returning to FIG. 4, the hold control means 240 includes the special figure hold means 241 and the normal figure hold means 242. When the first winning / failing lottery value or the second winning / failing lottery value is newly acquired, the special figure holding means 241 changes the symbol corresponding to the first winning / failing lottery value or the second winning / failing lottery value acquired before that. When is displayed, the start of the symbol variation corresponding to the newly acquired first winning / failing lottery value or the second winning / failing lottery value is suspended, and the winning / failing lottery value is stored until the start of the variation display of the corresponding symbol. Here, for each of the first special symbols, up to four, the first winning / failing lottery value, the first symbol lottery value, and the first pattern lottery value are memorized, and for the second special symbol, each of them has an upper limit of four. The second winning / failing lottery value, the second symbol lottery value, and the second pattern lottery value are stored. The normal figure holding means 242 stores the normal figure lottery value acquired by the normal figure lottery means 213 as a holding ball. The number of these holds is represented by the number of lights or the number of blinks of the first special figure hold display unit 71, the second special figure hold display unit 72, and the normal figure hold display unit 75, respectively. The number of holds by the special figure holding means 241 is also displayed on the effect display device 60.

The lottery value of the second winning / failing lottery held by the special figure holding means 241 is preferentially digested over the lottery value of the first winning / failing lottery, and the symbol variation is displayed. Therefore, even if the jackpot lottery value is held as the first win / loss lottery, as long as the lottery value is held as the second win / fail lottery, the symbol variation corresponding to the jackpot lottery value of the first win / loss lottery is not displayed. Therefore, even if a big hit is held as the first winning or losing lottery, there is a possibility that a plurality of consecutive big hits can be obtained by continuing to hit until the big hit is held as the second winning or losing lottery.

<Main display control means 250>
The main display control means 250 includes a first special figure control means 251 and a second special figure control means 252, and a normal figure control means 254. The first special symbol control means 251 displays the variation of the first special symbol 51 on the first special symbol display unit 41 according to the variation pattern determined according to the determination result of the first winning / failing lottery by the first lottery means 211. Let me. The first special symbol control means 251 sets a new symbol variation start condition that the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery performed before that has been completed. The second special symbol control means 252 displays the variation of the second special symbol 52 on the second special symbol display unit 42 according to the variation pattern determined according to the determination result of the second winning / failing lottery by the second lottery means 212. Let me. The second special symbol control means 252 also sets a new symbol variation start condition that the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery performed before that has been completed.

When the special figure holding means 241 stores the winning / failing lottery value of the second winning / failing lottery, the first special figure controlling means 251 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first winning / failing lottery. On the other hand, the second special figure control means 252 starts the symbol variation display corresponding to the second winning / failing lottery regardless of whether or not the winning / failing lottery value of the first winning / failing lottery is stored by the special figure holding means 241. As a result, when the lottery value is held in both the first winning / failing lottery and the second winning / failing lottery, the lottery value held in the second winning / failing lottery is preferentially read out and the symbol variation is displayed. In such a case, the lottery value held in the first winning / failing lottery is not read and the symbol change does not start until the number of holdings in the second winning / failing lottery becomes 0.

The first special figure control means 251 and the second special figure control means 252 are changed by the command communication means 205 described later at the timing of starting and the timing of stopping the change display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. The start command and the fluctuation stop command are transmitted to the effect determining means 303 (sub-main). When the fluctuation start command is transmitted, a value indicating each of the winning / failing judgment result, the stop symbol, and the fluctuation pattern determined or determined as the final judgment and a value indicating whether the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery is performed are set. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the fluctuation start command. When the fluctuation stop command is transmitted, the value indicating the stop symbol is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the fluctuation stop command. Further, the effect determining means 303 (sub-main) transmits a variation start command, a variation stop command, and the like to the effect control means 304 in order to control the variation display of the decorative symbol by the effect control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable display by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) is synchronized, and the interlocking is maintained. The normal symbol control means 254 causes the normal symbol display unit 45 to display the determination result of the lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 213 as a variable display of the normal symbol.

<Special figure adjustment means 276>
The special symbol adjusting means 276 waits for the start of the variable display of the other while the variable display of one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is displayed. The special figure adjusting means 276 has a second special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 12, regardless of the order in which the game ball has entered the first start opening 11 or the second start opening 12. The variation display of 52 is prioritized over the variation display of the first special symbol 51 based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 11. For example, when both the first winning / failing lottery value and the second winning / failing lottery value are reserved, the second winning / failing lottery value is always preferentially digested, and the second special symbol 52 is continuously changed and displayed.

The special symbol adjusting means 276 in the modified example displays the variation of the first special symbol 51 and the variation of the second special symbol 52 according to the order of entering the balls into the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12. It may be selectively changed and displayed. For example, when the ball enters in the order of the first starting port 11, the first starting port 11, and the second starting port 12, the first special symbol 51, the first special symbol 51, and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in a variable order. Will be done. In this case, the special figure adjusting means 276 monitors the hold control means 240 and stores the hold order of the winning / failing lottery value. Since which special symbol should be changed is determined according to the ball entry order of the game ball, that is, the hold order of the winning / failing lottery value in the hold control means 240, the player can easily visually grasp the change order.

In another modification, the special symbol adjusting means 276 may display the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52 in a predetermined digestion order regardless of the ball entry order. Good. For example, priority may be given to alternately displaying the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52. For example, when both the first winning / failing lottery value and the second winning / failing lottery value are reserved, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are alternately displayed in a variable manner. Since which special symbol should be changed simply alternates regardless of the order in which the game balls enter, the player can easily grasp the order of change.

When one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is stopped in the hitting mode, the special symbol adjusting means 276 waits for the start of the variation display of the other. In this case, since the variable display of the special symbol is not started while the special game is executed, the player can concentrate on the special game.

<Preliminary determination means 235>
The pre-determination means 235 includes a first lottery pre-determination means 236 and a second lottery pre-determination means 237. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 is a random number acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 before the execution of various determinations by the first winning / failing determination means 221, the first symbol determination means 226, and the first variation pattern determination means 231. Is used to determine in advance information about the change before the start of the change of the first special symbol by the first special figure control means 251. The second lottery pre-determination means 237 is a random number acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217 before the execution of various determinations by the second winning / failing determination means 222, the second symbol determination means 227, and the second variation pattern determination means 232. Is used to determine in advance information about the change before the start of the change of the second special symbol by the second special figure control means 252.

The first lottery pre-determination means 236 includes a first pre-win / fail lottery value determination table, a first pre-symbol lottery value determination table, and a first pre-variation pattern random value determination table as determination tables for pre-determination related to the first lottery means 211. Hold the table. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 uses the first pre-win / fail lottery value determination table to determine a random number group to which the first win / fail lottery value stored in the special figure holding means 241 belongs. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 uses the first pre-symbol lottery value determination table to determine a random number group to which the first symbol lottery value stored in the special figure holding means 241 belongs. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 uses the first pre-variation pattern determination table to determine a random number group to which the first variation pattern lottery value stored in the special figure holding means 241 belongs. Then, these determination results are temporarily stored as the pre-determination results, and the information regarding the pre-determination results is transmitted to the sub-board 300 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later.

FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically showing a preliminary hit / fail determination table referred to in the preliminary hit / fail determination. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 (pre-win / fail determination regarding the first game) refers to the first pre-win / fail lottery value determination table of FIG. 9A when the ball enters the first start opening 11, and the win / fail lottery value. When is "0 to 299", a value of "1" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary hit / fail judgment result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "300 to 2999", the value of "2" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing judgment result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "3000 to 56499", the value of "3" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing determination result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "56500 to 65535", the value of "4" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing determination result. Next, the first symbol lottery value determination table (not shown) is referred to, and when the first symbol lottery value is "0 to 99", a value of "0" indicating that fact is set as the advance symbol determination result. .. When the first symbol lottery value is "100 to 149", a value of "1" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", a value of "2" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", a value of "3" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", a value of "4" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. Further, referring to the first pre-variation pattern random number value determination table (not shown), when the first pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", the value of "A" indicating that fact is set as the pre-pattern determination result. .. When the first pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value of "B" indicating that fact is set as the pre-pattern determination result. When the first pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value of "C" indicating that fact is set as the pre-pattern determination result. As described above, the pre-determination information set by the first lottery pre-determination means 236 (pre-win / fail determination regarding the first game) is the first start port 11 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later. The information is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing of the information indicating the entry into the ball (indicating that it is the first winning / losing lottery), the information indicating the number of holds, and the like.

The second lottery pre-determination means 237 (pre-win / fail determination regarding the second game) refers to the second pre-win / fail lottery value determination table in FIG. 9B when the ball enters the second start opening 12, and the win / fail lottery. When the value is "0 to 299", the value of "1" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary hit / fail judgment result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "300 to 2999", the value of "2" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing judgment result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "3000 to 63999", the value of "3" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing determination result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "64,000 to 65535", the value of "4" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing determination result. Next, referring to the second preliminary symbol lottery value determination table (not shown), if the second symbol lottery value is "0 to 144", a value of "0" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. .. When the second symbol lottery value is "145-149", a value of "1" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", a value of "2" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", a value of "3" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", a value of "4" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. Further, referring to the second pre-variation pattern random value determination table (not shown), when the second pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", the value of "A" indicating that fact is set as the pre-pattern determination result. .. When the second pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value of "B" indicating that fact is set as the pre-pattern determination result. When the second pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value of "C" indicating that fact is set as the pre-pattern determination result. As described above, the pre-determination information set by the second lottery pre-determination means 237 (pre-win / fail determination regarding the second game) is the second start port 12 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing of the information indicating the entry into the ball (indicating that it is the second winning / failing lottery), the information indicating the number of holds, and the like.

It should be noted that various information temporarily stored as the pre-determination result by the pre-determination means 235 is stored in a predetermined pre-determination result storage area up to 4 each, as in the case of the number of reserved storages. The preliminary determination result may be stored using the hold storage area stored by the hold control means 240. The information may be deleted based on the fact that the pre-determination result by the pre-determination means 235 is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later. In this way, efficient use of the storage area in the main board 200 can be expected by sharing the information with other areas or erasing the information based on the completion of transmission. Further, as the judgment table for the pre-judgment, the judgment table for the main judgment may be used without providing the table dedicated to the pre-judgment. Part or all of them may share a common pre-judgment table. In this way, by sharing with other determination tables, it is expected that the data capacity of the main board 200 will be reduced. The content to be transmitted as the determination result of the pre-determination means 235 can be appropriately selected, for example, only the determination result of whether or not the result is transmitted. Further, the value of the random number acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 and the second lottery value acquisition means 217 is transmitted to the sub-board 300 by the command communication means 205 described above without being determined by the pre-determination means 235, and the sub-board is transmitted. It may be configured so that the content of the preliminary determination is determined by 300.

The pre-determining means 235 may refer to a pre-winning lottery value determination table in which the correspondence between the winning / failing lottery value and the pre-winning / failing determination result is different depending on the set value set by the setting changing device 170. Similar to the above-mentioned winning / failing determination table, a plurality of types of advance winning / failing lottery value determination tables corresponding to a plurality of game settings may be prepared, and the advance winning / failing lottery value determination table to be referred to may be switched according to the set value of the game setting. In addition, a preliminary winning / losing lottery value determination table that can be commonly used among a plurality of game settings may be used. In this case, the winning / failing may be pre-determined by the combination of the set value of the game setting and the value of the pre-winning / failing determination result.

FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a preliminary hit / fail determination table corresponding to the game setting. FIG. 3A is a pre-hit / fail determination table referred to by the first lottery pre-determination means 236, and FIG. 3B is a pre-win / fail determination table referred to by the second lottery pre-determination means 237. When the winning / failing lottery value is "0 to 294", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "11", indicating that a big hit is obtained in all the settings 1 to 6. When the winning / failing lottery value is "295", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "12", which indicates that the setting is 2 or more in the normal state or a big hit in all the settings at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "296", the preliminary winning / failing judgment result is "13", indicating that a big hit is obtained with the setting 3 or more at the normal time or all the settings at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "297", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "14", which indicates that the setting is 4 or more in the normal state or a big hit in all the settings at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "298", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "15", which indicates that the setting is 5 or more in the normal state or a big hit in all the settings at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "299", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "16", indicating that a big hit is obtained with the setting 6 at the normal time or all the settings at the time of probability change. Further, when the winning / failing lottery value is "300 to 2949", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "21", indicating that a big hit is obtained in all the settings at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "2950 to 2959", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "22", indicating that a big hit is obtained when the setting is 2 or more at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "2960 to 2696", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "23", indicating that a big hit is obtained when the setting is 3 or more at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "2970 to 2979", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "23", indicating that a big hit is obtained at the setting of 4 or more at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "2980 to 2899", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "25", indicating that a big hit is obtained when the setting is 5 or more at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "2990 to 2999", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "26", indicating that the setting 6 at the time of probability change is a big hit. Further, when the first winning / failing lottery value shown in (a) is "3000 to 56499" and the second winning / failing lottery value shown in (b) is "3000 to 63999", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "3000-63999". It becomes "30", which indicates that it is a small hit in all settings. Further, when the first winning / failing lottery value shown in (a) is "56500 to 65535" and the second winning / failing lottery value shown in (b) is "64,000 to 65535", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is ". It becomes 40 ”, indicating that it is out of order in all settings. By using such a pre-win / fail determination table, it is possible to show an appropriate pre-win / fail determination result for each set value of the game setting.

<Special game control means 260>
The special game control means 260 operates the special game when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode when the first winning or losing lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in a shift to the special game. It is determined that the conditions have been met, and the special game is executed by opening the large winning opening 20. Similarly, when the special game control means 260 results in the second winning / failing lottery by the second lottery means 212 indicating a shift to the special game, when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode. It is determined that the special game operating condition is satisfied, and the special game is executed by opening the large winning opening 20.

The special game is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 20 is continuously performed a plurality of times, and is composed of a plurality of unit games. The special game includes a 10R jackpot in which the unit game is repeated 10 times, a 4R jackpot in which the unit game is repeated 4 times, and a 2R jackpot in which the unit game having a shorter opening time than the 10R jackpot and the 4R jackpot is repeated only twice. The 10R jackpot is the jackpot in the second win / loss lottery, and the 4R jackpot is the jackpot in the first win / loss lottery. In the 10R jackpot and the 4R jackpot, in principle, the jackpot 20 is opened for about 30 seconds in one unit game. In the 2R jackpot, the jackpot 20 is opened for about 1.6 seconds in one unit game. The special game control means 260 ends the special game when the set number of rounds of the unit game is exhausted. Even in the case of a 2R jackpot, if the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the jackpot 20 may be opened in the same opening mode as the 10R jackpot and the 4R jackpot.

<Small hit game control means 265>
The small hit game control means 265 operates the small hit game when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined small hit mode when the first lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in a small hit. It is determined that the condition is satisfied, and the small hit game is executed by opening the large winning opening 20 to the opening / closing control means 275. Similarly, the small hit game control means 265 is small when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined small hit mode when the second lottery by the second lottery means 212 results in a small hit. It is determined that the winning game operating condition is satisfied, and the small hit game is executed by opening the large winning opening 20 to the opening / closing control means 275.

In the small hit game, the unit game is executed once, and the large winning opening 20 is opened and closed twice in one unit game. The small hit game control means 265 opens the large winning opening 20 for about 0.8 seconds per opening and closing, and then closes the large winning opening 20 to end the small hit game.

<Specific game control means 270>
The specific game control means 270 controls a normal game in a probability variation state, a time saving state, and a ball entry easy state. When the special symbol is a specific jackpot symbol accompanied by a transition to the probabilistic change, the specific game control means 270 shifts the game state to the probabilistic state, the time saving state, and the easy ball entry state after the end of the special game. The probabilistic state, the time saving state, and the ball entry easy state are continued until the next big hit occurs. In the time saving state, the first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 select the variation pattern having a short variation time so that the variation display time of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is substantially shortened. To do. However, in the normal state, the fluctuation pattern table according to the number of winning / failing lottery values held by the holding control means 240 is referred to, and as the number of holdings by the holding control means 240 decreases, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time tends to appear. In the easy-to-enter state, at least one of the three functions of probabilistic change of the normal symbol, shortening of the time of the normal symbol, and opening extension of the second starting port 12 is performed to enter the second starting port 12. Ball frequency (easiness of entering the ball) is improved. During the probability change state, the hit / fail determination result by the first hit / miss determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 is maintained at a high probability of becoming a big hit. Further, the specific game control means 270 causes the second starting port 12 to be in the open extension state when a specific big hit occurs, and further increases the winning probability of the open lottery only when the winning / failing lottery is the second winning / failing lottery. It shifts to a probability change state higher than the normal probability state.

<Open / close control means 275>
The opening / closing control means 275 controls the opening / closing of the ordinary electric accessory 90 and the large winning opening 20 of the second starting port 12. When the normal symbol is stopped in a specific mode, the open / close control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 to open the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12. In the normal state, the opening / closing control means 275 opens the second starting port 12 in the opening time of short opening or long opening according to the result of the opening lottery, and in the easy entry state, the opening time of long opening is the first. 2 The starting port 12 is opened. This is intended to improve the ease of entering the ball of the second starting port 12 so that the player can continue the game without reducing the number of balls held. In the special game, the open / close control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the large winning opening solenoid 92 to open the large winning opening 20.

<Main initial processing execution means 280, main power interruption processing execution means 282, main error detection means 284>
The main initial processing execution means 280 executes the control start processing of the main board 200 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on or when the power is turned off and restored. The main power cutoff processing executing means 282 executes an abnormality response process such as a power supply cutoff process on the main board 200 when a power supply abnormality such as a power supply cutoff occurs. The main error detecting means 284 executes an abnormality detection process on the main board 200. The control start processing, the abnormality response processing, and the abnormality detection processing of the main board 200 will be described later.

<Setting change means 286, setting confirmation means 287>
The setting changing means 286 executes a "setting changing process" for changing the game setting. When the power switch 150 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch while the setting key cylinder 171 is in the setting changing state, the setting changing means 286 shifts to the above-mentioned setting changing state. When the setting change means 286 shifts to the setting change state, the setting display unit 173 displays the setting value stored in the setting memory. The setting changing means 286 changes the setting values displayed on the setting display unit 173 in order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → ... In response to the pressing of the setting change button 172. , The setting value stored in the setting memory is updated to the same value as the display of the setting display unit 173. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting changing means 286 ends the setting changing state and turns off the setting display unit 173.

The setting confirmation means 287 executes a "setting confirmation process" for confirming the game setting. When the setting key cylinder 171 is in the on state and the RAM clear switch is not pressed and the power switch 150 is turned on, the setting confirmation means 287 shifts to the above-mentioned setting confirmation state. When the setting confirmation means 287 shifts to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation means 287 causes the setting display unit 173 to display the setting value stored in the setting memory. Unlike the above-mentioned setting changing means 286, the setting checking means 287 does not change the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 even when the setting change button 172 is pressed, and updates the setting value stored in the setting memory. do not do. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting confirmation means 287 ends the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display unit 173.

Note that the set value data managed in the setting memory may not be the numerical values of "1" to "6" but may use the numerical values of "0" to "5" instead. In this case, the setting value "0" corresponds to the setting 1, the setting value "1" corresponds to the setting 2, the setting value "2" corresponds to the setting 3, and the setting value "3" corresponds to the setting 4. , The set value "4" may correspond to the setting 5, and the set value "5" may correspond to the setting 6. By using "0" as the normal value of the set value data, the RAM clear process is performed when the RAM is abnormal, and when the set value data is set to the initial value "0", the abnormality is not judged. Can be simplified. Further, when executing some lottery using the set value data, for example, when selecting a different table or data for each set value in the look-ahead processing, there is an advantage that the offset processing for the selection can be simplified. .. For example, when "1" to "6" are used as the set value data, additional processing such as decrementing the start address by -1 is required when using these values as they are as offset data for table or data selection. On the other hand, when "0" to "5" are used as the set value data, the numerical value of the set value data can be used as it is as the offset data. When the setting changing means 286 and the setting confirming means 287 use the numerical values of "0" to "5" as the setting value data, the numerical values of the setting value data may be displayed as they are on the setting display unit 173, or the setting may be performed. A numerical value obtained by adding +1 to the numerical value of the value data may be displayed on the setting display unit 173. In the latter case, since the numerical data of "0" to "5" is converted into the numerical values of the settings 1 to 6 in the game setting and displayed, the display can be easily understood by the administrator of the game machine.

<Command transmission means>
The command communication means 205 transmits the payout control command communication means 206 for transmitting the control command necessary for executing the payout or the like to the payout control board 155, and the sub-control for transmitting the control command necessary for executing the effect control or the like to the sub-board 300. Includes command transmitting means 207. The payout control command communication means 206 transmits a payout command instructing the payout of the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening based on the determination of the winning balls to each winning opening by the winning ball determining means 201, and the main board 200. Send a command indicating the status of the error that occurred in. When the sub-control command transmission means 207 starts the symbol variation, the sub-control command transmission means 207 transmits the determination result of the lottery corresponding to the symbol variation to the effect determination means 303 together with the symbol variation control command.

The sub-control command transmitting means 207 fluctuates at the timing when the first special symbol control means 251 and the second special symbol control means 252 start and stop the variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. The start command and the fluctuation stop command are transmitted to the effect determining means 303 (sub-main). When the fluctuation start command is transmitted, a value indicating each of the winning / failing judgment result, the stop symbol, and the fluctuation pattern determined or determined as the final judgment and a value indicating whether the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery is performed are set. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the fluctuation start command. When the fluctuation stop command is transmitted, the value indicating the stop symbol is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the fluctuation stop command. Further, the effect determining means 303 (sub-main) transmits a variation start command, a variation stop command, and the like to the effect control means 304 in order to control the variation display of the decorative symbol by the effect control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable display by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) is synchronized, and the interlocking is maintained. Further, the sub-control command transmitting means 207 transmits the pre-determination result by the pre-determining means 235 to the effect determining means 303. After the pre-judgment result is temporarily stored in the transmission buffer, the winning openings (first start port 11, second start) corresponding to the pre-judgment result are started regardless of whether or not the symbol variation display corresponding to the lottery is started immediately. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the type information of the mouth 12), the information on the number of reserved pieces, the game state, etc., and is erased from the transmission buffer or overwritten later. As a result, a so-called "look-ahead" process is realized in which the sub-board 300 can presumably recognize the winning / failing result in advance based on the received prior determination result before the turn of the symbol variation start comes around. The processing based on the prior determination information performed by the sub-board 300 will be described later. The sub-control command transmission means 207 is set by the information on the special game by the special game control means 260, the information on the small hit game by the small hit game control means 265, the lottery result information by the general drawing lottery means 213, and the setting changing means 286. The setting value information of the game setting is transmitted to the sub-board 300. Further, the sub-control command transmitting means 207 is transmitted to various controls on the main board 200 or to the main board 200, such as information on initial processing and information on errors by the main initial processing executing means 280 and the main error detecting means 284. Information about various signals and the like is appropriately transmitted to the sub-board 300.

FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the sub-board. The sub-board 300 includes a symbol mode determining means 301, a pattern storage means 302, an effect determining means 303, an effect controlling means 304, a timekeeping means 307, an effect setting means 308, a sub initial processing executing means 360, and a sub power cutting processing executing means 362. The sub-error detecting means 364, the command receiving means 370, and the sub-side pre-determining means 371 are provided.

The pattern storage means 302 holds a plurality of effect patterns in which the effect image contents to be displayed on the effect display device 60 and the display process thereof are defined when the decorative symbol 61 fluctuates. The effect pattern includes a plurality of variation effect patterns in which the variation process from the start to the stop of the variation in the variation display of the decorative symbol 61 and the effect process are defined, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed separately and the degree of expectation for a big hit. It includes a plurality of advance notice effect patterns that suggest the height of the variable display before the stop of the variable display.

The command receiving means 370 receives various commands transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the sub-side pre-determining means 371 holds the pre-determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205. The effect determining means 303 includes a normal effect determining means 373 and a look-ahead effect determining means 374. The normal effect determining means 373 is displayed on the effect display device 60 by the effect control means 304 according to the information of the determination result of the first winning / failing lottery or the determination result of the second winning / failing lottery transmitted from the command communication means 205, and is displayed on the effect display device 60 by the speaker. The content of the effect to be output to the 108, the decorative lamp 111, etc. is determined. The effect determining means 303 determines the effect content according to the set value of the game setting transmitted from the command communication means 205. The look-ahead effect determining means 374 displays on the effect display device 60 by the effect control means 304 according to the pre-determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205, and determines the effect content to be output to the speaker 108, the decorative lamp 111, and the like. .. The normal effect determining means 373 is determined by the first variation pattern determining means 231 or the second variation pattern determining means 232, and is selected from a plurality of variation effect patterns corresponding to the variation patterns of the special symbol transmitted from the command communication means 205. One of them is selected and read from the pattern storage means 302. The normal effect determining means 373 sends the read information of the variable effect pattern to the effect control means 304. The normal effect determining means 373 holds a pattern table to be referred to in order to select a variable effect pattern. In some cases, the fluctuation effect pattern may be determined by the normal effect determination means 373 with reference to the pre-determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the variation is combined with the content of the look-ahead effect by the look-ahead effect determination means 374. The production pattern may be determined. The look-ahead effect determining means 374 more accurately identifies and identifies the result of the present determination based on the preliminary determination result from the command communication means 205, the past preliminary determination result held on the sub-board 300, the game state information, and the like. Based on the result, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect before the final determination, and the content of the execution. Specifically, the look-ahead effect determining means 374 determines whether the current game state is in the probability-variable game, and then shifts to the normal game state based on the pre-determination result before the pre-determination result received this time. Determine whether or not to do so. Based on the judgment result, the pass / fail result of the main judgment and the selected fluctuation pattern related to the pre-judgment result received this time are specified, and based on the specific result, whether or not the look-ahead effect can be executed and the execution content of the look-ahead effect are determined. .. Since there are many parts in the effect determining means 303 in which the normal effect determining means 373 and the look-ahead effect determining means 374 cooperate with each other, the effect determining means 303 will be described as a comprehensive effect determining means 303 except for a particularly necessary part.

In each variation effect pattern, a variation time is set for each pattern as an end condition of the symbol variation, and the symbol variation is stopped when the variation time elapses. The effect determining means 303 selects a variation effect pattern of the effect image having the same variation time according to the variation pattern of the special symbol.

The symbol mode determining means 301 determines the combination of the stop symbols of the decorative symbol 61 and the arrangement thereof by the lottery determination result by the first lottery means 211 or the second lottery means 212, the stop symbol of the special symbol, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the decoration. It is decided according to the variation effect pattern of the symbol. The symbol mode determining means 301 transmits information indicating the determined combination of the stopped symbols to the effect control means 304. The symbol mode determining means 301 holds a symbol range table to be referred to for determining a stop symbol of a decorative symbol.

The stop symbol of the decorative symbol 61 is formed as a combination of three symbols, and for example, when the hit / fail determination result by the first hit / fail determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 indicates a shift to a special game of 4R jackpot or 10R jackpot. Is selected as a specific combination, for example, a combination in which three symbols such as "777" and "111" are aligned. When the hit / fail judgment result is a 2R big hit or a small hit, a specific combination, for example, a predetermined combination such as "357" is selected, but the specific combination is not necessarily a combination of three symbols. It does not have to be. If the hit / fail judgment result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, it is a combination in which the three symbols are not aligned, such as "312" and "946", and it is a specific combination selected for a 2R big hit or a small hit. The combination that does not apply is selected. If the hit / fail judgment result is not a 4R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, and a variation pattern indicating a miss with reach is selected, a combination such as "191" or "727" in which only one symbol is not aligned. Select.

The variation effect pattern of the decorative symbol defines the variation display mode of the decorative symbol, that is, the effect process from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the variation. The variable effect pattern includes a pattern for displaying a normal out-of-order symbol, a pattern for displaying an out-of-order symbol through a reach state that would be a big hit if one more symbol is aligned, and a big hit symbol after the reach state. The pattern when doing is included. In particular, the pattern when going through the reach state includes a pattern having various fluctuation times, long and short. In each variation effect pattern, a variation time is set for each pattern as an end condition of the symbol variation, and the symbol variation is stopped when the variation time elapses. The effect determining means 303 selects a variation effect pattern of the decorative symbol having the same variation time as the special symbol according to the variation pattern of the special symbol.

In the time saving state, when the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern determining means 231 or the second variation pattern determining means 232 is a pattern for time saving, the effect determining means 303 is a variation in which the effect content for time saving is determined. Select a production pattern. The production content for shortening the time is a production in which a background image or sound that impresses that the player is in an advantageous state due to the shortened time or the probability change is output.

The notice effect pattern is an effect pattern for temporarily displaying an image, animation, video, or the like of a specific character or motif on the screen, an effect pattern for operating an accessory, or an effect pattern for outputting a specific sound. The effect of the advance notice effect pattern is executed in parallel with the symbol change, and it is suggested in advance that the symbol change is highly expected to stop in the jackpot mode. For example, there is a normal advance notice effect in which only one image of a character is displayed on the screen, and a group advance notice effect in which a group of a large number of characters is displayed so as to pass from one end to the other end of the screen. In addition, a step-up notice effect is further included in which the display process of the notice effect is divided into a plurality of stages, the number of stages to be displayed is variable, and the higher the number of stages, the higher the expectation for the big hit.

The notice effect pattern includes a pattern (notice after reach) in which the effect is executed at a timing after the display mode of the decorative symbol 61 is in the reach state to announce the final stop mode of the symbol, and the decorative symbol 61. There is a pattern (pre-reach notice) that simultaneously announces that the production will be executed at the timing when it is not stopped and the reach state will be reached.

The effect determining means 303 should determine whether or not to display the advance notice effect on the effect display device 60 according to the determination result of the winning / failing lottery or the advance determination result by a predetermined advance notice lottery, set the advance effect, and display the effect. Determine the notice production pattern. The effect determining means 303 holds a notice determination table to be referred to for determining whether or not to display the notice effect, and a notice type table to be referred to when selecting the type of the notice effect pattern. The notice determination table is set so that different columns are referred to depending on the judgment result of the winning / failing lottery or the preliminary judgment result, and if the winning / failing lottery is successful, the advance notice effect is displayed with a higher probability than in the case of losing. As such, the correspondence between the judgment result of the winning / failing lottery and whether or not to display the notice effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to suggest a high degree of expectation for a big hit by displaying the notice effect itself.

The effect control means 304 variably displays the effect image including the decorative symbol 61 on the effect display device 60 according to the selected variable effect pattern data. The effect control means 304 sets the reception of the variation start command of the decorative symbol 61 as a start condition for the variation display of the new decorative symbol. When it is determined by the effect determining means 303 that the advance notice effect is to be displayed, the effect control means 304 displays the advance notice effect according to the selected advance notice effect pattern on the effect display device 60 in a form of superimposing it on the effect of the symbol variation. Let me.

When the winning / failing lottery value of the second winning / failing lottery is stored, the effect control means 304 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first winning / failing lottery, and whether the winning / failing lottery value of the first winning / failing lottery is stored. Regardless of whether or not, the symbol variation display corresponding to the second winning / failing lottery is started. As a result, when the lottery value is reserved for both the first winning / failing lottery and the second winning / failing lottery, the lottery value held in the second winning / failing lottery is preferentially read and the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed. .. In such a case, the lottery value held in the first winning / failing lottery is not read and the change of the decorative symbol does not start until the number of holdings in the second winning / failing lottery becomes 0. In this way, the effect control means 304 causes the effect display device 60 to display the symbol variation effect including the variation display of the decorative symbol 61.

The effect control means 304 further controls the lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamp 111 and the operation of the movable accessory 66. The effect control means 304 includes an effect display control means 305, a voice control means 306, and a lamp control means 309. The effect display control means 305 controls the display on the effect display device 60, and the sound control means 306 controls the sound output from the speaker 108. The lamp control means 309 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamp 111.

While the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are changing, it is necessary to display an image indicating that the symbol is changing on the effect display device 60. Normally, a normal size decorative symbol 61 having a certain size is variablely displayed, but in a manner that hinders the visibility of the variable display of the normal size decorative symbol 61, other than the variation of the decorative symbol 61 is the main production content. You may display a special effect to be performed. In this case, the player is presented with the fact that the symbol is changing by variablely displaying an alternative symbol which is a decorative symbol having a size smaller than the normal size decorative symbol. Hereinafter, when simply referred to as a decorative design, it means a normal size decorative design, but when distinguishing it from an alternative design, the normal size decorative design is also referred to as a "normal decorative design", a "main decorative design", or a "main design". ..

The alternative symbol is displayed while the visibility of the normal decorative symbol is impaired, for example, while the normal decorative symbol is hidden. The alternative symbol is a form of a decorative symbol for suggesting the result of a hit / fail judgment in a dramatic manner, has a simpler (in other words, simplified, simplified) display form than the normal decorative symbol, and is a normal decorative symbol. It is displayed in a simpler fluctuation process. The alternative symbol has an external display form corresponding to a portion indicating the symbol type of the ordinary decorative symbol, and has, for example, a display form representing a number, a character, or a symbol indicating the symbol type. Further, the alternative symbol is variablely displayed in a narrower area than the area where the decorative symbol is normally displayed in a variable manner, and is typically at a position where it is difficult to hinder the main effect by elements other than the symbol, for example, in the corner of the screen of the effect display device 60. It is displayed in a variable manner. The alternative symbol is usually displayed relatively smaller than the decorative symbol, but has a display form in which at least the symbol type can be visually identified. The alternative symbol may be a reduced version of the normal decorative symbol as it is, and may be the same as the normal decorative symbol except for the size.

The plurality of alternative symbols displayed in place of the plurality of normal decorative symbols suggests a high degree of expectation that the result of the winning / failing lottery will be in a state advantageous to the player depending on the combination of the stopping modes at the end of the fluctuation. For example, it is suggested that the plurality of alternative symbols have a high expectation of a big hit in the fluctuation by being in a reach state in which two of the three alternative symbols are in the same reach state. In addition, the left and right symbols that are in the reach state are specific types of symbols that suggest that the expectations are relatively high, such as "3" and "7", and the expectations such as "1" and "2" are high. By providing a type of symbol that suggests that it is relatively low, it may suggest that the degree of expectation of the reach state is high or low. It should be noted that the alternative symbol does not appear in a definite stop state in appearance, but in a temporary stop state in which minute shaking is maintained. After the temporary stop of the substitute symbol, the normal decorative symbol may be displayed instead of the substitute symbol, and the normal decorative symbol may be displayed in the fixed stop state. Further, the decorative symbol and the alternative symbol are not displayed exclusively, but the display periods may overlap. Furthermore, at a predetermined effect in which the visibility of the normal decorative symbol is impaired, the variation display of the normal decorative symbol may be continued and the variation of the alternative symbol may be displayed. Unlike the alternative symbol, the special symbol is changing in an image as small as or smaller than the alternative symbol in a predetermined area of the effect display device 60 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. A simple symbol suggesting that there is may be displayed in a variable manner. The simple symbol may be composed of a variable display of three symbol combinations like a normal decorative symbol, a variable display of one symbol, or a simple symbol ("○", "×", etc.). May be configured to be sequentially switched. The simple symbol is not related to the variable display mode of the normal decorative symbol or the alternative symbol, but displays a certain fluctuation from the start to the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and is related to the stop display mode of the normal decorative symbol at the time of stop display. May be displayed. It should be noted that the simple symbol may be changed as appropriate, as long as it suggests that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and the result of the special symbol is at least notified, such as displaying a combination of two symbols. Further, the simple design may be called a "sub-decorative design", a "sub-decorative design", a "mini-decorative design", a "mini-design", or the like. Apart from the effect display device 60, a variable display of a decorative symbol called a fourth symbol, which indicates a display equivalent to a simple symbol depending on a light emitting mode such as an LED, may be used. The fourth symbol is used to indicate the progress of the game (display during change of the special symbol, display of the result) when a problem occurs in the effect display device 60. As an example of the display mode of the fourth symbol, the LEDs light up in sequence of "white", "blue", "green", "yellow", "orange", and "red" (blinking including extinguishing is also possible). It may be displayed in a variable manner, or it may be displayed in a single color according to the type of the special symbol to suggest a variable display, and the emission color when the stop display is displayed may indicate the type of off or a big hit.

The timekeeping means 307 is a timekeeping circuit that outputs time information used for the game. The timekeeping means 307 is a timer circuit that measures the time from the time when the power is turned on with a counter and outputs it as time information. However, a real-time clock circuit having a built-in battery and capable of continuously measuring the date and time by the battery even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off or a power failure may occur may be used. In the case of a real-time clock circuit, there is a possibility that the time of each game console may differ slightly due to individual differences or time lag, whereas in the case of a timer circuit, the time difference between multiple game consoles as long as the power is turned on at the same time. Is unlikely to occur.

The effect determining means 303 executes a synchronized effect that starts at a predetermined timing triggered by the time information output by the time measuring means 307 indicating a predetermined time. The synchronized effect is an effect displayed on the effect display device 60 during the synchronized effect period, which is a period substantially asynchronous with the fluctuation period of the symbol variation and the game state. The tuning effect period extends for several minutes, the length of which is longer than the symbol variation time for one time, and may include a plurality of symbol variation periods. The effect pattern of the synchronized effect is stored in the pattern storage means 302, and the effect pattern defines the reproduction of a predetermined music and video. A plurality of types of effect patterns for synchronized production are prepared, and different types of effect patterns can be selected depending on the date and time such as month, date, day of the week, and time.

The entrainment effect is executed regardless of whether it is during a normal game or a special game. Here, "during a normal game" includes displaying a so-called standby demo screen. That is, in "normal game", (1) "normal game during variable display" in which the symbol is variablely displayed, and (2) "normal game during variable stop" in which neither the variable display of the symbol nor the standby demo screen is displayed. , (3) "Normal game while the standby demo screen is displayed", which is the display of the standby demo screen instead of the variable display of the symbol. The tuning effect can be executed during any of the periods (1) to (3), but in the cases of (2) and (3), the output mode for controlling the volume reduction and the brightness reduction in the tuning effect is (1). It can be different from the time of. In addition, while the standby demo screen is displayed, the player can input information about the mobile cooperation system described later by operating the effect button 109 or the cross key 110, and when the operation input is received, the video and audio output of the synchronized effect is output. It is suppressed, and priority is given to screen display such as production customization by the mobile cooperation system.

The tuning effect is, for example, an effect of reproducing a performance or video of a predetermined song at a predetermined time (referred to as “synchronization effect start time”). The time that triggers the reproduction of the synchronized effect may be the time that is reached with a predetermined time interval from the time when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, or the time of every hour or half hour based on the standard time. It may be. Alternatively, a time that may vary depending on the date or day of the week may be set, and the interval may be different, such as first one hour later, then three hours later, instead of a fixed interval such as "every hour". The interval may vary depending on the date and day of the week. It may be a variable setting in which the time can be specified by the game clerk for each game store. However, it is set in advance so that the same synchronization effect is executed at least at the same time among a plurality of the same models installed in the same game store. For example, in the case of a specification that is triggered by a time that arrives at a predetermined time interval from the time when the power is turned on, the amusement store turns on the power of a plurality of units at the same time. As a result, the same synchronization effect is simultaneously executed on the plurality of game consoles when the predetermined time is reached. As a result, the production is displayed at the same time as if multiple units are synchronized, and the same music and video are played at the same time, creating a synergistic and realistic feeling as if a live performance or movie was being screened on the spot. A directing effect can be obtained.

The synchronization effect function is also built into another game console of the same model, and multiple game consoles on the same game island are turned on at the same time by a game clerk every day. Then, the plurality of game consoles that are turned on at the same time all reach the synchronization effect start time almost at the same time, and the synchronization effect can be executed simultaneously at the same time. This is called a multiple-unit synchronous production. In that case, not only the video display will be synchronized with multiple units, but also the sound effects and background music output will be synchronized with multiple units, and the more units that are synchronized, the more synergistic effect will be obtained by executing the production all at once. Increase.

The effect setting means 308 stores the player's game history. The game history includes a history of game results and a history of production results. The history of game results is the result of a game that leads to a ball output that the player can obtain as a result of the game, such as the number of hit balls, the number of prize balls, the number of big hits, the number of probability changes, and the number of time reductions. The history of the production result is different from the profit in the game, and is recorded in order to obtain the profit such as the right to change the content and type of the production and the right to make it easier for a specific type of production to appear. It is information such as the score of. For example, in order to score the number of appearances of a predetermined effect, the result of a mini game, and the like and give it to the player, coded information indicating the score and the game history, for example, a two-dimensional code is displayed on the screen. When the player reads the two-dimensional code with the camera of his / her mobile terminal and decodes it, the score and game history information obtained by the decoding are stored in the player's mobile terminal. The cooperation system between the game machine and the player's mobile terminal via the two-dimensional code will be described later. The score here is necessary to expand the range of production customization described later, and the score reaches a predetermined cumulative value (for example, reaching 1000 points, every 100 points, etc.). It is a specification that the number of customizable items increases.

The effect setting means 308 stores the setting of which of a plurality of types of effect content options is selected as the effect customization based on the player's selection instruction and the game history. For example, as the effect patterns to be displayed during the special game, a plurality of types of effect patterns having different displayed motifs, characters, and songs are prepared in the pattern storage means 302, and the player is allowed to select which effect is to be displayed. I will do it. Alternatively, a plurality of types of motifs or character designs are prepared in the pattern storage means 302 as the design of the design included in the decorative design that changes the design, and the player is allowed to select which of the designs is to be displayed. In such a case, when the player accepts the operation of the effect button 109 or the cross key 110 while the standby demo screen is displayed and the effect pattern is selected through the operation, the effect setting means 308 selects the selected content. Remember. The effect determining means 303 selects the type of the effect pattern during the special game according to the settings stored by the effect setting means 308.

The sub-initial processing execution means 360 executes the control start processing of the sub-board 300 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on or when the power is turned off and restored. The sub-power cutoff processing executing means 362 executes an abnormality response process such as a power supply cutoff process on the sub-board 300 when a power supply abnormality such as a power failure occurs. The sub-error detecting means 364 executes the abnormality detection process on the sub-board 300. When the sub-error detecting means 364 detects the power failure, the sub-power cut processing executing means 362 backs up the data in the RAM to the backup RAM as the power cut processing.

FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing an outline of a mobile phone cooperation system. As a premise of the mobile cooperation system, the player registers the user by setting an account and a password in the game history server 358 provided with a dedicated site in advance on the mobile terminal 354. When the effect button 109 is pressed by the player at the start of the game, the effect display control means 305 displays the two-dimensional code 350, which encodes the address of the dedicated site of the game history server 358, on the screen of the effect display device 60. The player is made to read it with the camera of the mobile terminal and access the dedicated site of the game history server 358. Character information (also called "password information") in which the player's identification information and the production score history are encoded is transmitted from the dedicated site to the mobile terminal and displayed on the screen of the mobile terminal. The effect display control means 305 displays the password information input screen on the effect display device 60, and causes the player to input the password information via a button operation such as a cross key 110. By decoding the input password information by the effect setting means 308 and registering it as the player's identification information and the effect score history, the player's previous game content and effect score state can be inherited. The input of the password information serves as an instruction to start recording the game history of the player and an instruction to start the effect customization for selecting various effect elements. After that, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, as the game or the production progresses, the points given by the production setting means 308 to the player as a profit in the production are added as needed and accumulated as the production score history, and the player Can customize the effect at any time and select and set a favorite element as various effect elements. The score for the production is basically added for each symbol change, and the higher the production type with higher expectation for transition to the special game, the higher the score is given, and the higher the score is given even when the transition to the special game is performed.

As a production customization, the player uses a part of the accumulated points, and according to the number of points to be used, the color, background, shape, character, and the color, background, shape, character, which constitute the production content displayed on the production display device 60. You can change the production elements such as music to your favorite type. The effect setting means 308 receives an instruction to change the effect element via a button operation by the player, and changes various effect elements according to the instruction. As for the effect elements that can be customized, a plurality of types of items are prepared for each element, and different values are set as the number of points required for each item. Therefore, when the accumulated score reaches a predetermined value, the number of customizable items increases, or a chance to increase the number of customizable items is given. When the player operates a button as an instruction to end the game or the effect customization, the effect setting means 308 generates a two-dimensional code 350 that encodes information such as a privilege on the effect and the effect score history, and controls the effect display. The means 305 displays on the effect display device 60. The player can read the two-dimensional code 350 with the camera of his / her own mobile terminal and decode the read two-dimensional code 352 to acquire information and store it in the mobile terminal 354. Further, the information is transmitted from the mobile terminal 354 to the game history server 358 having a dedicated site via the network 356, and is managed in association with its own account information. In this way, information such as production benefits and production score history is transmitted to the mobile terminal 354 via a transmission means of displaying and reading the two-dimensional code 350, and is managed by the game history server 358. The contents of the game and the production can be taken over in the next game. In addition, by continuing the game for a long time, the number of symbol fluctuations and the number of productions increase, and the score can be obtained.

FIG. 13 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the main board 200 and the sub board 300. The main board 200 includes electronic components such as a main CPU 290, a main RAM 291 and a main ROM 292. The main ROM 292 stores in advance a main control program and data for controlling the overall game operation. The main control program or data is read from the main ROM 292 into the main RAM 291 and the main control program is executed by the main CPU 290. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown). The ball entry signal from each ball entry port, the payout signal from the payout control board 155, and the like are acquired by the main CPU 290 via various interfaces (not shown). The main CPU 290 drives and controls external devices such as the winning port solenoid, the first special symbol display unit 41, and the second special symbol display unit 42 by various drive circuits (not shown). Further, commands necessary for effect control are transmitted from the main CPU 290 to the sub-board 300 together with information such as a result of a winning / losing lottery, a result of determining a symbol, and a result of determining a variation pattern. A signal is transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 by one-way communication.

The instruction data transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 has a 2-byte configuration consisting of a combination of 1-byte instruction type data, so-called MODE data, and 1-byte instruction content data, so-called EVENT data. The main board 200 can send one command by transmitting the command type data and the command content data to the sub board 300 in association with each other. The instruction type data is a bit string indicating the instruction type, and a unique type code is assigned to each instruction type in advance at the development stage. The instruction content data is a bit string indicating the content of the instruction. The most significant bit of the instruction type data and the instruction content data is an identification bit indicating whether the instruction type data or the instruction content data is used. When the most significant bit is 1, it indicates that the instruction type data is the most significant bit. When the bit is 0, it indicates that it is instruction content data.

Since the communication from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 is a specification in which 1 byte of data is transmitted for each data transmission, it is necessary to transmit 1 byte each twice in order to transmit 2 bytes of instruction data. .. The MODE data, which is the upper byte, is transmitted in the first communication, and the EVENT data, which is the lower byte, is transmitted in the second communication. Considering the possibility of communication failure due to the influence of noise or the like, the main board 200 continuously transmits the same data, and when the same data is read twice in succession by the sub board 300, the completion of transmission / reception of the data is confirmed. .. The main board 200 repeatedly transmits the same data until it is read two times in a row, and transmits the same data up to five times.

The sub-board 300 includes electronic components such as a sub CPU 310, a sub RAM 311, a sub ROM 312, and an effect control device 313. The sub ROM 312 is one of the data storage means for holding the sub control program including the effect pattern data in which the effect process is defined and the display pattern data in which the effect display process is defined. A sub control program including the effect pattern data, the display pattern data, and the voice pattern data is read from the sub ROM 312 into the sub RAM 311, and the effect control by the sub control program is executed by the sub CPU 310. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown). Signals from an external device such as the effect button 109 are acquired by the sub CPU 310 via various interfaces (not shown). The sub CPU 310 drives an external device such as an effect display device 60, a speaker 108, a decorative lamp 111, and a movable accessory 66 by an effect control device 313, various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown) according to the effect pattern data, and displays and outputs the display. , Voice output, lamp lighting, and control of the production by the movement of the accessory. The sub CPU 310 transmits the display pattern data and the voice pattern data to the effect control device 313. In this embodiment, an example in which the sub-board 300 includes the effect control device 313 will be described, but the sub-board 300 and the effect control device 313 do not need to be integrated as a substrate and are separated and connected to each other. It may be formed as a separate substrate.

FIG. 14 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the effect control device 313. The effect control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, a display control circuit 326, and a voice control circuit 314. The data ROM 324 is one of data storage means for holding material data such as effect image data and motion data used for effect display and audio data used for audio output in a data-compressed state. The effect image data is an image used for variable display or effect display as an effect object indicating the judgment result of the winning / failing lottery, and is used for, for example, a sprite image of a decorative pattern used for changing a decorative pattern, a sprite image used for a notice effect, and various effects. It is a material image such as a moving image to be used. The motion data is data in which the motion is defined when the motion is added to the images used for various effects at a predetermined timing. The voice data is voice data such as music, background sounds, sound effects, and character lines that are output during the production.

Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310, the effect image data and motion data specified in the display pattern data are read from the data ROM 324 to the control RAM 322, and the effect display using the effect image data and motion data. Is executed by the control CPU 320. As a result, commands, effect image data, and motion data related to the effect display are transmitted from the control CPU 320 to the display control circuit 326, and the display control is performed by the display control circuit 326. Similarly, commands and voice data related to voice output are transmitted from the control CPU 320 to the voice control circuit 314, and voice output control is performed by the voice control circuit 314.

The display control circuit 326 includes a decoder 332, a drawing memory 334, a drawing circuit 336, a frame buffer 338, and a display circuit 340, each of which is connected via the bus 330. The bus 330 in this figure comprehensively shows buses such as a system bus, a data bus, and an address bus for convenience.

The effect image data and motion data sent from the control CPU 320 are stored in the drawing memory 334, and the compressed data among the data is decoded by the decoder 332. The drawing memory 334 is used as a work area when decoding the effect image data or motion data by the decoder 332, or as a work area when executing drawing processing or image processing by the drawing circuit 336. ).

The drawing circuit 336 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 334 to sequentially execute commands sent from the control CPU 320 to generate a display image, and the generated display image is used as a frame buffer for a moving image. Store in 338. The frame buffer 338 is a VRAM as a buffer memory for temporarily storing frames of moving images to be output to the effect display device 60.

The display circuit 340 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 338 to the effect display device 60 in the form of video signals in the order in which they are stored. The frame buffer 338 has, for example, a memory area for two frames, and while the display circuit 340 outputs a display image from the memory area for one frame, the drawing circuit 336 generates the next display image. Store in the memory area for another frame.

The data ROM 324 holds "detailed display pattern data" in which the display control process performed by the display control circuit 326 is defined. At this time, the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310 can be referred to as "summary display pattern data" in which the outline of the effect display process is defined. For example, the outline display pattern data defines a rough flow of a series of effect display processes such as fluctuation start and fluctuation stop timings of decorative symbols, playback order of a plurality of moving images, and playback start and stop timings. .. On the other hand, the detailed display pattern data includes detailed display control such as the display order of sprite images for realizing variable display of decorative patterns and the display processing order for each frame for displaying moving images based on motion data. The process is defined.

When the effect control device 313 performs display control based on the "rough display pattern data" sent from the sub CPU 310, the effect control device 313 reads the "detailed display pattern data" required for the processing from the data ROM 324 and uses both display pattern data. And execute the display process. Therefore, it can be said that the effect control device 313 executes the display control process based on the display putter data including the "summary display pattern data" and the "detailed display pattern data". Therefore, in the present specification, unless explicitly mentioned, the "rough display pattern data" stored in the sub ROM 312 and the "detailed display pattern data" stored in the data ROM 324 are not distinguished, and simply "display pattern data". ". For example, when the effect control means performs a specific process based on the display pattern data held in the data storage means, the display pattern data includes "rough display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data". .. In the modified example, the display pattern data is not divided into "summary display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data", and even if the display pattern data that serves as both is held in the sub ROM 312 or the data ROM 324. Good.

In this embodiment, the hardware configuration of the effect control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, and a display control circuit 326. In the modification, the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, the data ROM 324, and the display control circuit 326 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Further, the process that is supposed to be executed by the display control circuit 326 may be executed by the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, or the data ROM 324. For example, the control CPU 320 included in the effect control device 313 may execute a process that is executed by the decoder 332, the drawing circuit 336, and the display circuit 340 included in the display control circuit 326. Further, the control RAM 322 included in the effect control device 313 may also serve as the functions of the drawing memory 334 and the frame buffer 338. In addition, the effect control device 313 may have a hardware configuration that does not include the display control circuit 326. In this case, the process that is supposed to be executed by the display control circuit 326 is executed by the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, or the data ROM 324. May be done.

Further, in this embodiment, the hardware configuration of the sub-board 300 includes a configuration in which the effect control device 313 is included in addition to the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311 and the sub ROM 312. In the modification, the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311, the ROM 312, and the effect control device 313 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Further, the process that is supposed to be executed by the effect control device 313 may be executed by the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311 or the sub ROM 312. For example, the sub CPU 310 may execute the processing of the control CPU 320, the sub RAM 311 may also have the function of the control RAM 322, and the sub ROM 312 may also have the function of the data ROM 324. In addition, the sub-board 300 may have a hardware configuration in which the effect control device 313 is not included. In this case, the process to be executed by the effect control device 313 is executed by the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311 or the sub ROM 312. You may.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a control start process of the main board 200 in the pachinko gaming machine. This control start processing is executed by the main initial processing execution means 280, and will be described below as being executed by the main CPU 290 that functions as the main initial processing execution means 280. When the power switch 150 is turned on, the main CPU 290 sets the stack pointer (S100), permits access to the main RAM 291 (S102), and executes initial hardware-related settings such as the setting of the internal registers of the main CPU 290. (S104).

The main CPU 290 confirms the operating state of the setting key, and if the setting key is in the ON state (Y in S105), confirms the operating state of the RAM clear switch. If the RAM clear switch is ON (Y in S122), the setting change process is executed (S124). On the other hand, if the RAM clear is OFF (N in S122), the setting confirmation process is executed (S126). If the setting key is in the OFF state in S105 (N in S105), the processes of S122 to S126 are skipped.

Subsequently, the power off / return process or the initialization process of the main RAM 291 is executed according to the operation state of the RAM clear switch, the value of the power off information flag, and the state of the data stored in the main RAM 291. Specifically, if the RAM clear switch is not turned on and both the value of the power off information flag and the data stored in the main RAM 291 are normal, the process at the time of power off / recovery is executed. To do. In other cases, that is, even when the RAM clear switch is turned on or the RAM clear switch is not turned on, either the power failure information flag or the data stored in the main RAM 291 is normal. If not, the initialization process of the main RAM 291 is executed.

The main CPU 290 confirms the operating state of the RAM clear switch, and when the RAM clear switch is turned on (Y in S106), initializes the main RAM 291 (S116). When the RAM clear switch is not turned on (N in S106), the main CPU 290 confirms the value of the power off information flag (S108). If the value of the power off information flag does not match the power off normal data (N in S108), the main RAM 291 is initialized (S116). If the value of the power off information flag matches the power off normal data (Y in S108), the data stored in the main RAM 291 is inspected (S110). As will be described later, if the processing is normally completed when the power is turned off last time, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is stored in the main RAM 291. Therefore, the main CPU 290 uses the checksum. Check the data in the main RAM 291. If the data stored in the main RAM 291 is not normal (N in S112), the data in the main RAM 291 is initialized (S116). If the data stored in the main RAM is normal (Y in S112), the process for returning to the state before the power is turned off is executed (S114).

In the power-off recovery process (S114), the power-on normal data indicating that the power-on was normally turned on is stored in the power-off information flag, and the initial setting of various errors and the initial setting of communication with the payout control board 155 are executed. To do. Subsequently, the command request for the untransmitted portion before the power is turned off is cleared, and the command transmission of various information indicating the game state is requested. Subsequently, an effect command corresponding to the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. Subsequently, the open / closed state of the second starting port 12 and the large winning opening 20 is returned to the state before the power was cut off. Subsequently, a process for notifying the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is executed.

In the RAM initialization process (S116), the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, the entire area of the main RAM 291 is cleared by 0, the initial setting of the main RAM 291 and the initialization of the effect display are executed. In the initialization process of S116, the set value stored in the setting memory of the setting change device 170 is not cleared, and the set value set in the setting change process of S124 is retained as it is.

When the power cutoff / recovery process (S114) or the RAM initialization process (S116) is completed, a count value is set to activate the interrupt process described later, and the operation of the interrupt timer is started (S118). As a result, after that, a timer interrupt is generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt process described later is executed. Subsequently, the main CPU 290 executes the main process for managing the game machine (S120).

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting change process of S124 in FIG. The value of the setting memory in which the set value of the game setting should be stored is confirmed, and if the set memory value is not normal (N in S132), the set value is initialized to the initial value (S134). When "1" to "6" are used as the set value data, "1" is set as the initial value, and when "0" to "5" are used as the set value data, "0" is set as the initial value. If the set memory value is normal (Y in S132), the process in S134 is skipped. Subsequently, the state shifts to the setting change state (S136), and the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173 (S138). If there is a change operation by the setting change button 172 (Y in S140), the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 is updated and the setting value stored in the setting memory is updated (S142). If there is no change operation (N in S140), the process in S142 is skipped. If the setting key remains ON (N in S144), the processes of S138 to S142 are repeated. When the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the original state and turned off (Y in S144), the setting display unit 173 is hidden so that the set value cannot be visually recognized (S146), and the setting value is returned.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process of S126 in FIG. 15 in detail. The value of the setting memory in which the set value of the game setting should be stored is confirmed, and if the set memory value is not normal (N in S152), the set value is initialized to the initial value (S154). If the set memory value is normal (Y in S152), the process in S154 is skipped. The state shifts to the setting confirmation state (S156), and the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173 (S158). If the setting key remains ON (N in S160), the process of S158 is repeated to continue displaying the set value, and if the setting key is turned OFF (Y in S160), the setting display unit 173 is hidden. The set value is made invisible (S162) and returned.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing in detail the main process of S120 in FIG. The main CPU 290 temporarily prohibits timer interruption (S200), starts the operation of the watchdog timer (S202), and monitors the power failure (S204). When a drop in the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 158 is detected in a power supply voltage monitoring circuit (not shown), the power supply disconnection storage is executed by inputting an unconditional interruption request signal from the power supply voltage monitoring circuit to the main CPU 290. In the process, the power off confirmation data is stored in the power off confirmation flag. Therefore, the main CPU 290 monitors the value of the power-off confirmation flag (S204), and if the value of the power-off confirmation flag matches the power-off confirmation data (Y in S206), executes the process for power-off. Therefore, proceed to S212. If the value of the power off confirmation flag does not match the power off confirmation data (N in S206), the initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are updated. The initial value random number update process is executed (S208), the timer interrupt is permitted (S210), and the process returns to S200. After that, S200 to S210 are repeated. When the timer interrupt occurs while the timer interrupt is prohibited (S202 to S208), the interrupt process described later is executed after the timer interrupt is permitted in S210.

When a power failure is detected in S206 (Y in S206), the main CPU 290 restarts the watchdog timer (S212) and confirms the content of the power failure information flag (S214). If the content of the power-off information flag does not match the power-on normal data (N in S214), it is determined that the data at the time of power-on is not saved normally, and the power-off error data is stored in the power-off information flag. (S216), proceed to S222. If the content of the power-off information flag matches the power-on normal data (Y in S214), it is determined that the data at the time of power-on is normally saved, and the power-off normal data is stored in the power-off information flag. (S218). Subsequently, in order to inspect the backed up data in the main RAM 291 at the next power-on, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is calculated and stored in the main RAM 291 (S220). Subsequently, access to the main RAM 291 is prohibited (S222), and a loop is performed until the power is turned off. The above-mentioned processing when the power is turned off is executed by the main power cut processing execution means 282 realized by the main CPU 290.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the details of the interrupt process. When a timer interrupt occurs in the main process (S120), the main CPU 290 executes the interrupt process. First, the interrupt operation condition is set (S300), and the watchdog timer is restarted (S302). Subsequently, in order to manage the game machine, input processing (S304), various random number update processing (S306), initial value update type random number update processing (S308), initial value random number update processing (S310), timer subtraction processing (S312). , 2nd start port valid period setting process (S314), prize monitoring process (S316), prize ball control process (S318), normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), normal symbol control process (S322), normal symbol variation start Monitoring process (S324), start port monitoring control process (S326), special symbol control process (S328), special electric accessory control process (S330), large winning opening validity period setting process (S332), special symbol change start monitoring control Processing (S334), abnormality detection processing (S336), ball entry passage time abnormality detection processing (S338), game status display processing (S340), handle status signal inspection processing (S342), LED output processing (S344), launch control signal Output processing (S346), test signal output processing (S348), solenoid output processing (S350), effect control command transmission processing (S352), and external information output processing (S354) are executed in order, and the next timer interrupt is permitted. (S356) and return.

In the input process (S304), the data of the input port of the switch mounted on the game board surface, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, the door / frame opening signal, the magnetic detection signal, the radio wave detection signal, and the touch state signal is monitored. , Data indicating the input state is created and stored in the main RAM 291. The data indicating this input state are level data (input port data at the time of this interruption) and rising data or falling data (input port data at the time of this interruption and data at the time of the previous interruption). Data indicating a switch in which switching was observed by comparing the data of the input port with an exclusive logical sum).

In various random number update processes (S306), the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated. The normal symbol variation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291 and stored by incrementing the value when the value is less than the predetermined maximum value, and 0 is stored when the value is equal to or more than the predetermined maximum value. Further, the fluctuation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291 and the subtraction result is stored when the result of subtracting the predetermined value from the value is 0 or more, and the predetermined maximum value is stored when the result is less than 0. As a result, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated every time the timer interrupt occurs.

In the initial value update type random number update process (S308), the random number per normal symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated. The value, maximum value, and initial value of each random number are read from the main RAM 291 and the value of the random number is incremented. If the incremented result exceeds the maximum value, the random number value is set to 0. If the incremented result matches the initial value, the initial value random number is read from the main RAM 291 and the initial value is updated. As a result, the random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated every time the timer interrupt occurs, and when the random number value returns to the initial value, that is, the range of random numbers is cycled. Then, the initial value is newly set and a random number is generated.

In the initial value random number update process (S310), the initial value random number per normal symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are updated. The initial value random number is read from the initial value random number update table of the main RAM 291 and the value of the initial value random number is incremented. If the incremented result exceeds the upper limit, the value of the initial random number is set to 0. The same process is executed in the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120).

In the timer subtraction process (S312), the 2-byte timer is updated. The values of the timers for various controls are read from the main RAM 291 according to the table, and when the timer values are other than 0, the values are sequentially decremented and stored. If the value of the timer is 0, the timer is not updated.

In the second starting port valid period setting process (S314), the valid period of the second starting port 12 is set. At the second starting port 12, the prize ball is paid out by entering the game ball and the lottery related to the second special symbol is executed, and the prize ball is paid out and the second special is paid even if the game ball enters. An invalid period is set in which the lottery related to the symbol is not executed. As will be described later, in the start port monitoring control process (S326), the monitoring process for winning the second start port is not executed during the invalid period of the second start port 12, so that the game ball enters the second start port 12. Even so, the prize balls will not be paid out and the lottery for the second special symbol will not be executed. The same applies to the case where the valid period and the invalid period are set in the first starting port 11, the large winning opening 20, the first operating port 31, the second operating port 32, the general winning opening 33, and the like. When the state of the normal symbol is "normal electric accessory is operating", data indicating that the second start port 12 is in the valid period is stored in the second start port valid period flag. If the state of the normal symbol is not "normal electric accessory is operating" and the value of the second start port effective extension timer is not 0, the second start port 12 is the valid period in the second start port valid period flag. If the value of the second start port valid extension timer is 0, the data indicating that the second start port is in the invalid period is stored in the second start port valid period flag.

In the prize monitoring process (S316), the passage of the game ball through the switch is inspected, and when the game ball passes through the switch, the switch has no invalid period or is currently in the valid period, and the prize ball is paid out. If so, update the winning counter. It also requests the creation of a security output request to be output to the external information output terminal 160 and the transmission of commands.

In the prize ball control process (S318), monitoring of data reception from the payout control board 155, command transmission request to the payout control board 155, command transmission to the payout control board 155, and inspection of received data from the payout control board 155. Are executed in order.

In the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), the passage of the first operation port 31 and the second operation port 32 of the game ball is monitored, and it is determined that the game ball has passed the first operation port 31 or the second operation port 32. When the number of reserved symbols is less than the upper limit of 4, the number of reserved ordinary symbols is updated and the random numbers related to the ordinary symbols are stored in the main RAM 291.

In the normal symbol control process (S322), the state of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the normal symbol is being controlled, the process related to the normal symbol display unit 45 or the normal electric accessory 90 is executed. When the state of the normal symbol is "normal symbol changing", the normal symbol changing processing is executed, and when "normal symbol stop symbol is being displayed", the normal symbol stop symbol display processing is executed and "normal electric" is executed. If "the accessory is in operation", the normal electric accessory operation end demo process is executed, and if "the normal electric accessory operation end demo is in progress", the normal electric accessory operation end demo process is executed. In the normal symbol change processing, after the normal symbol is changed, the fluctuation time is monitored, and if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is over, the fluctuation stop setting of the normal symbol is set and the state of the normal symbol is changed to "normal". Set to "Stop symbol display". In the process of displaying the normal symbol stop symbol, the stop symbol display time of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop symbol display time of the normal symbol has ended, the operation end setting of the normal symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination is executed. In the case of a hit, the state of the normal symbol is set to "normal electric accessory is operating", the operating state of the normal electric accessory opening extension function at the start of operation of the normal electric accessory is saved, and the operation of the normal electric accessory is started. The operation setting of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 corresponding to the operating state of the ordinary electric accessory opening extension function at the time is executed. In the case of a loss, the state of the normal symbol is set to "waiting for normal symbol change". When the winning number of the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the game ball is monitored in the processing during operation of the ordinary electric accessory 90, and it is determined that the number of winnings of the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 has reached the maximum number of winnings. Executes the operation end setting of the ordinary electric accessory 90 and the setting of the effective extension time of the second start port. If it is determined that the number of winnings in the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 has not reached the maximum number of winnings, the opening / closing time of the entrance of the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 is monitored, and the ordinary electric accessory 90 is used. If it is determined that the opening / closing of the entrance of the winning opening related to the above is completed and the opening of the entrance of the normal electric accessory 90 is completed, the operation end setting of the ordinary electric accessory 90 and the second starting port are valid. Execute the extension time setting. If it is determined that the opening / closing time of the winning opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is not over, the opening / closing of the entrance of the winning opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is not set. In the process during the demonstration of the end of operation of the normal electric accessory, when the operation end demonstration time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is monitored and it is determined that the operation end demonstration time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is over, the state of the normal symbol is changed to "normal symbol". Set to "Waiting for fluctuation".

In the normal symbol change start monitoring process (S324), when the state of the normal symbol is monitored and "waiting for normal symbol change" and the value of the number of balls on hold for normal symbol operation is other than 0, the normal symbol changes. To start. When it is determined to start the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the number of balls on hold for normal symbol operation is decremented, and the hit judgment, the determination of the stop symbol, the setting of the fluctuation pattern number of the normal symbol, and the setting of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are executed. .. After that, the state of the normal symbol is set to "normal symbol changing", and the area of the main RAM 291 used for the state setting of the normal symbol, the hit determination, and the fluctuation pattern determination is cleared.

In the start port monitoring control process (S326), the first start port 11 winning and the second starting port 12 winning of the game ball are monitored. If the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol is less than 4, the built-in random number is acquired, and the value obtained by adding the value of the soft random number per special symbol to the acquired built-in random number is added. It is stored in the buffer as a random number per special symbol used in the jackpot judgment. Further, as random numbers related to the special symbol, a symbol random number and a variable pattern random number are acquired and stored. When the hold of the second special symbol is prioritized over the hold of the first special symbol, only the update of the hold related to the prize is executed, but when the hold order of the special symbol is the winning order, the hold is executed. In addition to updating the hold related to the winning, the total number of holdings is updated and the winning order is stored. Next, in order to request a notice effect command corresponding to the random number memorized at the start opening winning, if the state of the game machine is confirmed and it is judged that the command transmission period is reached, a hit notice effect request, a hit symbol notice effect request, a pattern notice The production requests are executed in order. Here, when (1) waiting for a hit and the random number related to the first special symbol is stored while the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol is not operating, (2) waiting for a hit and the normal symbol When the random number related to the second special symbol is stored while the probability fluctuation function is not operating, or (3) when the random number related to the second special symbol is stored during the big hit or the small hit. , Judge that it is the command transmission period. Next, a production command corresponding to the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol is requested. As a result, the sub-board 300 is notified that the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol has been updated. As described above, in the look-ahead, four pieces of the pre-judgment information (pre-hit / fail judgment information, pre-design judgment information, pre-pattern judgment information) and the number of reserved balls are transmitted to the sub-board 300 as a set. In the above example, the main CPU 290 controls the transmission of the command for the pre-judgment process, but in another example, when there is a ball entering the start port, the command is uniformly transmitted and can be read ahead. The sub CPU 310 may perform various status determinations such as whether or not it is a period. Next, the value of the second starting port validity period flag is inspected, and if the value of the second starting port validity period flag is data indicating that the second starting port 12 is the valid period, the first starting port winning prize is awarded. As in the case, the monitoring process of the second start opening winning is executed. When the value of the second starting port valid period flag is data indicating that the second starting port 12 is in the invalid period, the monitoring process of the second starting port winning is not executed. If the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of reserved balls is 0, the number of reserved balls is once changed from 0 to 1, and then the control process related to the start of fluctuation, which will be described later, is executed. ..

In the special symbol control process (S328), the hit waiting state is inspected, and when the special electric accessory is in operation, that is, during a big hit or a small hit, the special symbol control process is terminated. When the special electric accessory is not operating, the state of the special symbol is inspected, and if it is "waiting for special symbol change", the special symbol control general-purpose processing is terminated, and if it is "start of change", the special symbol change. The start process is executed, and if it is "special symbol changing", the special symbol changing process is executed, and if it is "special symbol stop symbol displaying", the special symbol stop symbol displaying process is executed. In the special symbol variation start process, the selection number of the special symbol variation pattern is acquired based on the variation pattern random number, the variation time corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern number is determined, and the sub-board 300 is started to display the effect. Request commands for additional symbol information, variation pattern, and character information, set the state of the special symbol to "special symbol variation in progress", and clear the variation pattern determination area used to determine the special symbol variation pattern with 0. .. In the process during special symbol change, after changing the special symbol, the fluctuation time is monitored, and if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special symbol has ended, the change stop setting of the special symbol is set and the state of the special symbol is changed to "special". Set to "Stop symbol display". In the process of displaying the special symbol stop symbol, the stop symbol display time of the special symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop symbol display time of the special symbol has ended, the operation end setting of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination is executed. In the case of a big hit, in order to end the operation of the special symbol, the state of the special symbol is set to "waiting for change of the special symbol", the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated is set, and the probability of the special symbol is set. The fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol, the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol, and the opening extension function of the normal electric accessory are disabled, and the state of the game machine is prepared to open the winning opening. Set in, set the hit start demo display time, command request for hit start demo effect, and command request for launch position specification effect (command request to execute an effect that suggests a recommended launch position such as "right-handed") To execute. When the result of the hit judgment is a small hit, the operation end judgment of the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol and the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol is performed, the fluctuation pattern selection state is updated, the command request of the game state is performed, and the special symbol is performed. In order to end the operation of, set the state of the special symbol to "waiting for special symbol change", set the state of the game machine during the small hit start demo, set the hit start demo display time, and set the hit start demo effect. Execute a command request and a command request for a firing position designation effect. If the result of the hit judgment is incorrect, the operation end judgment of the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol and the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol is performed, the fluctuation pattern selection state is updated, the command request of the game state is performed, and the special symbol is displayed. In order to end the operation, the state of the special symbol is set to "waiting for special symbol change", and the command request for the firing position designation effect is executed.

In the special electric accessory control process (S330), in order to execute the process related to the special electric accessory, the operating state of the condition device and the special electric accessory is inspected, and the condition device is operating or the special electric accessory is operating. If it is determined, the processing related to the special electric accessory is executed. Depending on the operating status of the special electric accessory, the processing during preparation for opening the large winning opening, the processing during operation of the special electric accessory, the processing during closing of the large winning opening, the processing during the big hit end demonstration, the processing during the small hit start demonstration, the small hit special electric Execute processing during operation, processing during closing of the small hit big winning opening, and processing during demonstration of the end of small hit.

In the large winning opening validity period setting process (S332), the result of the validity period determination of the large winning opening 20 is saved. Therefore, if the value of the large winning opening valid time is 0, the large winning opening valid period flag is set to a large prize. The mouth invalid period data is stored, and if it is other than 0, the big prize opening validity period data is stored in the big winning opening validity period flag.

In the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334), the operating state of the special symbol is monitored, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in a state where the variation can be started. When the digestion order of the reserved balls of the special symbol is the priority digestion of the second special symbol, (1) it is not in the big hit or the small hit, (2) the first special symbol is waiting for fluctuation, (3). ) When the second special symbol is waiting for change and (4) the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol is other than 0, the special symbol can start to change. Is determined. When the digestion order of the reserved balls of the special symbol is the winning order, in addition to the above (1) to (3), (5) the total number of reserved balls of the special symbol is other than 0, (6) When all of the determinations, that is, the order of digestion, that is, the order of winning, are satisfied, it is determined that the special symbol can start to change.

When it is determined that the special symbol is in a state where it can start changing, the number of reserved balls for the special symbol is subtracted, and an effect command corresponding to the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. As a result, the sub-board 300 is notified that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has been updated.

Next, the hit determination of the special symbol is executed. In the hit determination, the random number per special symbol determines whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss, and the determination result is stored in the special symbol determination flag. Next, the design is decided. In the determination of the symbol, if the hit judgment is a big hit, the big hit symbol is determined based on the special symbol hit symbol random number, if it is a small hit, the small hit symbol is determined, and if it is a miss, the miss symbol is lost. Is determined.

When the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the operation content of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is determined based on the value of the group determination number indicating the type of the hit symbol determined in the symbol determination process, and the special symbol Set the game state after the big hit, such as the operation content of the fluctuation time shortening function and the easy winning state of the normal symbol. Next, the settings during the big hit, such as the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously and the contents of the opening time of the big winning opening, are executed. Next, the content of the variation pattern selection state is set by selecting the variation pattern table to be referred to after the end of the big hit based on the result of the hit determination and the operating state of the probability variation function of the normal symbol. Next, the start demo time and the end demo time are set with reference to the table selected based on the value of the group determination number indicating the game state and the type of the winning symbol. Subsequently, the area of the main RAM 291 used for the hit determination and the symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "variation start".

If the result of the hit judgment is a small hit, the content of the fluctuation pattern selection state is set, the start demo time and the end demo time are set, and the hit is made by selecting the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to after the small hit ends. The area of the main RAM 291 used for the determination and the symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "variation start". If the result of the hit determination is incorrect, the area of the main RAM 291 used for the hit determination and the symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "variation start".

In the abnormality detection process (S336), the main CPU 290 functioning as the main error detection means 284 inspects the magnetic detection signal, the short-circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, the radio wave detection signal, and the door / frame opening signal, and the error state changes. If there is, the error state is stored, and the sub-board 300 is requested to display the error state effect of the game machine. At this time, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as the LED mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the error state. If there is no change in the error state, the error state storage and the display request for the error state effect are not executed.

In the ball entry passage time abnormality detection process (S338), the main CPU 290 functioning as the main error detection means 284 monitors the continuous on-time of each switch level in order to detect the ball entry passage time abnormality, and the continuous on-time (continuous on-time) For example, if it is determined that the value of the counter that increments for each interrupt when the switch is on) is an abnormal value, the setting of the ball entry passage time error, the command transmission request, and the security output to the external information output terminal 160 Create output requests in order. At this time, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as the LED mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the abnormality of the ball entry passage time. If it is determined that the continuous on-time is not abnormal, the security output request is not created.

In the game state display process (S340), the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated, the error state, the number of balls on hold for normal symbol operation, and the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol are requested to be displayed. Create data.

In the handle state signal inspection process (S342), in order to monitor the touch state of the handle, the handle state is inspected, and if it is determined that the handle state has changed as a result of the inspection, the handle state monitoring timer is subtracted and the handle state is changed. Update, set the handle status monitoring timer, and execute the command transmission request for the handle status effect. If it is determined as a result of the inspection that there is no change in the steering wheel status, the steering wheel status monitoring timer is set. If the result of decrementing the value of the handle status monitoring timer is other than 0, it is determined that the timer is being subtracted, and the subsequent processing is not executed.

In the LED output processing (S344), the display of the special symbol, the display of the normal symbol, the display of the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol, the display of the number of balls on hold for operation of the normal symbol, the display of the game state, and the special electric accessory are continuous. Initialize the display to display the number of times the LED is activated, the operating status of the special electric accessory when the continuous operating device is not operating, the striking display, the error display, and the prize ball ratio display. , Acquire and output display data in order.

In the launch control signal output process (S346), in order to output a signal for prohibiting / permitting the launch of the game ball, the setting of the prohibition / permit for launching corresponding to the communication state with the payout control board 155 and the disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality, and After acquiring the firing prohibition / permission data, the firing prohibition / permission signal is output.

In the test signal output process (S348), a signal to be output to the test apparatus is created and output to the corresponding output port.

In the solenoid output processing (S350), in order to output the output data of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 and the large winning opening solenoid 92, the output data of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 is acquired, and the output data of the large winning opening solenoid 92 is obtained. Acquire and output data. The operation flag and the operation timer of each solenoid are acquired, and the output data corresponding to the acquired solenoid operation flag and the solenoid operation timer is acquired. Then, the solenoid operation timer is updated and the output data is output to the solenoid output port.

In the effect control command transmission process (S352), the presence or absence of a transmission request for the command to be transmitted to the sub-board 300 is inspected, and if it is determined that there is a transmission request, the requested command data is acquired and the command buffer used is set to 0. Clear, acquire MODE data corresponding to the acquired command data, output MODE data, retain MODE data, acquire EVENT data corresponding to the acquired command data, and output EVENT data in this order.

In the external information output process (S354), a signal to be output to the external information output terminal 160 is created, and the created signal is output to the external information output port.

The random numbers used in the operation process of the main board 200 described above will be described in more detail. The random numbers used in the main board 200 mainly include a random number per ordinary symbol and a random number per fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol as random numbers related to the ordinary symbol, and a random number per special symbol (hard random number) as a random number related to the special symbol. , There are soft random numbers per special symbol, symbol random numbers per special symbol, and variable pattern random numbers. In addition, as random numbers for giving initial values of normal symbol per random number, special symbol per symbol random number, and special symbol per soft random number, which are initial value update type random numbers, normal symbol per initial value random number and special symbol per symbol initial value are used. There are random numbers and soft initial value random numbers per special symbol.

The random number per normal symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored at a predetermined position in the main RAM 291. The random number per normal symbol is the number of pending changes in the normal symbol when it is determined in the interrupt processing normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320) that the game ball has passed through the first operation port 31 or the second operation port 32. When is less than 4, which is the upper limit value, is acquired from a predetermined position of the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol random number is used for hit determination and determination of the stop symbol when it is determined in the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S324) to start the fluctuation of the normal symbol.

The normal symbol variation pattern random number takes a value of 0 to 232, for example, is updated in various random number update processes (S306) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number is reserved for normal symbol fluctuation when it is determined in the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt process that the game ball has passed through the first operation port 31 or the second operation port 32. When the number is less than the upper limit value of 4, it is acquired from a predetermined position of the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol variation pattern random number is used to determine the normal symbol variation pattern when it is determined in the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324) that the normal symbol variation is to be started.

The random number per special symbol is obtained when the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of pending balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326) of the interrupt process. , The values of the built-in random number and the soft random number per special symbol are acquired, and both are added to generate the value, which is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The random number per special symbol is used to execute the big hit determination and the small hit determination in the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The soft random number per special symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored at a predetermined position in the main RAM 291. The soft random number per special symbol is the main RAM 291 when the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of pending balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326). It is obtained from the predetermined position of, and is used to generate a random number per special symbol as described above.

The symbol random number per special symbol takes a value of 0 to 999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 7), is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is set at a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. Stored. The symbol random number per special symbol is the main RAM 291 when the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326). Is acquired from a predetermined position of the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The symbol random number per special symbol is used to determine the jackpot symbol when the hit determination is a jackpot in the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The variation pattern random number takes a value of 0 to 49999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 8), is updated in various random number update processes (S306) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The variation pattern random number is determined by the main RAM 291 when the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326). Obtained from the position and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The variation pattern random number is used to determine the special symbol variation pattern in the special symbol control process (S328) of the interrupt process.

The initial value random number per ordinary symbol, the initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol have the same range of values as the random number per ordinary symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol, respectively. It is updated in the initial value random number update process (S208) of the main process (S120) and the initial value random number update process (S310) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The initial value random number per ordinary symbol, the initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are the random number per ordinary symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the special random number per initial value update type random number update process (S308). It is used as the initial value of each random number when updating the soft random number per symbol.

Since the interrupt process is executed at regular time intervals by timer interrupt, various random number update processes (S306) and initial value update type random number update processes (S308) included in the interrupt process are also executed at regular time intervals. To. That is, the normal symbol per random number, the normal symbol variation pattern random number, the special symbol per random number, the special symbol per soft random number, the special symbol per symbol random number, and the variation pattern random number are updated at regular intervals. On the other hand, in the main process (S120), the time from the end of the interrupt process to the occurrence of the next timer interrupt, that is, the time required for the interrupt process from the fixed time measured by the timer. Repeated for the reduced time. Since the time required for the interrupt process differs depending on the game state and the like, the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120) includes various random number update processes (S306) and initial value update type random number update process (S308). ), It is not executed at regular intervals. As a result, the initial value random number acquired when the initial value is set in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) can be made random every time.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a control start process of the sub-board 300 in the pachinko gaming machine. This control start processing is executed by the sub-initial processing execution means 360, and will be described below as being executed by the sub CPU 310 that functions as the sub-initial processing execution means 360. When the control of the sub-board 300 is started, the sub CPU 310 sets a stack pointer (S500), prohibits all interrupts until various initial settings are completed (S502), and sets registers and initializes ports of the sub CPU 310. Perform the initial settings related to the hardware (S504). The control program is read from the sub ROM 312 and placed in the sub RAM 311, and among various variables in the control program, the initial value is set for the variable having the initial value, and the zero clear data is set for the variable without the initial value. This initializes the sub RAM 311 (S506). The interrupt process on the sub-board 300 includes a process when the power is turned on and a reset process when various abnormalities occur when the watchdog function is enabled, as interrupt processes that are executed with the highest priority. Next, as an interrupt process of priority level 7 having a high execution priority, there is a command process received from the main board 200, and as an interrupt process of priority level 3 having the next highest priority, CPU runaway detection by the watchdog timer. There is a time reset process. The next priority interrupt process for priority level 2 includes processing related to commands sent and received to and from the control CPU 320, and the lowest priority level 1 interrupt process is communication processing with the real-time clock. There are various device control processes such as lamps, solenoids, and motors. If interrupts related to the above various processes occur at the same time, the interrupts set in advance for each interrupt type are executed with priority. The processes shown in this figure include the highest priority level interrupt, the process when the power is turned on, the reset process when various abnormalities occur, and the priority level 3 interrupt, which is the reset process when CPU runaway is detected. Including.

Interrupts (priority level 7) other than commands received from the main board 200 are prohibited (S510), and various error information used in the model is set from all the error information stored in advance for all models (S512). .. All the lamps such as the decorative lamp 111 are turned off (S514), the operation of the watchdog timer is started (S516), and the main process is executed (S518). Normally, the main process of S518 does not return to the main flow, but when it returns, it shifts to sleep (small power consumption mode) (S520).

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the main process of S518 in FIG. 20 in detail. In order to check in the main process of this figure whether the control program arranged in the sub RAM 311 is correctly arranged in S506 of FIG. 20, the start address for starting the check is acquired (S530), and in the subsequent processes. All interrupts are allowed (S532), and device initialization operations such as motors and solenoids are executed (S534).

If the setting is to use the watchdog timer, clear the watchdog timer (S536), update the decorative symbol counter so that the combination of the decorative symbols is a random combination (S540), and input the sub CPU 310. (S542). Since S540 is a process in a method of determining the out-of-order symbol of the decorative symbol using a counter, in the case of a method of determining the out-of-order symbol of the decorative symbol using a lottery sheet incorporating all the symbol combinations that are the out-of-order symbols. Does not execute the processing of S540. The process of determining the out-of-order symbol of the decorative symbol using the lottery sheet is executed when a command indicating a stop symbol of the special symbol is received from the main board 200 as described later in S552. The sub CPU 310, which functions as the sub-error detecting means 364, monitors the error state, notifies the error when various errors are detected (S544), executes processing according to the input state of the effect button 109 (S546), and executes the process. The advance notice lottery is executed (S548). In the advance notice lottery in S548, since the command of the advance notice effect to appear immediately after the start of the symbol change is transmitted to the effect control device 313 as soon as possible, the lottery process is not processed in one loop but a plurality of times. Divide into loops, and draw a lottery for the notice effect that appears immediately after the start of the symbol change in the previous loop. If there is an operation request for a device such as a real-time clock, lamp, motor, or solenoid, that operation is executed (S550), the command stored in the command buffer is analyzed (S552), and if immediately after the command analysis, the process proceeds to S536. Return (Y in S554), if not immediately after command analysis (N in S554), update the lottery software random number as a low priority process that can be performed in free time (S556), and return to the process in S536. In S552, when the command to be analyzed shows the variation pattern of the special symbol, the variation effect pattern of the decorative symbol is determined by the process of S552, and when the command to be analyzed indicates the stop symbol of the special symbol, the lottery sheet is displayed. If the method is used to determine the out-of-order symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined by the process of S552.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a command is received from the main board 200. The main command received from the main board 200 is a priority level 7 interrupt command having the highest priority next to the reset interrupt and the error interrupt. The data received from the main board 200 is read to the input port, and when the same data is read twice in a row, the data is confirmed as a new command (Y in S600), and the confirmed command is the first command. If it is (MODE data) (Y in S602), the first command is saved in the temporary storage area (S604). The hard random number is acquired for the subsequent processing (S606), and the original routine is returned. By acquiring the hard random number each time the main command is interrupted from the main board 200 in this way, the randomness of the value is enhanced without causing periodicity in the acquisition timing of the random number. If the data read in S600 does not match twice in a row (up to 5 times can be read), S602 is skipped and the original routine is returned (N in S600).

In S602, if the confirmed command is not the first command but the second command (N in S602), and if it can be confirmed that the first command has already been properly received (Y in S608), the command buffer (command data). The command write pointer which is the read position in the ring buffer) is acquired (S610), and the first command and the second command are saved in the command buffer (S612). The command data stored in the command buffer is analyzed in S552 of FIG. The command light pointer is updated (S614), the first command saved in the temporary storage area is cleared (S616), and the original routine is returned. If the first command has not been received in S608, skip S610 and later (N in S608) and return to the original routine.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. This timer interrupt is a priority level 2 interrupt for transmitting a command related to the effect display from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320, and is generated in a cycle of 500 μs. In this interrupt, the buffer is checked (S620), and if there is command data for transmission in the buffer (Y in S622), the command data is read (S624) and transmitted to the control CPU 320 (S626). The command data is transmitted to the control CPU 320 up to three times at predetermined time intervals until the sub CPU 310 receives a command indicating that the command data has been normally received on the control CPU 320 side from the control CPU 320. After transmission, the buffer read address setting is updated (S628), and the original routine is returned. If there is no data for transmission in the buffer (N in S622), skip S624 and subsequent steps and return to the original routine.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when the sub CPU 310 receives a command from the control CPU 320. This interrupt is also a priority level 2 interrupt. The command received by the sub CPU 310 from the control CPU 320 is mainly a command indicating that the command transmitted from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320 has been normally received. When a command is received from the control CPU 320, the received command data is read (S630), the command is analyzed (S632), saved in the command buffer (S634), and the original routine is returned.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. This timer interrupt is for controlling a lamp such as a decorative lamp 111, controlling a solenoid or a motor for driving a movable accessory 66, and managing and controlling various timers, and is generated at a cycle of 1 ms. Since it is the lowest priority level 1 interrupt, the interrupt of priority level 2 or higher is permitted (S640), and a signal indicating input from the effect button 109, a signal indicating error detection, and a signal indicating power failure , Processes the input / output of ports that input / output drive signals to controlled devices such as motors and solenoids (S642). At this time, if a signal indicating a power failure is input, the backup process is immediately started. Update the data related to device control (S644), such as counting processing based on the control pattern of devices such as motors and solenoids, and on / off control of the buffer for writing data to the port in S642, and set a timer to measure the timing of the effect. Update (S646), update the timer for managing the input valid time of the effect button 109 (S648), and update the task control counter for lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 and runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320. To create a 16 ms cycle (S650).

The minimum unit of lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 is 16 ms. One frame of the image display control is 16 ms or 32 ms, and by setting an integral multiple thereof as the minimum unit of the lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111, it is possible to easily synchronize the lamp control and the image display control. Further, when counting a relatively long period such as an error notification for 30 seconds, if a count with a 10 interrupt (1 ms) cycle is used, the count value becomes longer than necessary, but 16 ms. The count value can be shortened by using the count value of the cycle.

The task control includes 16 types of tasks from processes 0 to 15, one of which is the lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111, and two tasks are the runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320. The lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 is executed once every 16 interrupts according to the count value of the task control counter to realize switching in a cycle of 16 ms. The runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320 is assigned to, for example, processes 0 and 8, and when the count values of the task control counters are 0 and 8, that is, once every 80 interrupts, the toggle signal from the control CPU 320 is monitored (S652). By doing so, monitoring is realized in a cycle of 8 ms.

A toggle signal that is on / off inverted for each frame is output from the control CPU 320, and if this toggle signal does not change continuously at the same value for 1600 ms, it is determined that the control CPU 320 is out of control, and the sub CPU 310 Sends a reset signal to the control CPU 320, and the control CPU 320 that receives the reset signal executes the reset. Since the toggle signal is received from the control CPU 320 in a cycle of one frame (16 ms or 32 ms), it is monitored in a cycle of 8 ms shorter than that cycle. Finally, the timer that manages the relatively long error notification period such as the error notification for 30 seconds as described above is subtracted (S654), and the error notification ends at the time-out.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the process of displaying the special symbol variation. When the second winning / failing lottery value is held (Y in S700), the second winning / failing determination means 222 reads the second winning / failing lottery value and determines whether or not the second special symbol 52 is correct (S702), and the second winning / failing is determined. The determination means 222 determines the stop symbol of the second special symbol 52 (S704), the second variation pattern determining means 232 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 (S706), and issues a variation start command together with the determined result. It is transmitted to the sub-board 300 to start the symbol variation of the second special symbol 52 (S716).

When the second winning / failing lottery value is not held (N of S700) and the first winning / failing lottery value is held (Y of S708), the first winning / failing determination means 221 is the first winning / losing lottery. The value is read out and the hit / fail of the first special symbol 51 is determined again (S710), the first hit / miss determination means 221 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol 51 (S712), and the first variation pattern determining means 231 is the first. 1 The variation pattern of the special symbol 51 is determined (S714), and the variation start command is transmitted to the sub-board 300 together with the determined result to start the symbol variation of the first special symbol 51 (S716). If the first winning / failing lottery value is not held, the processes from S710 to S722 are skipped (N in S708).

The symbol variation display of the special symbol is processed (S718), S718 is repeated until the predetermined variation time elapses and the symbol display stop timing is reached (N of S720), and the symbol display is stopped after the predetermined variation time elapses. When the timing is reached (Y of S720), the fluctuation stop command is transmitted to the sub-board 300 to stop the symbol fluctuation being displayed at the predetermined stop symbol (S722), and the fluctuation display of the special symbol is finished. To do.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the process of displaying decorative symbol variation. The effect determining means 303 of the sub-board 300 receives a command indicating the variation start and the effect display content from the main substrate 200 (S750), and stops the decorative symbol according to the received special symbol stop symbol, variation pattern, and hit / fail determination result. The aspect is determined (S752), and the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is determined (S754). Here, when the precursor setting is turned on by the preliminary determination (Y in S756), the already determined variable effect pattern includes a specific effect content that should be avoided from being superimposed on the advance notice effect. If it is not (N of S758) and it is not a symbol change that is the trigger for turning on the precursor setting (N of S760), the setting for displaying the predetermined advance notice effect is executed (S764), and the precursor setting is set. If it is a symbol change that is an on-trigger (Y in S760), the precursor setting is turned off (S762). When the precursor setting is not turned on (N in S756) or when the variable effect pattern includes a specific effect content (Y in S758), the processes of S760 to S764 are skipped.

After that, the variation effect display of the decorative symbol is started (S766), the variation effect display process of the decorative symbol and (S768) are executed, the notice effect display process is executed (S770), and the variation stop command is received from the main board 200. When S768 and S770 are repeated (N in S772) and the fluctuation stop command is received (Y in S772), the symbol variation display is stopped by stopping and displaying the decorative symbol in the stop mode determined in S752 (S774). ), The variable production of the decorative pattern is completed (S776).

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the process of the special game. First, the effect display control means 305 starts the effect process of the special game (S800), and the open / close control means 275 opens the grand prize opening 20 (S802). If the predetermined opening time has not passed (N of S804) and the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 has not reached 9 or more, the game returns to S804 (N of S806) and the predetermined opening time has passed (N of S806). Although the opening time has not passed (Y of S804) (N of S804), when the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 reaches 9 or more (Y of S806), the opening / closing control means 275 is the large winning opening. 20 is closed (S810).

If the unit game has not reached the final round (N in S810), 1 is added to the number of rounds to return to S802 (S812), and if the unit game has reached the final round (Y in S810), the effect display is displayed. The control means 305 ends the effect processing of the special game (S814), the special game control means 260 ends the special game (S816), and starts the execution of the specific game, that is, the probability change, the time saving, and the easy-to-enter state (S818). ).

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the process of the small hit game. In the small hit game, a unit game that is executed only once is started (S819), the large winning opening 20 is opened (S820), and the opening is continued until a predetermined opening time elapses (N of S822). When the time has passed (Y of S822), the large winning opening 20 is closed (S824), and if the opening and closing of the set number of times has not been completed (N of S826), 1 is added to the number of opening and closing to return to S820. (S828) If the opening and closing for the set number of times is completed (Y in S826), the small hit game is ended.

In the prerequisite technique, the number of big hits in the second game is generally larger than the number of big hits in the first game, that is, the second game has one big hit than the first game. Although it was designed to have a higher expected value of winning a prize ball in, in another example, the first game may be designed to have a higher expected value of winning a prize ball than the second game. However, the first game and the second game may be designed so that the expected value of winning the prize ball is substantially equal. In the latter case, it may be designed so that the average number of unit games included in the special game executed in the first game and the special game executed in the second game is equal. For example, in the first game, a special game in which a unit game is executed seven times with a probability of 100% is executed, and in a second game, a special game in which a unit game is executed four times with a probability of 50% is executed. However, a special game in which the unit game is executed 10 times with a probability of 50% may be executed. Further, in any case, when a specific area is provided in the large winning opening and the game ball that has entered the large winning opening enters the specific area or passes through the specific area, in the normal game after the special game is completed. It may be configured so that a specific game such as a probabilistic state is performed. In this case, the special game executed when the big hit is made in the second game is easier to enter the specific area than the special game which is executed when the big hit is made in the first game. It may be configured so that the probability that the normal game in the probabilistic state is executed after the end of the special game is high. For example, the first hit in which a special game in which it is relatively difficult to enter a specific area is executed, and the second hit in which a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area is executed. It may be provided so that the second game has a higher probability of being a second hit than the first game. Alternatively, the probability of a second hit in the first game is less than 100%, but the probability of a second hit in the second game may be configured to be 100%.

(Prerequisite technology 2)
Next, the basic configuration of the slot machine will be described as a prerequisite technology.
FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing a basic structure on the outer surface of the slot machine 1010. The slot machine 1010 is mainly a box-shaped housing base 1102, a housing door 1104 provided on the front surface of the housing base 1102, and various types provided on the housing base 1102 and the housing door 1104. It is equipped with a device. The housing door portion 1104 is a door body that is openably and closably attached to the opening of the housing base 1102, and the housing of the slot machine 1010 can be formed by integrating the housing base 1102 and the housing door 1104. Form. The housing door portion 1104 is locked during business hours of the game store to prevent unauthorized access to the inside of the slot machine 1010. Access to the interior is only possible when the housing door 1104 is unlocked by an employee of the amusement store.

A transparent window 1132 is provided in the housing door portion 1104 substantially in the center of the front surface thereof, and a reel rotating inside is visually recognized through the transparent window 1132. An effect display device 1130 for displaying the effect content is provided on the upper part of the front surface of the housing door portion 1104. In the operation area provided below the transparent window 1132 in the housing door portion 1104, a first bet button 1112a, a second bet button 1112b, a settlement button 1113, a cross key 1118, an effect button 1120, and a medal insertion slot 1110 are provided. Be done. The first bet button 1112a is a button for placing one medal (hereinafter, also referred to as "bet"), and the second bet button 1112b is a so-called max bet button, which is a maximum number of bets of three. It is a button for hanging medals. The settlement button 1113 is a button for instructing the player to pay out the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 1110 and stored as a stored medal or the bet medal. The cross key 1118 and the effect button 1120 are operation input means for receiving the operation input of the player as the effect. Below the bet buttons 1112a and b, a start lever 1114 is provided for the player to instruct the start of rotation of the reel. To the right of the start lever 1114, a left stop button 1116a, a middle stop button 1116b, and a right stop button 1116c for instructing the rotation stop of the three reels are provided. A medal payout port 1108 and a medal tray 1106 are provided below the housing door portion 1104, and speakers 1122 are provided on the left and right sides of the payout port 1108. A plurality of effect lamps 1124 are provided at a plurality of locations such as the outer periphery of the housing door portion 1104.

A status display lamp, a number of times display lamp, a stored number of sheets display lamp, and a payout number display lamp are provided on the upper part of the effect display device 1130 (not shown). For example, the status display lamp turns on when a bonus game or AT (assist time) starts, and turns off when it ends. The number-of-times display lamp is a 7-segment display that displays the number of times a bonus game or AT is executed. The stored number display lamp is a 7-segment display that displays the number of stored (credited) game medals. The payout number display lamp is a 7-segment display that displays the number of game medals to be paid out when a small winning combination is established. When some abnormality (error) occurs in the slot machine 1010, the payout number display lamp displays alphabetic characters indicating the type of the error. For example, there are a hopper empty error, a game medal payout error, a game medal retention error, a game medal backflow error, an auxiliary storage full error, a rotating cylinder stop error, a set value error, and the like. The hopper empty error is an error when the game medal in the hopper tank 1162 is emptied. The game medal payout error is an error when the game medal is paid out at a timing different from the original one. The game medal retention error is an error when the game medal is jammed inside the medal slot 1110. The game medal backflow error is an error when the game medal advances in a direction different from the original route, such as the game medal invading from a position different from the medal insertion slot 1110. The auxiliary storage full error is an error when the game medals in the hopper tank 1162 are full. The spinning stop error is an error when each reel does not stop at a predetermined position. The set value error is an error when the set value is out of the predetermined numerical range.

FIG. 31 is a rear view of the housing door portion 1104 that is exposed when the housing door portion 1104 is opened. A transparent window 1132 is provided substantially in the center. A sub-control device 1300, which is a so-called sub-board, is installed on the upper part to control the effect in the game. A medal selector 1150, a medal taxiway 1152 to the right of the medal selector 1150, and a medal return path 1154 are provided below the transparent window 1132. When a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot, which will be described later, the medal selector 1150 distributes the medal to the medal taxiway 1152 if the medal can be accepted, and to the medal return route 1154 if the medal cannot be accepted. The medals distributed to the medal taxiway 1152 are stored in the hopper tank described later through the medal taxiway 1152.

FIG. 32 is a front view showing the internal configuration of the housing base 1102 that is exposed when the housing door 1104 is opened. A left reel 1160a, a middle reel 1160b, and a right reel 1160c are rotatably provided at a substantially central portion of the housing base 1102. The left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c are rotating members having a plurality of symbols printed on their outer peripheral surfaces, and each of them is rotated by the driving force of a stepping motor to rotate the symbols through the transparent window 1132. It is visually recognized by the player.

A main control device 1200, which is a so-called main board, which controls the progress of the game, is installed on the upper part of the housing base 1102. In the main control device 1200, a setting change switch 1168 is provided on the right side thereof. The setting change switch 1168 includes a button for changing the game specifications having six stages, a keyhole for inserting a setting key held by an employee of the game store, and a setting memory for storing the set setting value. As for the set values of the six stages associated with the different game specifications, the larger the numerical value among the settings 1 to 6, the more advantageous the game specifications are to the player. When an employee of the game store inserts the setting key into the keyhole and turns it, the setting can be changed by operating the button.

A hopper tank 1162 is provided at the lower part of the housing base 1102, and a payout device 1164 (hereinafter, also referred to as “hopper”) for paying out medals from the payout port 1108 is provided below the hopper tank 1162. On the left side of the hopper tank 1162, a power supply board 1166 that supplies electric power to each part of the slot machine 1010 is provided.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a design arrangement of reels. A string of symbols as shown in the table of the figure is printed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c. Twenty symbols corresponding to symbol numbers 0 to 19 are arranged at equal intervals on each reel. When the combination of the symbols stopped on the effective line among these symbols becomes the same predetermined symbol or a predetermined combination in which a predetermined combination is established, the winning of the combination is determined. On the other hand, the line in which the symbols are lined up includes a combination line that is not set as an effective line and is not treated as a winning combination even if the predetermined same symbol or a predetermined combination is stopped.

In the above slot machine 1010, the player hangs medals by inserting one to three medals from the medal insertion slot 1110. When medals are stored as credits, the player hangs one or three medals by pressing the first bet button 1112a, the second bet button 1112b, or the checkout button 1113. When the player operates the start lever 1114, the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c start rotating, and the symbol row on the reels moves at high speed in the vertical direction. When the player presses the left stop button 1116a, the middle stop button 1116b, and the right stop button 1116c in an arbitrary order, the rotation of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c is stopped in the order corresponding to the pressing order. One of the symbols is displayed at the stop position. When the combination mode of the symbols stopped on the predetermined valid line corresponds to any of a plurality of types of combinations, it is determined as "winning", and the number of medals corresponding to the types of the combination is paid out or the game state. Migration is performed.

FIG. 34 is a functional block diagram of the slot machine 1010. The slot machine 1010 includes a main control device 1200 and a sub control device 1300. The main control device 1200 is electrically connected to the reels 1160a to c, the bet buttons 1112a and b, the settlement button 1113, the start lever 1114, the stop buttons 1116a to c, and the setting change switch 1168. It is electrically connected to 1124, the effect display device 1130, the speaker 1122, the cross key 1118, and the effect button 1120. The main control device 1200 and the sub control device 1300 are configured to include elements such as a ROM and RAM for storing data and programs, and a CPU used for arithmetic processing, respectively, in terms of hardware, but in this figure, they are mainly software-like. I will explain the functional blocks from various perspectives.

It should be noted that each functional block included in the main control device 1200 may be configured such that one of them is mounted on the sub control device 1300 instead of the main control device 1200. Similarly, each functional block included in the sub-control device 1300 may be configured such that one of them is mounted on the main control device 1200 instead of the sub-control device 1300. However, since data transmission / reception between the main control device 1200 and the sub control device 1300 is in one direction from the main control device 1200 to the sub control device 1300, the entire operation is realized by data transmission / reception in such one direction. Each configuration is arranged in the main control device 1200 and the sub control device 1300 so as to be performed. In this way, since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main control device 1200 to the sub control device 1300 is maintained, data is transmitted from the configuration included in the sub control device 1300 to the configuration included in the main control device 1200. Cannot be done, and data transmission cannot be requested. Therefore, the information generated by the main control device 1200 cannot be referred to from the sub control device 1300 unless the main control device 1200 unilaterally transmits the information to the sub control device 1300.

The main control device 1200 includes a combination lottery means 1202, a random number determination means 1204, a winning flag control means 1206, a reel control means 1208, a stop position determination table 1210, an operation order detection means 1212, a winning determination means 1214, a payout means 1216, and a special game. The control means 1218 and the setting changing means 1220 are provided.

The combination lottery means 1202 executes a combination lottery for determining a winning combination from a plurality of types of combinations when the player operates the start lever 1114, and transmits the result of the combination lottery to the sub-control device 1300. To do. The types of roles include small roles, special roles, and replaying roles, and if none of the winning combinations is decided, it will be excluded. There are multiple types of small roles, and the number of medals is paid out according to the type. Special roles include regular bonuses (also called "RB") and big bonuses (also called "BB"). The replay role is also called "replay", and it is a role in which the same number of medals are inserted without inserting a new medal, and the game can be played again. The random number determination means 1204 acquires the value of the random number used for the winning combination lottery as the lottery value. The "random number" referred to in the present application does not have to be a mathematically generated random number, and may be a pseudo-random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. The winning combination lottery means 1202 determines the winning combination depending on whether or not the lottery value acquired by the random number determining means 1204 falls within any of the lottery value ranges assigned to each combination as the winning combination lottery.

The winning flag control means 1206 turns on the flag corresponding to the winning combination among the plurality of flags corresponding to each combination. If the winning combination with the flag turned on is a small combination, the winning combination will not be carried over, so the flag will be turned off at the end of the game regardless of whether or not there is a prize. If the winning combination with the flag turned on is a special role, the winning combination will be carried over to the prize, so the flag will remain on until there is a prize, and the flag will be turned off when the prize is won. If the winning combination with the flag turned on is a re-game combination, the winning combination is not carried over, so the flag is turned off when the game ends.

The reel control means 1208 controls to start the rotation of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c when the start lever 1114 is operated, and also provides information indicating the operation of the start lever 1114. It is transmitted to the control device 1300. The reel control means 1208 selects one from a plurality of stop position determination tables 1210 according to the result of the winning combination lottery. The reel control means 1208 triggers the individual pressing of the left stop button 1116a, the middle stop button 1116b, and the right stop button 1116c, and stops the rotation of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c in response to the individual pressing. While controlling, information indicating that the stop button is pressed is transmitted to the sub-control device 1300. The reel control means 1208 controls the rotation and stop of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c by controlling the drive of the stepping motors provided in each of them.

Based on the stop position determination table 1210, the reel control means 1208 has the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c according to the timing and the pressing order of the left stop button 1116a, the middle stop button 1116b, and the right stop button 1116c. Determine the stop position of. The operation order detecting means 1212 detects the order in which the left stop button 1116a, the middle stop button 1116b, and the right stop button 1116c are pressed. The reel control means 1208 detects the rotation positions of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c by means of photosensors corresponding to the respective rotation positions.

In the stop position determination table 1210, the result of the winning combination lottery, the positions of the reels 1160a to c when the stop buttons 1116a to 1c are pressed, the pressing order of the stop buttons 1116a to c, and a plurality of reels 1160a to c are displayed. The correspondence relationship of which of the symbols is stopped on the effective line is determined. That is, individual stop position determination tables 1210 are prepared according to the type of small winning combination, the type of special winning combination, and the type of replaying combination, and the stop buttons 1116a to 1c have the pressing timing and pressing order as the winning conditions for each winning combination. It is defined in each stop position determination table 1210. If any of the winning combinations is won, the reel control means 1208 will perform the reel control means 1208 when the pressing timing and pressing order of the stop buttons 1116a to 1c satisfy the winning conditions based on the stop position determination table 1210 according to the winning combination. The stop positions of the reels 1160a to c are determined so that the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combinations are aligned on the effective line. Even if any of the winning combinations is won, if the pressing timing and pressing order of the stop buttons 1116a to 1c do not satisfy the winning conditions, the reel control means 1208 determines the stop position according to the winning combination. Based on the table 1210, the stop positions of the reels 1160a to c are determined so that the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combinations are not aligned on the effective line. If none of the winning combinations are won, the reel control means 1208 will use the reel control means 1208 to stop the reels 1160a to c so that the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combinations are not aligned on the effective line based on the stop position determination table 1210 corresponding to the combination. To determine.

In the present specification, the term "table" simply refers to data in which the correspondence between the first parameter such as the lottery value and the second parameter such as the value indicating the option is defined by the table structure. However, it is widely included that such a correspondence is realized by a program structure for deriving the second parameter from the first parameter. Including them, it is also referred to as "selection criteria" as appropriate as a concept that is substantially synonymous with "table". Further, when a table structure is used, the selection criteria that are substantially one type may be composed of a combination of a plurality of structurally subdivided tables, but the term "multiple types of selection criteria" is subdivided. Shows the actual number of types of tables, not the number of converted tables.

The prize-winning determination means 1214 determines that a prize has been won when the symbol combinations corresponding to any of the combinations are aligned on the effective line, and determines the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the winning combination. The payout means 1216 adds the number of payout medals determined by the winning determination means 1214 to the number of stored medals. However, when the number of stored medals exceeds 50, the excess medals are paid out by the payout device 1164. If the winning combination is a re-game combination, the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game are hung again. The winning determination means 1214 transmits information on winning and information on the number of medals to be paid out to the sub-control device 1300.

The special game control means 1218 controls the transition from the normal game to the special game when the special combination is won, and the transition from the special game to the normal game when the end condition of the special game is satisfied. The special game includes an RB game that shifts when a prize is won in the RB and a BB game that shifts when a prize is won in the BB. The RB game ends when a predetermined symbol or a predetermined combination stops 8 times on the effective line, or when a game result of 12 times is obtained. The BB game ends when the total number of medals paid out due to the predetermined symbol or the predetermined combination stopping on the valid line exceeds 465.

The setting changing means 1220 determines the game specification corresponding to the set value set by the setting change switch 1168 among the six-stage game specifications, and changes the winning probability of each winning combination in the winning combination lottery by the winning combination lottery means 1202. In the 6-stage game specifications, the larger the numerical value among the settings 1 to 6, the higher the winning probability. Every time the setting change switch 1168 is operated, the setting value is incremented by 1 in the order of "Setting 1"-> "Setting 2"-> "Setting 3"-> ...-> "Setting 6"-> "Setting 1". Increment is circulated by returning from "Setting 6" to "Setting 1". Finally, by operating the start lever 1114, the set value selected at that time is determined, and the setting change is confirmed.

The sub-control device 1300 includes pattern storage means 1302, effect determination means 1304, and effect control means 1306. The pattern storage means 1302 stores a plurality of types of effect patterns. As the effect pattern, the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device 1130 according to the progress of the game, the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 1124, the sound pattern output from the speaker 1122, and the like are defined. The effect determining means 1304 provides information such as information indicating the operation of the start lever 1114, information indicating the pressing of the stop button 1116, information indicating the result of the winning combination lottery, information on winning, and information on the number of medals to be paid out from the main control device 1200. Receive. The effect determining means 1304 becomes the pattern storage means 1302 according to the result of the winning combination lottery by the winning combination lottery means 1202, the winning situation, and the gaming state, triggered by the operation of the start lever 1114 and the stop buttons 1116a to 1c and the stop of the reels 1160a to c. Select one from a plurality of types of memorized production patterns. The effect control means 1306 controls the display of the effect display device 1130, the lighting of the effect lamp 1124, and the output from the speaker 1122 according to the effect pattern selected by the effect determination means 1304. The effect control means 1306 changes the display content on the effect display device 1130, the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 1124, the sound output from the speaker 1122, and the like according to the input contents of the effect button 1120 and the cross key 1118. If the bet buttons 1112a and b and the start lever 1114 are newly operated while controlling the effect by the effect pattern, the effect control means 1306 cancels the displayed effect, and the effect determination means 1304 is used for a new game. The corresponding effect pattern is selected, and the effect control means 1306 starts the effect according to the selected effect pattern.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a basic game flow in the slot machine 1010. First, it is assumed that none of the reels 1160a to 1c has been rotated yet (N of S1010) and no medal has been bet (N of S1012). In that state, when medals are stored as credits (Y in S1014), if any of the bet buttons 1112a and b is pressed (Y in S1016), the number of medals bet corresponding to the pressed bet button is placed. Set (S1018). If there is no credit, the routine of this flow is exited and the remaining processing is skipped until a medal is inserted (N in S1014). Even if the bet buttons 1112a and b are not pressed in S1016, the routine of this flow is exited and the remaining processing is skipped until the bet buttons 1112a and b are pressed (N in S1016). If a bet has already been made in S1012, S1014 to S1018 are skipped (Y in S1012).

If the start lever 1114 is operated (Y in S1020) with the bet set, the winning combination lottery means 1202 executes the winning combination lottery (S1022), and the winning flag control means 1206 wins according to the result of the winning combination lottery. The flag corresponding to the combination is turned on (S1024), and the stop position determination table 1210 according to the result of the combination lottery is selected (S1025). If 4.1 seconds have not passed since the end of the previous game, the game waits (N in S1026), and if it has passed (Y in S1026), the reel control means 1208 starts rotating the reels 1160a to 1c (N in S1026). S1028), exit the routine of this flow. If there is no operation of the start lever 1114 in S1020, the routine of this flow is exited and the remaining processing is skipped (N in S1020).

In S1010, when at least one of the reels 1160a to c is rotating (Y in S1010), and if any of the stop buttons 1116a to 1c is pressed (Y in S1030), the state of the flag indicating the winning combination, The reel stop position is determined based on the stop button pressing timing, pressing order, and stop position determination table 1210 (S1032), and the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button is stopped (S1034). If the stop button is not pressed, S1032 and S1034 are skipped (N in S1030). When all reels 1160a to 1c are stopped (Y in S1036), the winning combination is determined based on the stopped position (S1038), and if there is a winning combination, the medal is based on the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination. Is paid out (S1040). If all reels are not stopped, S1038 and S1040 are skipped (N in S1036).

As the reel stop management process, a weight time is set, a control command including information indicating that the reel is waiting to start rotating is generated, written to the command buffer, and initial values of various data used for accelerating the reel are predetermined. Store in the storage area of. It is determined whether or not all reels are rotating at a constant speed, and if it is determined that all reels are not rotating at a constant speed, it is determined whether or not the rotation of all reels is abnormal. Again, the initial values of various data used for accelerating the reels are stored in a predetermined storage area, and the confirmation of all reels is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reels are rotating at a constant speed, or if it is determined that the rotation is not abnormal, the confirmation of all reels is terminated as it is.

If the payout cannot be stored when paying out medals, the hopper payout is executed. In this hopper payout process, first, the hopper is started to be driven and waits until the payout is detected (if the payout is not detected until a predetermined time elapses, a hopper empty error occurs). If a payout is detected, the number of payouts is added, it is determined whether or not the payout is completed, and if the payout is not finished, the payout process is repeated, and if the payout is finished, the hopper drive is finished.

FIG. 36 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configurations of the main control device 1200 and the sub control device 1300. The main control device 1200 includes electronic components such as a main CPU 1250, a main RAM 1252, and a main ROM 1254. The main ROM 1254 stores in advance a main control program and data for controlling the overall game operation. The main control program or data is read from the main ROM 1254 into the main RAM 1252, and the main control program is executed by the main CPU 1250. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown). A signal indicating that a medal is inserted, a signal indicating that the bet buttons 1112a and b are pressed, a signal indicating that the settlement button 1113 is pressed, a signal indicating that the start lever 1114 is operated, a signal indicating that the stop buttons 1116a to 1c are pressed, and reels 1160a to A signal indicating the position of c is acquired by the main CPU 1250 via various interfaces (not shown). The main CPU 1250 drives and controls an external device such as a stepping motor of reels 1160a to 1c by various drive circuits (not shown). Further, a command required for the effect control is transmitted from the main CPU 1250 to the sub control device 1300 together with the result of the winning combination lottery, the winning information, and the information indicating the operation of each button or lever.

The sub control device 1300 includes electronic components such as a sub CPU 1350, a sub RAM 1352, a sub ROM 1354, and an effect display control unit 1360. The sub ROM 1354 is one of the data storage means for holding the sub control program including the effect pattern data in which the effect process is defined and the display pattern data in which the effect display process is defined. It is a hardware configuration that functions as. A sub control program including effect pattern data and display pattern data is read from the sub ROM 1354 into the sub RAM 1352, and the effect control by the sub control program is executed by the sub CPU 1350. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown), and is connected by two-way communication capable of transmitting and receiving signals to each other. For example, when a command is transmitted from the sub CPU 1350 to the effect display control unit 1360, the command is transmitted a plurality of times, and the effect display control unit 1360 issues an acknowledgment (ACK) to the sub CPU 1350 as soon as the command is appropriately received at least once. By replying, communication errors due to noise etc. are avoided. If the reception order of a plurality of commands is different from the usual one, the effect display control unit 1360 ignores the ACK without returning it, and returns only to an appropriate command. A signal from an external device such as the effect button 1120 is acquired by the sub CPU 1350 via various interfaces (not shown), and a command corresponding to the effect display control unit 1360 is transmitted according to the reception of the signal or the number of receptions. The sub CPU 1350 controls an effect by audio output by driving an external device such as a speaker 1122 by various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown) according to the effect pattern data. Further, the sub CPU 1350 transmits the display pattern data to the effect display control unit 1360. The sub CPU 1350 and the effect display control unit 1360 have a hardware configuration that functions as the effect determination means 1304 and the effect control means 1306 as shown in FIG. 34. In this embodiment, an example in which the sub-control device 1300 includes the effect display control unit 1360 will be described, but the sub-control device 1300 and the effect display control unit 1360 do not need to be integrated as a substrate and are separated. They may be formed as separate substrates connected to each other.

FIG. 37 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the effect display control unit 1360. The effect display control unit 1360 includes a control CPU 1362, a control RAM 1364, a data ROM 1366, and a display control circuit 1370. The data ROM 1366 is one of the data storage means for holding the material data such as the effect image data, the motion data, and the object definition data of the three-dimensional image used for the effect display in a data-compressed state, and the pattern storage referred to in FIG. 34. It is a hardware configuration that functions as means 1302. The effect image data is an image used for the effect display as an effect object indicating a winning determination result or the like, and is, for example, a material image such as a sprite image used for various effects and a moving image used for various effects. The motion data is data in which the motion is defined when the motion is added to the images used for various effects at a predetermined timing. Object definition data is data in which the shape of a three-dimensional object is defined.

Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 1350, material data such as effect image data, motion data, and object definition data specified in the display pattern data is read from the data ROM 1366 to the control RAM 1364, and the material data is read. The effect display used is executed by the control CPU 1362. As a result, the control CPU 1362 transmits commands and material data related to the effect display to the display control circuit 1370, and the display control circuit 1370 controls the display. When a signal indicating the operation of the new bet buttons 1112a, b or the start lever 1114 is received during the effect display, the sub CPU 1350 determines a new effect pattern and sends a command indicating the new effect display to the control CPU 1362. .. The sub CPU 1350 and the display control circuit 1370 have a hardware configuration that functions as the effect determining means 1304 and the effect control means 1306 as shown in FIG. 34.

The display control circuit 1370 includes a decoder 1374, a drawing memory 1376, a drawing circuit 1378, a frame buffer 1380, and a display circuit 1382, each of which is connected via a bus 1372. For convenience, bus 1372 in this figure comprehensively shows buses such as a system bus, a data bus, and an address bus.

Material data such as effect image data, motion data, and object definition data sent from the control CPU 1362 are stored in the drawing memory 1376, and the compressed data among the data is decoded by the decoder 1374. The drawing memory 1376 is used as a work area when decoding the effect image data or motion data by the decoder 1374, or is used as a work area when executing drawing processing or image processing by the drawing circuit 1378. ).

The drawing circuit 1378 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 1376 to execute commands sent from the control CPU 1362 in order to generate a display image, and the generated display image is used as a frame of a moving image as a frame buffer. Store in 1380. The frame buffer 1380 is a VRAM as a buffer memory for temporarily storing frames of moving images to be output to the effect display device 1130. The frame buffer 1380 and the drawing memory 1376 may be formed by forming a single VRAM and sharing the area.

The display circuit 1382 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 1380 to the effect display device 1130 in the form of video signals in the order in which they are stored. The frame buffer 1380 has, for example, a memory area for two frames, and while the display circuit 1382 outputs a display image from the memory area for one frame, the drawing circuit 1378 generates the next display image. Store in the memory area for another frame.

The slot machine 1010 is powered by a power supply board 1166 that functions as a power supply device. A power switch and a reset switch are connected to the power supply device, and signals from each of these switches are transmitted to the main CPU 1250. The power switch is a switch that accepts power-on and power-off operations from the power supply device to the slot machine 1010. The reset switch is a switch for resetting each circuit or the like mounted on the main control device 1200 when an error occurs in the slot machine 1010 or the like. The electric power from the power supply device is supplied to the main control device 1200 and the sub control device 1300. On the power supply path from the power supply device to the main control device 1200 and the sub control device 1300, a power supply monitoring means for monitoring the supply voltage and detecting a power failure in which the voltage drops below a predetermined voltage is provided. The power supply monitoring means determines that the power supply is cut off when the supply voltage drops to a predetermined voltage, and outputs a power supply cutoff detection signal to the main CPU 1250 or the sub CPU 1350. The reference voltage value when detecting the power failure of the main control device 1200 is set to a value higher than the reference voltage value when detecting the power failure of the sub control device 1300, and is set before the sub control device 1300. The main control device 1200 executes a process programmed to be executed when the power is cut off (power cutoff process).

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a main program control process of the main control device 1200 in the slot machine 1010. In the game control process executed by the main control device 1200, first, the game start process is executed (S1100), the game medal management process is executed (S1102), and the number of bets matches the specified number as the start conditions, and If the operation of the start lever is accepted (Y in S1104), the lever reception processing is executed (S1106), and if at least one of the start conditions is not satisfied (N in S1104), the process returns to S1102. Following S1106, the combination determination process is executed (S1108), and whether or not to execute the freeze (effect) as the freeze lottery process and the effect mode during the freeze are determined (S1110). When the pseudo game freeze is selected in the freeze lottery, the pseudo game is executed (S1112). A reel stop management process such as waiting for a weight time is executed (S1114), and a stop display symbol determination process is executed to determine whether or not a game combination has been established (S1116). Next, the game medal payout process is executed (S1118), the game end process is executed (S1120), the process returns to S1100, and the flow of this figure is repeated.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process in the main control device 1200. In this timer interrupt process, processing such as reading each game operation signal output, detecting (confirming) the signal level, and transmitting each control command in response to a game operation such as a bet operation performed by the player is performed. It is performed every fixed time (for example, 2.235 milliseconds). First, interrupt initial processing (register save, interrupt prohibition, etc.) is executed (S1200), it is determined whether or not a power failure is detected, and if a power failure is detected (Y in S1202), the power supply is supplied. The disconnection process is executed (S1204). In the power off processing, registers are saved, stack pointers are saved, interrupt states are saved, and the like. In addition, information on the combination determination result and information on the RT game state stored in a predetermined storage area, checksum calculation and storage, and the like are processed. If no power failure is detected (N in S1202), timer measurement is executed (S1206). The timer measurement measures the elapsed time or the like of an arbitrary timer set in the game control process. Next, control of the display lamp (update of the display value in the display lamp based on the control data output to the output port, etc.) is executed (S1208), and further, reading of the input port is executed (S1020). In reading the input port, the signal level of each game operation signal input to the input port is read and stored, and the signal level is determined.

Next, reel drive control (S1212) for controlling acceleration, deceleration, constant speed maintenance, stop maintenance, and the like of reel rotation is repeated until all reels are completed (S1214). Next, a port output process for exciting output of the reel, hopper, blocker, etc. is executed (S1216), and a control command transmission process is executed (S1218). The outer end signal data stored in the predetermined storage area is read out, the outer end signal is output (S1220), the interrupt end processing (register return, interrupt permission, etc.) is executed (S1222), and the interrupt return. To do.

As another control process executed by the main control device 1200, there is a main control power-on process. The main control power-on process is a process performed at the start of power supply to the main control device 1200 (at the time of power-on), and the temporary stack pointer is set, the checksum is calculated, checked, and the power is restored. It will be processed so that it can be done. The stack pointer is returned and the interrupt is activated, and the game is played based on the information on the combination determination result and the information on the RT game state stored in the predetermined storage area when the power is turned off.

(Example)
Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, there is a "fixed expectation level" that keeps the expectation level that is a big hit regardless of the type of subsequent effect when going through a special effect process, and a "fixed expectation level effect" that suggests the execution of a specific effect in advance. "Advance suggestion production" can be executed. First, "1. Pre-suggested effect" related to the composition of the entire effect will be described, and then "2. Fixed expectation effect" that can be executed when going through a special effect process will be described.

(1. Advance suggestion production)
In this embodiment, a "pre-suggestion effect" that pre-suggests the execution of a specific effect is prepared, and a dedicated effect that can be executed only after the execution of the pre-suggestion effect is prepared. The special production is one of the "high expectation production" with a relatively high expectation that it will be a big hit. The pre-suggestion effect is started at various timings during the progress of the game and continues until the execution timing of the specific effect to be suggested. After that, the pre-suggestion effect ends at the timing when the specific effect to be suggested can be executed, and the specific effect can be executed when the pre-suggestion effect ends. It should be noted that, with the end of the prior suggestion effect, the dedicated effect may be executed, the common effect other than the dedicated effect may be executed, and neither the dedicated effect nor the common effect may be executed. Here, the "common effect" refers to an effect that can be executed without executing the advance suggestion effect, and various variable effects and advance notice effects can be applied.

According to this embodiment, it is suggested that the expectation level to be hit at the start of the prior suggestion effect is high by enabling the execution of the dedicated effect which is one of the high expectation effect after the end of the advance suggestion effect. it can. In addition, by providing a case where the dedicated effect is executed after the end of the prior suggestion effect and a case where the dedicated effect is not executed, the case where the dedicated effect that must be executed less frequently in order to have a high expectation is not executed. Even so, the advance suggestion effect can be executed, and the execution frequency of the advance suggestion effect can be increased. In addition, even if the dedicated effect is not executed after the end of the pre-suggested effect, it is possible to execute a common effect different from the dedicated effect, thereby increasing the variation of the effect and having a chance to win. Can be suggested to the player. Furthermore, by providing a difference in the types of effects that can be executed after the end of the prior suggestion effect according to the start timing and end timing of the prior suggestion effect, the difference in the degree of expectation due to the difference in the start or end timing of the prior suggestion effect can be obtained. Can be suggested to the player. As a result, the interest of the production can be enhanced.

FIG. 40 is a diagram schematically showing the flow of the variation effect. This figure shows the flow from the start of fluctuations in the main drawing to the execution of various effects via normal reach, etc., and the execution of the "strongest effect", which is set to have the highest expectation of being a big hit. .. The "strongest production" is a fluctuation production with the highest expectation that can be executed in the final stage of the fluctuation production, and the player is confidently determined whether the fluctuation will be a big hit or a miss during the execution or the end of the strongest production. The winning branch effect to be notified is executed. In the winning branch effect, for example, a display prompting the player to operate the effect button 109 or the effect lever 112 is displayed on the screen, and the winning is deterministically notified after the operation of the effect button 109 or the effect lever 112. An example of the winning / falling branching effect is an accessory operating effect in which the movable accessory 66 operates. For example, when the accessory operating effect is executed in a rainbow-colored lighting color, the winning / failing result is a big hit or a big hit with a probability change. Will be definitely notified.

The left side of FIG. 40 shows the flow of a common effect that can be executed regardless of the presence or absence of the prior suggestion effect, and the right side shows a dedicated effect that can be executed only after the start of the prior suggestion effect. In FIG. 40, a star mark (★) is attached to the timing at which the advance suggestion effect can be started. The advance suggestion effect can be started at various timings from the start to the end of the symbol change, can be started with the start of the symbol change as a trigger, and is executed during the change, "SP development suggestion" and "development mission". , "Normal Pseudo-Ren", "Special Pseudo-Ren" and "Battle Reach" can be started as an opportunity. With the end of the pre-suggestion effect, the dedicated effect "full screen development" can be executed, and the "sudden strongest" in which the above-mentioned transition to the strongest effect suddenly occurs after the full screen development is possible. The sudden strongest is also a dedicated effect that can be executed only after the advance suggestion effect is executed, and the strongest effect is executed after the sudden strongest occurs.

There are "Movable character", "Dedicated design" and "Normal reach" as the effects executed in the early stage of the symbol change. "Movable character" is an effect that can be executed in association with the advance suggestion effect, and is an effect that suggests the end of the advance suggestion effect while the advance suggestion effect is continuing. Details will be described later, but for example, the end of the pre-suggestion effect is suggested by the movable accessory arranged at the lower part of the screen moving in small steps. The "dedicated symbol" is also an effect that can be executed along with the pre-suggestion effect, and by inciting whether or not a special symbol different from the normal number symbol stops, the pre-suggestion effect is performed during the continuation of the advance suggestion effect. Suggest the end. Details will be described later, but for example, a display is made to indicate whether or not the dedicated symbol composed of the characters "full screen" suggesting full-screen development is stopped, and if the dedicated symbol is stopped, a prior suggestion effect is displayed. When it ends and full screen development is executed, if the dedicated symbol does not stop, full screen development is not executed and the advance suggestion effect ends. "Normal reach" is a common effect that can be executed regardless of whether or not the advance suggestion effect is executed. The left and right sides of the main drawing consisting of three symbol rows are temporarily stopped with the same symbol, and the center of the main drawing is The high-speed fluctuating reach state suggests the end of the pre-suggestion effect.

There are "SP development suggestion", "SP development (appearing the leading role)", "normal development (weak reach)" and "development mission" as fluctuation effects executed in the middle of the symbol change. "SP development suggestion" is a production that encourages whether or not to develop into the first half (strong reach) of SP reach that can be executed at the end of the symbol change. If the SP development suggestion succeeds in developing to the first half of SP reach, SP development (appearing the leading role) is executed, and then it develops to the first half of SP reach (strong reach). On the other hand, if the SP development suggestion does not develop in the first half of the SP reach, the normal development (weak reach) is executed, and the weak reach is produced with a relatively lower expectation than the first half of the SP reach (strong reach). After the execution of normal development (weak reach), it can be developed to the first half of SP reach (strong reach). In addition, after the SP development suggestion or the normal development (weak reach) is executed, the main drawing may come off and stop fluctuating without developing to the next production. The "development mission" is a production that can be executed after the main drawing is temporarily stopped in a disengaged manner, and develops after pretending to be disengaged. In the development mission, a mission to be cleared is given, and if the mission can be cleared, it will develop to the first half of SP reach (strong reach), and if the mission fails, the main drawing will not develop to the next production. It will come off and stop fluctuating. In addition, in the middle of the symbol fluctuation, it may go through "normal pseudo-ream", and after the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation of a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times), "SP development (leading role appearance)" "normal development (weak reach)" or It is possible to shift to the "development mission". In the normal pseudo-ream, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation does not reach a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) and the main drawing comes off and stops fluctuating, or in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation of a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times), the main drawing May come off and stop fluctuating.

There are the first half of SP reach (strong reach) and the second half of SP reach (strongest production) as the fluctuation effects executed at the end of the symbol change. There are two production patterns throughout the first half and the second half of SP Reach, and there are two systems, "The Strongest Ritual Reach" and "Battle Reach". The first system, "strongest ritual reach," is an effect that displays the process of the ritual for the main character to obtain the strongest title, and a continuous effect is executed from the first half of the SP reach to the second half of the SP reach. In other words, if the "strongest ritual reach first half" is executed at the time of the first half of the SP reach, it is confirmed that it will always develop into the "strongest ritual reach second half" of the second half of the SP reach. Therefore, the first half of the strongest ritual reach can be called the "strongest ritual reach confirmed reach" in the sense that the subsequent strongest production (the second half of the strongest ritual reach) is confirmed, and the first half of the strongest ritual reach is the strongest production of the latter half of the SP reach. Similarly, it can be said that it is a variable production with a very high expectation that it will be a big hit. The second system, "Battle Reach," is a production that displays the process of fighting against an enemy character, and is one of the high-expectation productions with high expectations that it will be a big hit. There are also the first half and the second half of the battle reach, and if it develops in the second half of the battle reach, the main character (leading role) will be in the strongest state, and there is a possibility of winning the enemy character than if it does not develop in the second half ( It is suggested that the degree of expectation of victory) is high. In this embodiment, six types of enemy characters A to F are prepared as opponents of battle reach, and the degree of expectation of victory differs depending on the types of enemy characters A to F that appear. In Battle Reach, the same enemy character will continue to appear in the first half of Battle Reach and the second half of Battle Reach. For example, if the enemy character A appears in the first half of the battle reach, the main character becomes the strongest state in the second half of the battle reach after the production display showing the offensive and defensive process with the enemy character A is made, and the battle with the enemy character A It will be settled. At the end of the latter half of the SP reach (strongest effect), a hit-and-miss branch effect is executed in which the player operates the effect lever 112, suggesting that the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the effect button 109 is operated. For example, if it does not develop in the latter half of the battle reach, the winning branch effect that causes the player to operate the effect button 109 is executed after the end of the first half of the battle reach, and the strongest effect in the latter half of the SP reach is executed. It is suggested that expectations are low.

There are "full screen development", "dedicated pseudo-ream", and "sudden strongest" as dedicated effects that can be executed only after the advance suggestion effect is executed. "Full screen development" is an effect that can be executed when the pre-suggestion effect ends in a specific display mode, and a character that becomes the main character appears after the entire screen is swallowed by the storm. After full-screen development, it will be changed to "normal pseudo-ren", "dedicated pseudo-ren" or "sudden strongest". The "normal pseudo-ream" is a pseudo-continuous fluctuation effect that can be executed both with and without the full-screen development, and after the completion of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation of a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times), the "SP development (leading role)" Appearance) ”,“ Normal Development (Weak Reach) ”or“ Development Mission ”. As described above, in the normal pseudo-ream, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation does not reach the predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) and the main drawing is off and the fluctuation stops, or in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation of the predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times). In some cases, the main drawing may come off and stop fluctuating. "Dedicated pseudo-ream" is a pseudo-continuous fluctuation effect that can be executed only when going through full-screen development, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) of pseudo-continuous fluctuation is performed while the dedicated background developed on the full screen is displayed. It is a special production form that is executed. "Sudden strongest" is a production for shifting to the strongest production, and develops into "strongest ritual reach second half" or "battle reach second half" which is the strongest production after the execution of the sudden strongest.

The type of dedicated effect that can be the suggestion target of the advance suggestion effect may differ depending on the start timing and end timing of the advance suggestion effect. For example, if the pre-suggestion effect is started when the fluctuation starts and the pre-suggestion effect ends at the beginning of the symbol change, it is possible to shift to "normal pseudo-ream", "dedicated pseudo-ream" or "sudden strongest" after full screen development. Is. On the other hand, when the advance suggestion effect starts or ends in the middle of the symbol change, it is possible to shift only to the "sudden strongest" after the full screen development. At the end of the symbol change, the advance suggestion effect is executed only in the "first half of the battle reach", and after the full screen development, it shifts to the "second half of the battle reach" without going through the sudden strongest. In this way, by making the type of the dedicated effect that can be the suggestion target different according to the start and end timing of the pre-suggestion effect, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that will be a big hit depending on the start and end timing of the pre-suggestion effect.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an effect pattern of the prior suggestion effect. In this embodiment, 23 types of effect patterns (also referred to as advance suggestion effect patterns) are prepared as the advance suggestion effects. Each pattern has a different combination of the start trigger, the end trigger, the end effect, and the effect to be suggested. As described above, the type of effect to be suggested may differ depending on the start and end triggers of the prior suggestion effect. Further, the display mode at the end of the prior suggestion effect (that is, the display mode of the end effect) is different depending on the type of the effect to be suggested by the prior suggestion effect.

In the pre-suggestion effect patterns 1 to 9, the pre-suggestion effect is started when the fluctuation starts, and the pre-suggestion effect ends when the character is movable, the special symbol, the normal reach, or the SP development suggestion is triggered. The effect to be suggested is usually pseudo-ren, dedicated pseudo-ren, or suddenly strongest. When shifting to normal pseudo-ream, dedicated pseudo-ream, or sudden strongest, full-screen development is executed as an end effect. In addition, there is a case where a specific effect does not occur after the end of the pre-suggestion effect, and "-" indicates that there is no effect to be suggested. In addition, three types of display colors of purple, red, and gold are set for the prior suggestion effect, and the type of effect to be suggested is suggested according to the display color of the prior suggestion effect. Specifically, in the case of gold, it is determined that the transition to the sudden strongest is made, and in the case of red, it is determined that the transition is made to the normal pseudo-ream or the sudden strongest. On the other hand, in the case of purple, it is suggested that the effect does not occur after the end of the pre-suggestion effect.

FIG. 42 is a diagram schematically showing the first half of the effect process of the prior suggestion effect pattern 1. At the beginning of the pre-suggestion effect, a tornado is displayed and the screen is swallowed by the storm. First, as shown in (a), thunderclouds suggesting the occurrence of a tornado are generated on the left and right sides of the screen triggered by the start of fluctuation of the main drawing, and the advance suggestion effect is started. The display color of the thunderstorm at the start of the pre-suggestion effect is purple, gray, or white, and a display color different from the color suggesting high expectation such as red or gold is used. Next, as shown in (b), tornadoes are generated on the left and right sides of the screen, and an effect display is performed such that the screen frame blows away toward the back of the tornado. In the screen frame displayed small in the center of the screen of (b), the main drawing that is variablely displayed, the variable object that suggests the expected degree of the fluctuation, the reserved object that suggests the expected degree of the lottery value to be held, etc. Is displayed. In the screen frame in the center of the screen of (b), the same content as the variable effect when the tornado related to the prior suggestion effect does not occur is displayed. That is, an image obtained by reducing the normal fluctuation effect when the advance suggestion effect does not start is displayed in a small screen frame displayed in the center of the screen. Next, as shown in (c), a movable character that imitates a dragon (lower dragon character) appears at the bottom of the screen, and the movable character vibrates in small steps. The end of the suggestion production is suggested. After that, as shown in (d), a production display is made in which the lower dragon roars and emits smoke, and the screen shifts to full-screen development.

FIG. 43 is a diagram schematically showing the latter half of the effect process of the prior suggestion effect pattern 1. This figure shows the production process following FIG. 42 (d). First, as shown in (a), a state in which the smoke exhaled by the lower dragon fills the entire screen and is wrapped in smoke is displayed. At this time, the display color of smoke can be changed to red, and the display color of smoke suggests the execution of a high-expectation dedicated effect. In addition, in the pre-suggestion effect pattern 1, since the smoke display color is either maintained in purple or changed to red because it is shifted to the normal pseudo-ream after full screen development, it is suddenly shifted to the strongest. Does not change to the golden color that is confirmed. Next, as shown in (b), a hand with the index finger and the middle finger protruding from the back to the front of the smoke that fills the entire screen is displayed. Then, as shown in (c), the smoke that filled the entire screen cleared up, and the main character (leading role) with the index finger and middle finger sticking out appeared and performed a special move. After that, as shown in (d), a normal pseudo-ream that is a suggestion target of the pre-suggestion effect is started. At this time, a plurality of types of pseudo-ream effects are prepared as normal pseudo-ream, and for example, any one of four types of normal pseudo-ream having different expectations can be executed. Further, the type of the normal pseudo-ream executed in (d) may be different depending on the type of the special move delivered at the timing of (c). For example, three types of special moves are prepared, and when it becomes the first special move (for example, special α), it is easy to execute a normal pseudo-ream with a relatively low expectation, and it is called the second special move (for example, special β). In that case, it becomes easier to execute a normal pseudo-ream with a relatively high expectation. In the case of the third special move (for example, special move γ), it may be configured to shift to the sudden strongest instead of the normal pseudo-ream. Therefore, in the pre-suggestion effect pattern 1 that is usually shifted to the pseudo-ream, the third special move (special γ) cannot be executed.

FIG. 44 is a diagram schematically showing the latter half of the effect process of the prior suggestion effect pattern 2. The first half of the production process of the pre-suggestion effect pattern 2 is the same as the first half of the pre-suggestion effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 42. In the pre-suggestion effect pattern 2, the full screen is developed as shown in (a), the hand with the index finger and the middle finger sticking out is displayed as shown in (b), and then the third special move is displayed as shown in (c). A main character that delivers (Special γ) appears, and as shown in (d), the sudden strongest occurs. In the pre-suggestion effect pattern 2, since the sudden strongest occurs, in the full screen development of (a), the display color of smoke remains purple, changes to red, and changes to gold. There is. In the pre-suggestion effect pattern 2, for example, the probability that the display color of the smoke of full screen development is maintained in purple is set lower than that of the pre-suggestion effect pattern 1.

FIG. 45 is a diagram schematically showing the effect process of the prior suggestion effect pattern 3. The pre-suggestion effect pattern 3 is common to the effect process of the first half of the pre-suggestion effect patterns 1 and 2, but the advance suggestion is performed without the effect of the dragon spitting smoke after the "moving character (lower dragon fanning)". The production ends. 45 (a) to 45 (c) are the same as FIGS. 42 (a) to 42 (c). As shown in (a), a thundercloud is generated when the fluctuation starts, tornadoes are generated on the left and right sides of the screen as shown in (b), and the lower dragon character moves in small steps as shown in (c). After that, the pre-suggestion effect ends without the effect of the lower dragon spitting smoke, and the display mode returns to the same as before the start of the pre-suggestion effect as shown in (d). Specifically, the tornadoes displayed on the left and right sides of (c) disappear, and the screen frame that is swallowed by the tornado and displayed small in the center of the screen returns to the front. For example, the end effect of "Disappearance 1" is such that the tornado display disappears so that the tornado loses momentum and disappears naturally, and the pre-suggestion effect ends as if nothing had happened. In (d) after the end of the pre-suggestion effect, no effect such as a notice effect that raises the degree of expectation is performed, for example, the main drawing is off and the fluctuation stops. It should be noted that the fluctuation stop may be confirmed at the timing of (d) and the next symbol fluctuation may be started, or the development mission may be started after pretending to be out of alignment. In the pre-suggestion effect pattern 3, since there is no effect to be suggested, the display color of the tornado remains purple, which suggests a low degree of expectation, and the tornado disappears while the purple display color is maintained, and the tornado is pre-suggested. The production ends.

FIG. 46 is a diagram schematically showing a part of the effect process of the prior suggestion effect pattern 4. The display mode at the start of the prior suggestion effect pattern 4 is the same as that of the prior suggestion effect patterns 1 to 3, and is the same as FIGS. 42 (a) to (b) and FIGS. 45 (a) to 45 (b). Is. In FIG. 46, tornadoes occur on the left and right sides of the screen as shown in (a), and after an effect display is made such that the screen frame blows away toward the back of the tornado, "full screen" as shown in (b). An effect display is made to incite whether or not the special design of the wording of is stopped. Subsequently, when the "full screen" dedicated symbol is stopped and displayed in the center of the screen as shown in (c), full screen development is executed as shown in (d). The production process after the development of the full screen is the same as in FIGS. 43 (a) to 43 (d), and the main character sticking out the index finger and the middle finger from the back of the smoke appears and the normal pseudo-ren starts. Therefore, the prior suggestion effect pattern 4 is different from the above-mentioned prior suggestion effect pattern 1 in that the end trigger of the advance suggestion effect is not the movable character (lower dragon fan) but the dedicated pattern (stop fan), and other than that. Is common to the production process of the prior suggestion production pattern 1.

FIG. 47 is a diagram schematically showing a part of the effect process of the prior suggestion effect pattern 5. The first half of the production process of the pre-suggestion effect pattern 5 is the same as that of the pre-suggestion effect pattern 4, and an effect display is made to encourage whether or not the dedicated symbol of the wording "full screen" is stopped after the start of the advance suggestion effect. After that, as shown in (a), the "full screen" dedicated symbol is stopped and displayed in the center of the screen. Then, when full-screen development is executed as shown in (b), instead of the main character appearing, it is swallowed by the center of the tornado as shown in (c) and the tornado is seen from directly above. It changes to a spiral full-screen display. After that, as shown in (d), the main drawing is disengaged and temporarily stopped and displayed in front of the spiral background image, and the main drawing changes again while the spiral background image is continued, and the dedicated pseudo-ream is displayed. Rush into. The dedicated pseudo-ream is different from the normal pseudo-ream in that the pseudo-continuous variation effect is executed using the spiral-shaped dedicated background shown in (d). As a modification, instead of executing the dedicated pseudo-ream, the player may enter a "special zone" in which a spiral-shaped dedicated background is displayed over a plurality of symbol fluctuation periods. In this case, the advance suggestion effect pattern 5 is configured to be selectable by pre-reading when the lottery value corresponding to the variation pattern that can stay in the special zone is reserved. For example, the advance suggestion effect pattern 5 is selected and transferred to the special zone due to the symbol change before the hold that enables staying in the special zone is digested, and then the hold that triggered the transition to the special zone is digested. The symbol change starts while staying in the special zone.

FIG. 48 is a diagram schematically showing the effect process of the prior suggestion effect pattern 6. In the pre-suggestion effect pattern 6, an effect display is made in which the “full screen” dedicated symbol slides down without stopping. FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b) are the same as those in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b), respectively, and an effect display is made to incite whether or not the dedicated symbol of the "full screen" is stopped. Subsequently, as shown in (c) of FIG. 48, an effect display is made in which the dedicated symbol slides down without stopping at the center of the screen, and then, as shown in (d), the screen returns to the screen before the start of the pre-suggestion effect. At this time, as in the case of the prior suggestion effect pattern 3, the tornado displayed on the left and right of (c) disappears, the screen frame that is swallowed by the tornado and displayed small in the center of the screen returns to the front, and the tornado disappears naturally. The prior suggestion effect ends in the display mode of "disappearance 1".

FIG. 49 is a diagram schematically showing a part of the effect process of the prior suggestion effect pattern 7. The display mode at the start of the prior suggestion effect pattern 7 is the same as that of the prior suggestion effect patterns 1 to 6, and is the same as FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b). In FIG. 49, “normal reach” occurs in which the main drawing is in the reach mode within the screen frame displayed small in the center of the screen as shown in (a), and full-screen development is executed triggered by the occurrence of normal reach. .. Next, as shown in (b), a hand with the index finger and middle finger protruding from the back of the smoke toward the front is displayed, and as shown in (c), the main character appears and performs a special move. For example, it is suggested that when the main character performs the second special move (special β), the character shifts to a normal pseudo-ream with a relatively high expectation. After that, as shown in (d), a normal pseudo-ream is started. Therefore, the prior suggestion effect pattern 7 is different from the above-mentioned prior suggestion effect patterns 1 and 4 in that the end trigger of the advance suggestion effect is not the movable character (lower dragon fan) or the dedicated symbol (stop fan) but the normal reach. However, other than that, it is common to the production process of the prior suggestion production patterns 1 and 4. In the pre-suggestion effect patterns 1, 4 and 7 in which the normal pseudo-ream is executed, both the pseudo-ream A in FIG. 43 (d) and the pseudo-ream B in FIG. 49 (b) can be executed, and the other pseudo-ream C can be executed. Or pseudo-ream D may be executable. In the pre-suggested effect patterns 1, 4 and 7, for example, an effect lottery for which of a plurality of types of normal pseudo-reams (for example, pseudo-reams A to D) is executed is executed, and a plurality of types of normal pseudo-series are executed based on the lottery result. One of the reams is executed. The selection tendency of the plurality of types of normal pseudo-reams A to D may be common regardless of the prior suggestion effect pattern, or may be different depending on the prior suggestion effect pattern. For example, the pre-suggestion effect pattern 1 may be configured such that the pseudo-ream A is easily selected, the pre-suggestion effect pattern 4 is likely to select the pseudo-ream B, and the pre-suggestion effect pattern 7 is likely to be configured to easily select the pseudo-ream C. ..

In the pre-suggestion effect pattern 8, after full-screen development is executed triggered by the occurrence of normal reach, the main character performs a third special move (special γ), and the sudden strongest occurs. Therefore, the pre-suggestion effect pattern 8 is common to the pre-suggestion effect pattern 7 in that the pre-suggestion effect ends with the normal reach, and is common to the pre-suggestion effect pattern 2 in that the sudden strongest occurs after the full screen is developed. In the pre-suggestion effect pattern 8, as in the pre-suggestion effect pattern 2, the smoke display color can be purple, red, or gold when full-screen development is executed.

FIG. 50 is a diagram schematically showing a part of the effect process of the prior suggestion effect pattern 9. In the pre-suggestion effect pattern 9, as shown in (a), the pre-suggestion effect in which tornadoes are displayed on the left and right sides of the screen continues until "normal reach" in which the main drawing is the reach mode. Therefore, the pre-suggestion effect pattern 9 has the same effect process as the pre-suggestion effect patterns 7 and 8 until the “normal reach” occurs. However, in the advance suggestion effect pattern 9, the advance suggestion effect does not end triggered by the "normal reach", and the advance suggestion effect continues until the "SP development suggestion" is executed after the normal reach. (B) shows a state in which the pre-suggestion effect is continued at the start of the "SP development suggestion", and fuels whether the SP development or the normal development occurs in the screen frame displayed small in the center of the screen. "Development suggestion" is started. After that, with the start of SP development suggestion, full-screen development is executed as shown in (c), and the hand with the index finger and middle finger sticking out from the back of the smoke to the front is displayed, and the main character appears. The third special move (special γ) is delivered. After that, as shown in (d), the sudden strongest occurs. By changing the display color of smoke to gold when the full screen of (c) is developed, the occurrence of the strongest sudden occurrence may be confirmed and notified.

In this way, in the advance suggestion effect patterns 1 to 9 in which the advance suggestion effect is started when the fluctuation starts, the end trigger of the advance suggestion effect may be different, and the effect that can be a suggestion target depending on the difference in the end opportunity. The types can also be different. Further, the effects that trigger the end of the prior suggestion effect are executed at different timings, and the elapsed time from the start of fluctuation (or the start of the prior suggestion effect) to the timing that triggers the end of the prior suggestion effect may differ. For example, "movable character (lower dragon fan)" and "dedicated symbol (stop fan)" are early timings after a relatively short time (for example, less than 2 seconds, less than 3 seconds, less than 5 seconds) from the start of fluctuation. Can be executed in. In a pattern in which the elapsed time until reaching the end trigger of these prior suggestion effects is short, the dedicated effect may not be executed after the end of the prior suggestion effect, and the high expectation effect may be executed after the end of the advance suggestion effect. Is low, which may suggest that the expectation of a big hit is low. Furthermore, if the duration of the advance suggestion effect is short, the special effect may not be executed after the end of the advance suggestion effect, and when the character movement (lower dragon fanning) or the dedicated symbol (stop fanning) occurs. It can be suggested that the expectation of a big hit is low. On the other hand, the normal reach and the SP development suggestion can be executed at a late timing after a relatively long time (for example, 2 seconds or more, 5 seconds or more, 10 seconds or more) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. In a pattern in which the elapsed time until reaching the end trigger of these prior suggestion effects is long, the pattern is always shifted to "normal pseudo-ren" or "sudden strongest" after the end of the prior suggestion effects, so the expectation of a big hit is high. Is suggested. In other words, since the dedicated effect is always executed when the duration of the advance suggestion effect is long, it can be suggested that there is a high expectation that a big hit will occur when the normal reach occurs while the advance suggestion effect continues. In this way, by providing a difference in the types of effects to be suggested according to the end timing of the advance suggestion effect, it is possible to achieve a high expectation when the advance suggestion effect is continued without ending early. Can be suggested in advance to the person.

FIG. 51 is a diagram schematically showing the effect process of the prior suggestion effect patterns 10 and 11. In the pre-suggestion effect patterns 10 and 11, the pre-suggestion effect starts in the middle of the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect, and the pre-suggestion effect ends when all three symbol rows of the main drawing are temporarily stopped. Pseudo-continuous fluctuation effect is to re-variate the main design after the temporary stop display that makes it appear as if all three symbol rows of the main design have been stopped, and it is as if multiple symbols within one symbol fluctuation period. It is a fluctuation effect that makes it look as if it has been changed. First, as shown in (a), a shake effect is executed in which the screen frame is rotated and shaken in small steps, triggered by the start of re-variation of the main drawing related to the pseudo continuous fluctuation, and it is suggested that the screen frame is blown to the back. To do. The pre-suggestion effect is started by this shake effect. Next, as shown in (b), tornadoes are generated on the left and right sides of the screen, and an effect display is performed such that the screen frame blows away toward the back of the tornado. (B) is an effect process similar to the above-mentioned prior suggestion effect patterns 1 to 9. In the small screen frame displayed in the center of the screen of (b), the main drawing related to the pseudo-continuous variation effect is displayed in a variable manner, and whether the special symbol of the word "continuation" suggesting the continuation of the pseudo-ream stops. An indication is made to incite whether or not. Subsequently, as shown in (c), when the special symbol of "continuation" temporarily stops and the continuation of the pseudo-ream is suggested, the tornado moves violently on the screen and disappears with the temporary stop of the pseudo-ream as a trigger. The prior suggestion effect ends in the display mode of "disappearance 2". After that, as shown in (d), the display mode returns to the same as before the start of the advance suggestion effect, and the advance notice effect (notice A) of "chance up!", Which suggests that the chance of becoming a big hit increases, is executed. Will be done. Therefore, in the advance suggestion effect patterns 10 and 11, the execution of the advance notice effect A for increasing the chance is suggested in advance by the start of the advance suggestion effect. The advance notice production A may be a voice production in which the voice of "chance up" is output instead of the production display on the screen, or may be a character operation production in which a movable character such as a lower dragon is activated. Good.

Each of the pre-suggestion effect patterns 10 and 11 has a different timing for starting the pre-suggestion effect. In the pre-suggestion effect pattern 10, in the three pseudo-continuous fluctuations, the pre-suggestion effect is started when the first pseudo-continuous variation ends and the second pseudo-continuous variation is started, and the second pseudo-continuous variation is started. The advance suggestion effect ends with the end of continuous fluctuation (temporary stop). On the other hand, in the pre-suggestion effect pattern 11, the pre-suggestion effect is started when the second pseudo-continuous variation is completed and the third pseudo-continuous variation is started, and the third pseudo-continuous variation is completed (provisional). (Stop) will be the trigger for the advance suggestion production to end. In a series of pseudo-continuous variation effects, only one of the prior suggestion effect patterns 10 and 11 may be executed, or both may be executed. In the latter case, the advance suggestion effect is executed in both the second and third pseudo continuous fluctuation effects, and the advance notice effect A for increasing the chance is executed. In addition, in the advance suggestion effect patterns 10 and 11, since the dedicated effect is not executed after the end of the advance suggestion effect, the display color of the tornado at least one of the continuation and the end of the advance suggestion effect is purple, such as red or gold. It does not change to the display color that suggests that the degree of expectation is high.

FIG. 52 is a diagram schematically showing the effect process of the prior suggestion effect pattern 12. In the advance suggestion effect pattern 12, the advance suggestion effect starts when the development mission is started after pretending that the main drawing has come off, and X seconds after the start of the development mission (for example, less than 1 second or 2). The advance suggestion effect ends in less than a second), and the advance notice effect (notice B) in which the display color of the title of the development mission changes to a color suggesting a high degree of expectation is executed. First, as shown in (a), a shake effect is executed in which the screen frame is rotated and shaken in small steps, triggered by the title display indicating the start of the development mission, and the screen frame is in the back of the tornado as shown in (b). A production display that blows away toward is made. Subsequently, as shown in (c), the prior suggestion effect ends in the display mode of "disappearance 3" in which the tornado moves violently in the screen and disappears toward the center of the screen. After that, as shown in (d), the display mode returns to the same as before the start of the pre-suggestion effect, and the characters and frames of the title display indicating the start of the development mission change to high-expected colors such as red and gold. The notice production (notice B) is executed. Therefore, in the advance suggestion effect pattern 12, it is suggested in advance that the advance notice effect B in which the display color of the title is changed by the start of the advance suggestion effect is executed. Further, in the display mode of "disappearance 3" shown in (c), when the tornado disappears toward the title display in the center of the screen, the display color of the title changes. Is suggested in advance by the display mode (disappearance 3) of. In the pre-suggestion effect pattern 12, since the dedicated effect is not executed after the end of the pre-suggestion effect, the display color of the tornado is purple at least during the continuation and end of the pre-suggestion effect, and expectations such as red and gold are expected. The display color does not change, which suggests that the degree is high.

The pre-suggestion effect pattern 13 starts the pre-suggestion effect as in the pre-suggestion effect pattern 12, but the end timing of the pre-suggestion effect and the advance notice effect to be suggested are different. In the pre-suggestion effect pattern 13, the pre-suggestion effect ends Y seconds after the start of the development mission (for example, 2 seconds, 3 seconds, 5 seconds later), and the variable object or hold is triggered by the end of the pre-suggestion effect. A pending change effect (notice C) in which the display mode (shape, pattern, color, etc.) of the object changes is executed. For example, by changing the shape of the variable object or the hold object and changing it to an image containing an image or character that imitates an item or character that appears in a specific effect, the change to which the change or hold is digested. It is suggested that a specific effect is performed in. In addition, by changing the pattern of the variable object or the reserved object to a giraffe pattern, or changing the display color to red or gold, it is expected that the variable or the pending will be a big hit. Degree is suggested. In the pre-suggestion effect pattern 13, since the advance notice effect C different from the pre-suggestion effect pattern 12 is executed, the display mode at the end of the pre-suggestion effect is different from the pre-suggestion effect pattern 12, and the “disappearance” suggesting a pending change. The prior suggestion effect ends in the display mode of "4". In the display mode of "disappearance 4", for example, the tornado moves violently in the screen and disappears toward the display area of the variable object or the reserved object at the lower part of the screen. As a result, the execution of the advance notice effect C in which the variable object or the reserved object changes is suggested in advance depending on the display mode (disappearance 4) at the end of the advance suggestion effect. Therefore, when any of the pre-suggestion effect patterns 12 and 13 is executed, the display mode (disappearance 3 or extinction 4) at the end of the pre-suggestion effect differs depending on the pattern, and is suggested by the difference in the display mode at the end. It is possible to suggest in advance whether the target advance notice effect is the notice B or the notice C. In particular, by executing the pre-suggestion effect so that the tornado moves toward the place where the effect to be suggested is executed, it is possible to suggest to the player which effect is to be suggested in an easy-to-understand manner. Even in the pre-suggestion effect pattern 13, since the dedicated effect is not executed after the end of the pre-suggestion effect, the display color of the tornado at least one of the continuation and the end of the pre-suggestion effect is purple, such as red or gold. The display color does not change, which suggests that the degree of expectation is high.

In the pre-suggestion effect pattern 14, the pre-suggestion effect is started in the same manner as the pre-suggestion effect patterns 12 and 13, but the end timing of the pre-suggestion effect is different, and the suggestion target is suddenly the strongest after full-screen development. Is different. In the advance suggestion effect pattern 14, the advance suggestion effect ends Z seconds after the start of the development mission (10 seconds or more, 20 seconds or more, etc.), and the above-mentioned title change effect (notice B) and hold change effect (notice C). The pre-suggestion effect ends after the timing when is executed. The end timing of the advance suggestion effect may be the latter half of the development mission or after the end of the development mission, or after the mission fails and the main drawing is removed and temporarily stopped. In this case, full-screen development may be executed after the mission fails, so that it may be a production process in which the strongest suddenly occurs after pretending to be out of order. The production process after full-screen development is the same as that of the prior suggestion production pattern 9, for example, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), full-screen development is executed and the index finger is moved from the back to the front of the smoke. After the hand with the middle finger sticking out is displayed, the main character appears and the third special move (special γ) is delivered, and then the sudden strongest occurs as shown in FIG. 50 (d). Further, when the full screen of FIG. 50 (c) is developed, the display color of smoke changes to gold, so that the occurrence of the strongest sudden occurrence can be confirmed and notified.

FIG. 53 is a diagram schematically showing the effect process of the prior suggestion effect pattern 15. In the pre-suggestion effect pattern 15, the pre-suggestion effect starts when the SP development suggestion starts, and the pre-suggestion effect ends when the SP development suggestion does not develop into the SP reach but becomes a normal development (weak reach). To do. First, as shown in (a), at the timing when the SP development suggestion that incites whether the SP reach develops or becomes the normal development is started, the shake effect of rotating and shaking the screen frame in small steps is executed. .. Next, as shown in (b), tornadoes are generated on the left and right sides of the screen, and an effect display is performed such that the screen frame blows away toward the back of the tornado. After that, as shown in (c), it is suggested that it usually develops within the screen frame displayed small in the center of the screen. Subsequently, as shown in (d), the tornado disappears with the start of the weak reach, which is usually the development destination, and the display mode returns to the same as before the start of the prior suggestion effect. In the pre-suggestion effect pattern 15, the end effect of "disappearance 1" is such that the tornado display is erased so that the tornado loses momentum and disappears naturally, and the pre-suggestion effect ends as if nothing had happened. In the pre-suggestion effect pattern 15, since there is no effect to be suggested, the display color of the tornado remains purple, which suggests a low degree of expectation, and the tornado disappears while the purple display color is maintained, and the tornado is pre-suggested. The production ends.

In the pre-suggestion effect patterns 16 to 18, as in the pre-suggestion effect pattern 15, the pre-suggestion effect starts with the start of the SP development suggestion, and the SP development suggestion does not develop into the SP reach but develops normally (weak reach). Become. However, the advance suggestion effect does not end at the start of the weak reach, but the advance suggestion effect ends after a predetermined time has elapsed (X seconds, Y seconds, Z seconds) after the start of the weak reach, and the advance notice effect is produced. B, notice production C or sudden strongest after full screen development occurs. The end timing and end effect of the pre-suggestion effect patterns 16 to 18 and the effect process after the end are the same as those of the advance suggestion effect patterns 12 to 14 related to the development mission, respectively. In the pre-suggestion effect pattern 16, as in the pre-suggestion effect pattern 12, the pre-suggestion effect ends X seconds after the start of the weak reach (for example, less than 1 second or less than 2 seconds), and the title display is high such as red or gold. A notice effect (notice B) that changes to the expected degree color is executed. In the pre-suggestion effect pattern 17, as in the pre-suggestion effect pattern 13, the pre-suggestion effect ends Y seconds after the start of the weak reach (for example, 2 seconds, 3 seconds, and 5 seconds later), and the pre-suggestion effect ends. The hold change effect (notice C) in which the display mode (shape, pattern, color, etc.) of the variable object or the hold object changes is executed. In the pre-suggestion effect pattern 18, as in the pre-suggestion effect pattern 14, the pre-suggestion effect ends Z seconds after the start of the weak reach (10 seconds or more, 20 seconds or more, etc.), and the sudden strongest occurs after the full screen development. .. In the pre-suggestion effect pattern 18, the pre-suggestion effect may end in the latter half of the weak reach or after the end of the weak reach. It may be a production process in which the sudden strongest occurs.

FIG. 54 is a diagram schematically showing the effect process of the prior suggestion effect pattern 19. In the pre-suggestion effect pattern 19, the pre-suggestion effect starts when the SP development suggestion starts, and the pre-suggestion effect ends when the SP development suggestion develops into SP reach and the main character appears. First, as shown in (a), at the timing when the SP development suggestion that incites whether it develops to SP reach or normal development is started, a shake effect is executed in which the screen frame is rotated and shaken in small steps, and then the shake effect is executed. As shown in (b), it is suggested that SP develops within the screen frame displayed small in the center of the screen with tornadoes occurring on the left and right sides of the screen. Subsequently, as shown in (c), the tornado disappears at the timing when the main character (main character) appears, and the display mode returns to the same as before the start of the prior suggestion effect. At this time, the prior suggestion effect ends in the display mode of "disappearance 2" in which the tornado moves violently on the screen and disappears with the appearance of the leading role. After that, as shown in (d), the battle reach starts, and the notice production (notice A) of "chance up!", Which suggests that the chance of becoming a big hit is high, is executed. The end effect and the advance notice effect A of the advance suggestion effect in the advance suggestion effect pattern 19 are the same as those of the advance suggestion effect patterns 10 and 11.

FIG. 55 is a diagram schematically showing the effect process of the prior suggestion effect pattern 20. The pre-suggestion effect pattern 20 is different from the pre-suggestion effect pattern 19 in that the pre-suggestion effect starts when the SP development suggestion starts, and the pre-suggestion effect continues even after the SP reach develops and the main character appears. .. First, the advance suggestion effect is started with the start of the SP development suggestion, and as shown in (a), the SP develops within the screen frame displayed small in the center of the screen with tornadoes occurring on the left and right sides of the screen. Is suggested. Next, as shown in (b), the main character (leading role) appears, but the tornadoes on the left and right of the screen do not disappear, and the leading role appears with the advance suggestion effect continuing. In other words, the protagonist appears in the screen frame that is displayed small in the center of the screen. After that, full-screen development is executed as shown in (c), and after the main character that sticks out the index finger and middle finger from the back of the smoke appears and performs the third special move (special γ), as shown in (d). Suddenly the strongest occurs. By changing the display color of smoke to gold when the full screen of (c) is developed, the occurrence of the strongest sudden occurrence may be confirmed and notified. In the pre-suggestion effect pattern 20, the effect process up to FIG. 54 (b) or FIG. 55 (a), which suggests SP development, is common to the pre-suggestion effect pattern 19, while FIG. 54 (c) or FIG. 55 (b). It differs from the pre-suggestion effect pattern 19 in that tornadoes remain on the left and right sides of the screen at the timing of the appearance of the main character in As a result, if the pre-suggestion effect continues and the tornado remains at the time of the appearance of the main character after the SP development, it is confirmed that the pre-suggestion effect pattern 20 is used. It can be suggested in advance that it will be. Further, when any of the prior suggestion effect patterns 19 and 20 is executed, the presence or absence of continuation of the prior suggestion effect at the time of appearance of the main character is a turning point of the effect, and therefore, FIG. 54 (c) or FIG. 55. At the time of the appearance of the main character in (b), it is possible to fuel the expectation that the tornado will continue.

The advance suggestion effect patterns 21 to 23 are different from the advance suggestion effect patterns 12 to 14 in that the advance suggestion effect is started when the battle reach starts, but are the same as the advance suggestion effect patterns 12 to 14 in other respects. It is composed of. In the advance suggestion effect patterns 21 to 23, the advance suggestion effect ends after a predetermined time has elapsed (X seconds, Y seconds, Z seconds) from the start of the battle reach, and the advance suggestion effect B, the advance notice effect C, or the full screen development. The strongest production later will occur. That is, the end timing, the end effect, and the effect process after the end of the advance suggestion effect patterns 21 to 23 are the same as those of the advance suggestion effect patterns 12 to 14 related to the development mission, respectively. In the pre-suggestion effect pattern 21, as in the pre-suggestion effect pattern 12, the pre-suggestion effect ends X seconds after the start of the battle reach (for example, less than 1 second or less than 2 seconds), and the title display is high such as red or gold. A notice effect (notice B) that changes to the expected degree color is executed. In the pre-suggestion effect pattern 22, as in the pre-suggestion effect pattern 13, the pre-suggestion effect ends Y seconds after the start of the battle reach (for example, 2 seconds, 3 seconds, and 5 seconds later), and the pre-suggestion effect ends. The hold change effect (notice C) in which the display mode (shape, pattern, color, etc.) of the variable object or the hold object changes is executed. In the pre-suggestion effect pattern 23, as in the pre-suggestion effect pattern 14, the pre-suggestion effect ends Z seconds after the start of the weak reach (10 seconds or more, 20 seconds or more, etc.), and full-screen development is executed. In the case of the advance suggestion effect pattern 23, the strongest effect (second half of the battle reach) is executed after the full screen is developed, instead of the sudden strongest being generated after the full screen is developed. In the pre-suggestion effect pattern 23, since the pre-suggestion effect ends in the middle of the first half of the battle reach, the strongest effect is not suddenly generated, but rather the production process that becomes the strongest effect in the latter half of the battle reach without the advance suggestion effect. does not change. Therefore, the prior suggestion effect pattern 23 is different from other prior suggestion effect patterns in that the strongest effect is executed without executing the sudden strongest effect. Further, in the advance suggestion effect pattern 23, the type of the enemy character appearing in the first half of the battle reach before the full screen development and the type of the enemy character appearing in the second half of the battle reach after the full screen development are configured to be the same. It is configured so that it will not be transferred to the latter half of the strongest ritual reach after the screen develops. On the other hand, in the advance suggestion effect patterns 2, 8, 9, 14, 18, and 20, which are the "strongest sudden", the "strongest ritual reach second half" and the "battle reach second half" are executed after the sudden strongest occurrence. In some cases, any of the enemy characters A to F will be able to appear in the latter half of the battle reach.

In this way, even in the pre-suggestion effect patterns 10 to 23 in which the pre-suggestion effect is started in the middle of the symbol change, the end trigger of the pre-suggestion effect may be different, and the effect that can be a suggestion target depending on the difference in the end trigger. Types can also be different. Further, the effects that trigger the end of the prior suggestion effect are executed at different timings, and the elapsed time from the start (or fluctuation start) of the prior suggestion effect to the timing that triggers the end of the prior suggestion effect may differ. For example, in the pattern in which the advance notice effects A, B, and C are the suggestion targets, the advance suggestion effects can be executed at an early timing after a relatively short time has elapsed from the start of the advance suggestion effects. In a pattern in which the elapsed time until reaching the end trigger of these prior suggestion effects is short, it can be suggested that the expectation of a big hit is low because the dedicated effect is not executed after the end of the prior suggestion effects. In other words, if the duration of the prior suggestion effect is short, the dedicated effect may not be executed after the end of the advance suggestion effect, which may suggest that the expectation of a big hit at the end of the advance suggestion effect is low. .. On the other hand, in the pattern in which the sudden strongest or the strongest effect is the suggestion target, it can be executed at a late timing after a relatively long time (for example, 10 seconds or more) has elapsed from the start of the pre-suggestion effect. In a pattern in which it takes a long time to reach the end of these pre-suggestion effects, the pattern always shifts to "sudden strongest" or "strongest effect" after the end of the pre-suggestion effects, so there is a high expectation that it will be a big hit. It is suggested. In other words, if the duration of the advance suggestion effect is long, the dedicated effect is always executed, so if the development mission, weak reach, or battle reach progresses while the advance suggestion effect continues, it will be a big hit at that point. It can be suggested that the degree of expectation is high. In this way, by providing a difference in the types of effects to be suggested according to the end timing of the advance suggestion effect, it is possible to achieve a high expectation when the advance suggestion effect is continued without ending early. Can be suggested in advance to the person.

The above-mentioned advance notice effects A to C are configured so that the degree of expectation of chance up differs depending on whether the advance suggestion effect is executed when the end of the advance suggestion effect is triggered or not triggered by the end of the advance suggestion effect. May be done. For example, when the advance notice effects A to C are executed with the end of the advance suggestion effect, the probability of the advance notice effect suggesting a high degree of expectation may be relatively high. On the other hand, when the advance notice effects A to C are executed without triggering the end of the advance suggestion effect, the probability of the advance notice effect suggesting a high degree of expectation may be relatively low. ..

In addition, the probability that full-screen development is executed with the end of the prior suggestion effect and the sudden strongest or strongest effect is executed increases as at least one of the start timing and the end timing of the prior suggestion effect approaches the end of the symbol variation. It may be set. For example, the probability that the pre-suggestion effect patterns 2, 8 and 9 that suddenly become the strongest after the pre-suggestion effect is started with the start of fluctuation may be set to be relatively low. On the other hand, the probability that the pre-suggestion effect pattern 23, which is the strongest effect, is selected after the pre-suggestion effect is started with the start of the battle reach may be set relatively high.

The above-mentioned prior suggestion effect patterns 1 to 23 can be executed, for example, during a normal game in a normal probability state (low probability state) and a normal ball entry state (low ball entry state), and one symbol during the normal game. The pre-suggestion effect starts and ends within the variable period, and the effect to be suggested is executed. The above-mentioned prior suggestion effect pattern may be executed only once within one symbol variation period, or may be executed a plurality of times within one symbol variation period. For example, after the pre-suggestion effect patterns 3 and 6 having no effect to be suggested are executed in the early stage of the variable effect, any of the prior suggestive effect patterns 12 to 23 may be executed in the middle or later of the variable effect. Further, at least one of the prior suggestion effect patterns 10 and 11 may be executed after the advance suggestion effect patterns 1, 4 and 7 are executed and the transition to the normal pseudo-ream is performed. Similarly, at least one of the prior suggestion effect patterns 10 and 11 may be executed after the pre-suggestion effect pattern 5 is executed and transferred to the dedicated pseudo-ream. Further, after the end of the normal pseudo-ream or the dedicated pseudo-ream, any of the prior suggestion effect patterns 12 to 23 may be executed after the middle stage of the variable effect. In addition, after the advance suggestion effect patterns 12, 13, 15 to 17, 19 are executed in the middle of the variable effect without the transition to the sudden strongest, any of the advance suggestion effect patterns 21 to 23 is at the end of the variable effect. It may be executed. That is, after the first pre-suggestion effect starts and ends within one symbol variation period, the second pre-suggestion effect may start and end within the same symbol variation period.

The pre-suggestion effect may be executed during a normal game in a probability fluctuation state (high probability state) or a ball entry easy state (high ball entry state). Further, the start and end of the pre-suggestion effect and the execution of the specific effect to be suggested may be executed over a plurality of symbol variation periods during the normal game. For example, when the time for one symbol fluctuation is extremely short because it is easy to enter the ball, the pre-suggestion effect ends with a symbol variation different from the symbol variation at which the pre-suggestion effect is started. The production of may be executed. In other words, the pre-suggestion effect may be continued over a plurality of symbol fluctuations, or the pre-suggestion effect may be continuously displayed when the symbol variation is stopped.

FIG. 56 is a diagram schematically showing the first half of the production process of the pre-suggestion effect over a plurality of fluctuations. First, as shown in (a), the symbol fluctuation is started, and when the symbol fluctuation is started, a tornado is generated on the left and right sides of the screen as shown in (b), and the screen frame is blown toward the back of the tornado. A directing display is made. At this time, the main drawing is displayed superimposed on the position in front of the screen frame, not in the screen frame displayed small in the center of the screen. Next, as shown in (c), the main design stops fluctuating while the tornado display on the left and right of the screen continues, and the next symbol fluctuates as shown in (d) while the tornado display on the left and right of the screen continues. It will be started. At this time, by superimposing the main drawing on the position in front of the screen frame and displaying it, it is possible for the player to easily show that the main drawing has stopped fluctuating in (c).

FIG. 57 is a diagram schematically showing the latter half of the production process of the pre-suggestion effect over a plurality of fluctuations. This figure shows the continuation of the effect process of FIG. 56, and shows the effect process in which the pre-suggestion effect ends with the start of the symbol variation and the high-expectation effect to be suggested is executed. First, as shown in (a), the symbol fluctuation of the main design starts while the tornado display on the left and right of the screen continues, and then, as shown in (b), the tornado disappears and the entire screen becomes smoke. Wrapped full screen development is performed. After that, as shown in (c), an image imitating the effect button 109 is displayed in the center of the screen in order to encourage the player to perform an input operation. When the input operation to the effect button 109 is performed or the operation period in which the input operation of the effect button 109 is valid ends, a specific effect to be suggested is executed as shown in (d). In the example of this figure, a winning branch effect is executed to deterministically notify that the main character appears and becomes a big hit. As another example, the development to battle reach may be suggested by making an enemy character appear at the timing of (d). Further, in order to encourage the operation of the effect lever 112 at the timing of (c), an image imitating the effect lever 112 may be displayed in the center of the screen, and the winning branch effect may be executed after the operation of the effect lever 112. The expectation of a big hit after the effect lever 112 is displayed at the timing of (c) may be higher than the expectation of a big hit after the effect button 109 is displayed at the timing of (c). Also in the example of this figure, by changing the display color of smoke to red or gold when the full screen of (b) is developed, it may be suggested that the expectation of becoming a big hit in the winning branch effect is high.

FIG. 58 is a diagram schematically showing an effect process in which a specific effect does not occur after the end of the prior suggestion effect. In this figure, the prior suggestion effect does not continue over a plurality of symbol fluctuations, and the prior suggestion effect ends when the fluctuation of the main drawing stops. First, as shown in (a), the symbol fluctuation is started, and when the symbol fluctuation is started, a tornado is generated on the left and right sides of the screen as shown in (b), and the screen frame is blown toward the back of the tornado. A directing display is made. At this time, the main drawing is displayed superimposed on the position in front of the screen frame, not in the screen frame displayed small in the center of the screen. Subsequently, as shown in (c), at the timing when the main drawing stops changing, the tornadoes on the left and right of the screen disappear, and the display mode before the start of the prior suggestion effect is restored and the main drawing stops changing. In this way, the pre-suggestion effect ends as if nothing had happened without the pre-suggestion effect continuing.

The effect process shown in FIGS. 56 to 58 may be executed with the pre-reading of the reserved lottery value as an opportunity. For example, when the specific hold corresponding to the lottery value that enables the winning branch effect is pre-read, the advance suggestion effect is started with the symbol change before the symbol change in which the specific hold is digested, and the specific hold is specified. The advance suggestion effect may be continued until the symbol change in which the hold is exhausted. After that, the prior suggestion effect may be terminated by the symbol variation in which the specific hold is digested, and then the winning branch effect may be executed.

The start timing and end timing of the advance suggestion effect are not limited to the normal game accompanied by the symbol variation, and the advance suggestion effect may be started or ended during the special game. For example, the pre-suggestion effect may be started during the special game, the pre-suggestion effect may be terminated at the end of a specific number of rounds during the special game, and then the continuous effect of continuing the round may be executed. For example, if there are 4R jackpots including 4 unit games and 10R jackpots including 10 unit games as the types of special games, the advance suggestion effect is terminated with the end of the 4th unit game. You may perform an effect that encourages whether the unit game after the first time is executed. In this case, the display mode of the end effect of the prior suggestion effect can be different depending on whether the 4R jackpot is achieved or the 10R jackpot is achieved. For example, in the case of a 10R jackpot, the display color of the advance suggestion effect is gold or rainbow. By changing the color, it may be suggested in advance that there is a high expectation that the unit game after the fifth time will continue. It should be noted that the advance suggestion effect is started before the start of the special game, for example, before the stop display of the symbol that becomes the big hit, and the advance suggestion effect is continued when the stop display of the symbol that indicates the big hit is performed, and the advance suggestion is made after the start of the special game. By ending the production, it may be suggested in advance that there is a high expectation that the unit game after the fifth time will continue. In addition, instead of ending the pre-suggestion effect during the execution of the special game, the pre-suggestion effect is ended in the end demo of the special game, and a production that encourages whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation state after the end of the special game is performed. You may do it. In addition, if the lottery value held during the execution of the special game is in the so-called "holding inner consecutive villa" state corresponding to the big hit, the advance suggestion effect is continued without ending the advance suggestion effect in the end demo of the special game. Then, the pre-suggestion effect may be terminated during the normal game after the end of the special game to execute the winning branch effect.

According to an aspect of the present embodiment, there may be a plurality of effects that can be executed during the progress of the game, and it may be possible to execute a pre-suggested effect that pre-suggests the execution of the plurality of effects. There may be a case where one of the plurality of effects is executed or a case where none of the plurality of effects is executed, triggered by the execution of the pre-suggested effect. When there are a first effect and a second effect as a plurality of effects, it is possible to execute a pre-suggestion effect that pre-suggests the execution of the first effect or the second effect. There may be a case where the effect is executed, a case where the second effect is executed, and a case where neither the first effect nor the second effect is executed. The display mode at the start of the pre-suggestion effect is the same when the first effect is executed, when the second effect is executed, and when neither the first effect nor the second effect is executed. There may be. The display mode at the end of the pre-suggested effect may differ depending on whether the first effect is executed, the second effect is executed, or neither the first effect nor the second effect is executed. You may. Here, various effects can be applied to the plurality of effects to be suggested by the prior suggestion effects.

As an example of the effect to be suggested by the pre-suggestion effect, a temporary stop display that makes it appear as if the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation effect, and a pseudo-ream-only symbol that suggests the effect content after the temporary stop in the temporary stop display. For example, when the temporary stop is displayed. In addition, in the reach variation effect accompanied by the reach mode of the decorative pattern, the pre-reach notice executed at the timing before the reach mode and the post-reach notice executed after the reach mode are also applicable to the suggestion target. sell. Specific examples of pre-reach notice and post-reach notice include a cut-in effect that displays words and character images that suggest the degree of expectation over a relatively short period of time (a few seconds), and rushes or develops into a state where the degree of expectation is higher. It is a specific zone rush effect that suggests to do. In these advance notice effects, characters of a type corresponding to a high degree of expectation may be displayed, or characters, a window frame, or the like may be displayed in a display color according to the high degree of expectation. In addition, the background display is changed, a band-shaped display indicating the zone during stay is added, and an object image suggesting high expectation is displayed on the screen as an incidental display, suggesting that the specific zone (high expectation is high). The rushing effect to enter the state) may be shown, or the accessory operating effect for operating the movable accessory 66 may be executed. In addition, when the movable accessory 66 is provided with an illumination lamp, the movable accessory 66 may be operated while being lit with a display color corresponding to a high degree of expectation.

As an example of the production to be suggested by the pre-suggestion production, there are various productions performed during the so-called super reach production. Variable production accompanied by super reach production includes pre-reach production, post-reach production, and post-reach development production (so-called super reach production), and the super reach production is composed of multiple stages of development production executed after reach. Sometimes. In addition, in the pre-reach production and the post-reach production before the development to the super reach production, the pre-suggestion production may be completed and the production to be suggested may be executed, and in the post-reach development production, the pre-suggestion production is completed. The effect to be suggested may be executed. The post-reach production may include a common production that is at least partially in common with the production content executed in the so-called normal reach production, which is not a super reach production, and develops to the next stage after the execution of the common production (that is, super). It may be an effect that raises expectations by executing a notice effect that suggests (development to reach effect). When the development effect extends over a plurality of stages, at least one of the plurality of stages may be the suggestion target of the prior suggestion effect, or two or more of the plurality of stages or each stage may be the suggestion target of the prior suggestion effect. In this case, the start and end of the pre-suggestion effect may be repeated a plurality of times according to the effect of a plurality of stages. Further, a wide variety of super reach effects may be realized by preparing a plurality of types of development effects, changing the number of stages of the development effects, or changing the display order of the plurality of types of development effects. For example, a reach-up effect in which the development effect after reach is stepped up may be executed by continuously executing a plurality of types of development effects in order. In addition, even if the above-mentioned cut-in effect, temporary stop display of the decorative symbol, temporary stop display of the pseudo-ream-dedicated symbol, etc. are executed during the execution of the development effect of each stage or at the timing between the development effects of each stage. Good. Further, in the variable effect accompanied by the super reach effect, a display color with a high degree of expectation such as a gold color or a giraffe pattern may be used as a display mode of the cut-in effect or the pseudo-ream dedicated pattern. If the effect to be suggested by the pre-suggested effect is a high-expectation effect with a high expectation, the display mode at the end of the pre-suggested effect is changed to a display mode suggesting that the pre-suggested effect is high. May be good.

The effect to be suggested by the pre-suggested effect may be executed at the timing immediately before the symbol change stops. Therefore, the prior suggestion effect may be continued until the timing immediately before the stop of the fluctuation of the symbol. The effect executed immediately before the change is stopped may be an effect that deterministically notifies the result of the change, for example, the player's input operation after the display prompting the player to perform the input operation by the effect button 109 or the lever 112. It may be a specific operation effect that can be started with the above. This specific operation effect is, for example, an accessory operation effect in which the movable accessory 66 operates, and when the accessory operation effect is executed in a lighting color such as a rainbow color, the result of success or failure is accompanied by a big hit or a probability change. It will be definitely notified that it will be a big hit. On the other hand, it is suggested that there is a high expectation that the winning / failing result will be a big hit when the accessory operation effect is executed in a lighting color other than the rainbow color, for example, white, blue, green, red or the like. It may be suggested that the high degree of expectation increases in the order of white, blue, green, and red depending on the lighting color of the operating accessory, and in the case of these lighting colors other than rainbow, the hit / fail result is a big hit. It may be suggested that it is not certain that The display that prompts the player's input operation (for example, the display of a button image simulating the operation button or the display of the wording of "press!") And the specific operation effect that can be executed after that are in the situation where the design is in the reach mode. It may be executed, or it may be executed in a situation where the symbol is temporarily stopped in the off mode or the hit mode. When the specific operation effect is executed in a situation where the symbol is temporarily stopped in the detached mode, it may be a resurrection effect or a relief effect that becomes a big hit after making the person think that the symbol is out. When the resurrection effect or the relief effect is executed, the symbol in the temporarily stopped state may be accompanied by a pseudo continuous variation in which the symbol is subsequently re-variated. That is, when the specific operation effect is executed in the situation where the symbol is temporarily stopped in the detached mode, the pseudo continuous variation in which the symbol in the temporarily stopped state is subsequently re-variated may be executed. Further, when the specific operation effect is executed in the situation where the hit mode is temporarily stopped, the promotion effect may be promoted to a more advantageous type of big hit. The promotion effect may be, for example, promotion from a symbol type or symbol combination that suggests a jackpot without probability change to a symbol type or symbol combination that suggests a jackpot with probability variation, or a real round of a special game that is transferred after the jackpot. It may be a promotion to a symbol type or symbol combination that suggests a larger number of jackpots. The specific operation effect may be an effect that does not involve the operation of the movable accessory. The specific operation effect may be started according to the input operation of the player, or may be started without the input operation of the player. The specific operation effect may be skipped when the player's input operation is not performed, or may be executed even when the player's input operation is not performed.

In addition, the effect to be suggested by the prior suggestion effect is the variable object change effect that changes the display mode of the variable object that suggests the jackpot expectation degree related to the fluctuation, and the hold object that suggests the jackpot expectation degree related to the hold. It may be a hold change effect that changes the display mode of. In the present specification, both the change effect of the variable object and the change effect of the hold object may be collectively referred to as a "hold change effect". The variable object or the reserved object is a spherical object image displayed at the lower center of the screen. The hold object is an object image for showing the number of hold of the lottery value held by the special figure hold means, and the same number of spherical object images (hold ball image) as the number of hold is displayed, and the hold ball image is displayed. The number of pending items is indicated by the number displayed in. The variable object is an object image having a display mode similar to or similar to that of the hold object, but is displayed larger than the hold object or the display area of the hold object so that the difference from the hold object can be seen at first glance. It may be displayed in a different position. The variable object and the reserved object further suggest the jackpot expectation related to the variable or reserved depending on the display mode. For example, the display color of the display image of the variable object or the reserved object, the display wording, and the additional decorative display such as the aura image or the character image suggest the jackpot expectation related to the variable or reserved object. In the hold change effect, the display of the object changes from a display mode with a relatively low expectation to a display mode with a high expectation, and the jackpot expectation related to the change or hold changes depending on the change in the display mode and the display mode after the change. It is suggested that it is high.

According to a certain aspect of the present embodiment, the display mode of the specific effect that can be displayed on the effect display device during the progress of the game is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode that suggests that the expectation of hitting is high. The specific change effect to be made may be feasible. It is possible to execute the pre-suggestion effect that pre-suggests the execution of the specific change effect, and the specific change effect may be executed triggered by the execution of the pre-suggestion effect. Depending on at least one of the time value from the start of the production process accompanied by the execution of the prior suggestion effect to the start of the prior suggestion effect and the time value from the start of the effect process accompanied by the execution of the prior suggestion effect to the end of the prior suggestion effect. Therefore, the execution probability of the specific change effect triggered by the execution of the prior suggestion effect may be different. Here, the "specific change effect" may correspond to any effect that can suggest the degree of expectation by changing the effect mode or the display mode, among the various effects that are the suggestion targets of the above-mentioned prior suggestion effect. The specific change effect is not limited to the display effect accompanied by a change in the display on the screen, and may be an accessory operation effect accompanied by a change in the lighting color or form of the movable accessory. Here, the "start of the effect process accompanied by the execution of the advance suggestion effect" may be the start timing of the symbol variation or the start timing of a specific effect. For example, it may be the start timing of a specific effect (SP development suggestion, development mission, first half of battle reach, normal pseudo-ren, dedicated pseudo-ren, etc.) that triggers the start of the advance suggestion effect.

According to a certain aspect of the present embodiment, the specific effect can be executed while the game is in progress, and the advance suggestion effect that pre-suggests the change of the specific effect can be executed at a plurality of timings during the progress of the game. May be good. When the prior suggestion effect is executed in the situation where the specific effect is the first aspect, the second aspect suggests that the specific effect is more likely to be a hit than the first aspect when the advance suggestion effect is executed. In some cases, the specific effect may not be the second aspect due to the execution of the prior suggestion effect. When the specific effect does not become the second aspect due to the execution of the prior suggestion effect, the specific effect thereafter becomes the first aspect, and the third aspect suggests that the expectation of winning is higher than that of the second aspect. In some cases. Here, the "specific effect" corresponds to any effect that can suggest the degree of expectation by changing the effect mode or the display mode among the various effects that are the suggestion target of the above-mentioned prior suggestion effect, and at least three types thereof. Any effect that can take the above effect mode or display mode can be applied. An example of the specific effect is a hold change effect, the first aspect is a normal hold display, the second aspect is a hold display suggesting a high degree of expectation, and the third aspect suggests a jackpot confirmation or a probability change jackpot confirmation. It may be a hold display.

(2. Fixed expectation)
As described in "1. Preliminary suggestion production" above, there is "battle reach production" as a production that can be executed while the game is in progress, and there are multiple battle reach productions in which the enemy characters that are the opponents of the battle are different. Be prepared. When the battle reach effect is executed, it is suggested that the player is in an advantageous state by the effect process of winning the enemy character. For example, different strengths are set for multiple enemy characters appearing in the battle reach production, and when a strong enemy character appears, the victory expectation is low, and when a weak enemy character appears, the victory expectation is low. It gets higher. Therefore, the degree of expectation of victory in the subsequent battle reach production will differ depending on which of the multiple enemy characters appears, and the subsequent battle will be won depending on which enemy character appears at the start of the battle reach production. The degree of expectation to do is suggested.

In such a battle reach production, the enemy character that is popular with the player is often a strong character, so it is difficult to win the battle when a popular enemy character that the player wants to enjoy the production appears. Situations can occur. As a result, it may be suggested that the player is likely to be in a disadvantageous state even though the effect that is of great interest to the player is executed. In order to avoid such a situation, it is possible to set a production tendency so as to increase the degree of expectation of victory when a popular enemy character appears. However, in this case, when a weak enemy character appears, the victory expectation becomes low, so that the strength in the battle and the victory expectation do not match. In addition, it will not be possible to meet the expectations of players who prefer weak enemy characters.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a special production process is prepared in which the expectation of winning the subsequent battle is the same regardless of which of the plurality of enemy characters having different strengths appears. Specifically, when the battle reach effect is executed via the special effect, the "fixed expectation level effect" is set so that the expectation level for winning the battle is the same regardless of the type of the enemy character. On the other hand, when the battle reach effect is executed without going through the special effect, the expectation of winning the battle differs depending on the type of the enemy character. Specifically, in the case of a special route, an enemy character selection screen is displayed before the battle reach effect is executed so that an arbitrary enemy character can be selected according to the player's preference. Furthermore, in the battle reach production via special production, the degree of expectation of victory is higher than that in the battle reach production via normal without going through special production. The content of the battle reach production is common to the special route and the normal route. As a result, in the battle reach production via special, the player can select his / her favorite enemy character and can give a double benefit that the possibility of winning the battle is increased. As a result, the interest of the production can be enhanced as compared with the game machine in which only the battle reach production via the normal without going through the special production is prepared.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing the degree of expectation of the battle reach effect via the normal route and the special route. In this figure, there are 6 types of enemy characters A to F that appear in the battle reach production, and 6 types of battle reach production are prepared. The battle reach effect is one of the variable effects that can be executed during the symbol variation, and is one of the super reach effects (SP effects) that can be executed after the main drawing reaches the reach. If you win in the battle reach production, it is confirmed that you will be a big hit, and the main drawing will be stopped and displayed in the big hit mode. Therefore, the winning expectation of the battle reach production can be the same as the expectation (probability) that becomes a big hit after that. It should be noted that the jackpot does not have to be determined when the player wins the battle reach effect, and the expected degree of victory of the battle reach effect may be different from the expected degree of the subsequent big hit. In this case, it is desirable to increase the expectation that a big hit will occur after winning by winning the battle reach production. That is, it is desirable that the expectation of a big hit after winning the battle reach production is higher than the expectation of a big hit after losing in the battle reach production.

In the "normal via" battle reach production that does not go through the special production, the degree of expectation of victory differs depending on the types of enemy characters A to F. Enemy character A has a victory expectation of 3%, enemy character B has a victory expectation of 5%, enemy character C has a victory expectation of 8%, and enemy character D has a victory expectation of 8%. Is 10%, the victory expectation of the enemy character E is 12%, and the victory expectation of the enemy character F is 15%. The battle reach effect via the normal is, for example, the “battle reach” of the variable effect flow shown in FIG. There may be cases where battle reach is performed. On the other hand, in the "special via" battle reach production via the special production, the degree of expectation of victory is the same regardless of the types of enemy characters A to F. All of the enemy characters A to F have a victory expectation of 50% via the special route. The battle reach effect via special is executed without being related to the above-mentioned prior suggestion effect. The battle reach production via special is also called "50% challenge production" because it can be a big hit with a 50% probability.

When the battle reach effect is executed via the special, the victory expectation is the same regardless of which of the enemy characters A to F is executed. For example, the victory expectation (50%) when the battle reach effect of the enemy character A is executed via the special is the victory expectation (50%) when the battle reach effect of the enemy character B is executed via the special. Is the same as. On the other hand, when the battle reach effect via normal is executed, the degree of expectation of victory differs depending on which of the enemy characters A to F is executed. For example, the victory expectation (3%) when the battle reach effect of the enemy character A is executed via the normal is the victory expectation (5%) when the battle reach effect of the enemy character B is executed via the normal. Different from.

In addition, the degree of expectation of victory when the battle reach effect via special is executed is higher than the degree of expectation of victory when the battle reach effect via normal is executed. More specifically, when the battle reach effect of a specific enemy character (any of A to F) is executed, the victory expectation via special (50%) is the victory expectation via normal (3% or more). Higher than 15%). For example, the victory expectation (50%) when the battle reach effect of the enemy character A is executed via special is the victory expectation (3%) when the battle reach effect of the enemy character A is executed via the normal. Higher than. Similarly, the victory expectation (50%) when the battle reach effect of the enemy character B is executed via the special is the victory expectation (5%) when the battle reach effect of the enemy character B is executed via the normal. ) Higher than.

In addition, the expectation level (50%) that becomes a big hit when the battle reach effect via special is executed is a high expectation degree effect (for example, the strongest ritual reach in FIG. 40) different from the battle reach effect. It is higher than the expectation (for example, 25%) that will be a big hit in some cases. On the other hand, the expectation level (3% to 15%) that becomes a big hit when the battle reach effect via normal is executed is a high expectation degree effect (for example, the strongest ritual reach) different from the battle reach effect. It is lower than the expectation (25%) that will be a big hit in the case of.

When the battle reach effect via normal is executed, the winning expectation of each of the enemy characters A to F may be different from each other as shown in the figure, and the winning expectation of some characters may be different. May be common. For example, the expectation of victory of enemy characters A and B is 5%, the expectation of victory of enemy characters C and D is 10%, and the expectation of victory of enemy characters E and F is 15%. It may be.

The probability that each of the enemy characters A to F will appear when the battle reach effect via normal is executed may be the same (16% to 17%), or may be different for each character. For example, a character with a relatively high expectation of victory (for example, enemy characters E and F) when a battle reach effect via normal is executed has a relatively high appearance probability (for example, 6% to 10%), and is usually set. Characters with a relatively low expectation of victory (for example, enemy characters A and B) when the battle reach effect via the route is executed may have a relatively high appearance probability (18% to 25%).

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a display example of the effect selection screen. On the left side of the screen, six types of enemy characters A to F that can appear in the battle reach production are displayed side by side in order. In the illustrated example, six types of enemy characters A to F as selection candidates are arranged along a circle, and the enemy character to be selected is displayed relatively large on the lower center side. (A) is an effect selection screen in the initial state, and the enemy character A is displayed as an initial candidate for selection. By pressing the left and right buttons of the cross key 110, the enemy characters to be selected are switched one by one. (B) is an effect selection screen when the right button of the cross key 110 is pressed once, and the selection target on the lower center side is switched to the enemy character B.

On the right side of the screen in FIG. 60, the explanation "No matter who you choose, the victory expectation is 50% !!" is displayed, and the difference in the victory expectation regardless of which of the six types of enemy characters A to F is selected. It is shown that there is no such thing and the expectation for victory is very high. As a result, it is easy to show to the player that the battle reach production is different from the normal route, which is different from the normal route, instead of the battle reach effect via the normal route, in which the degree of expectation of victory differs depending on the types of enemy characters A to F. Is done. Further, at the lower right of the screen in this figure, the remaining time until the period during which the selection operation on the effect selection screen becomes effective ends is displayed. On the effect selection screen, when any of the enemy characters A to F is selected and the effect button 109 is pressed to confirm the character selection, or when the predetermined time elapses and the valid period of the selection operation ends, the character is selected. The battle reach production in which the enemy characters appear is started. The content of the subsequent battle reach production is the same as via normal. Instead of the input method of confirming the selection target by operating the effect button 109 after selecting with the cross key 110, the selection target may be switched one by one each time the effect button 109 is pressed. In this case, there is no input operation for confirming the selection target, and the selection target may be confirmed when a predetermined time elapses.

In the effect selection screen of FIG. 60, the display order of the six types of enemy characters A to F is not particularly limited, but for example, they are displayed in the order of the degree of expectation of victory when the battle reach effect via normal is executed. To. For example, as shown in FIG. 59, when the degree of expectation of victory of the battle reach effect via normal is A → B → C → D → E → F from the lowest, the enemy character on the effect selection screen of FIG. 60 The display order is also A-> B-> C-> D-> E-> F. In addition, at the initial position (lower center of the screen) at the start of the display of the effect selection screen, the enemy character A, which has the lowest expectation of victory (3%) when the battle reach effect via normal is executed, is displayed. To. In the battle reach production via special where the production selection screen is displayed, a very high victory expectation (50%) is set, so there is an opportunity to see a rare production that wins an enemy character that is difficult to win via normal It can be said that it will be done. Therefore, there is a great merit in that it is more likely that a rare effect will be seen if a character with a low expectation of victory is selected via the normal route. Therefore, the enemy character A having a low expectation of victory is placed at the initial position via the normal route, facilitating the selection operation of the enemy character A, which is considered to be highly likely to be selected by the player.

On the effect selection screen of FIG. 60, the wording of "victory expectation 50%" at the upper right of the screen may be highlighted for each operation of switching the enemy character as an option. Despite the fact that the enemy characters are switched, the value of the victory expectation at the upper right of the screen is updated and displayed with the same value (50%), so that the victory expectation of any enemy character Can be emphasized and shown by the player that does not change.

The display example of the effect selection screen is not limited to the one shown in the figure, and as long as a plurality of options corresponding to each of a plurality of types of battle reach effects are displayed and one of the plurality of options can be selected by the operation of the player. In any display mode may be used. For example, a plurality of options may be arranged in a vertical row or a horizontal row, options of 2 × 3 = 6 squares may be arranged in order, or fan-shaped options divided into 6 like a pie chart. May be arranged in order.

If the operation of selecting the enemy character is not performed on the effect selection screen, the enemy character A arranged at the initial position may be selected and a battle reach effect to play against the enemy character A may be executed. In addition, if the operation of selecting the enemy character is not performed on the effect selection screen, the 50% challenge may be completed and the battle reach effect having the same expectation as the normal route may be executed. That is, a battle reach effect in which the degree of expectation of victory differs depending on the types of enemy characters A to F may be executed.

The effect selection screen may be configured so that the player can select any one of the plurality of options by his / her own will, or may be configured so that he / she cannot always select one of the plurality of options by his / her own will. For example, the options to be selected may be automatically switched like a roulette wheel, and one of the options may be selected by the input operation of the player. In this case, it may be configured so that it is difficult for the player to reliably select the option intended by the player because the options to be selected are switched at high speed. In addition, the options to be selected on the effect selection screen are determined in advance by the effect pattern, and even though the player cannot freely select, the effect selection screen that makes the player appear as if he / she has selected is displayed. May be good. Therefore, the effect selection screen in this embodiment may be a screen in which it is displayed that one of the options has been selected after displaying the plurality of options.

Before the start of the "50% Challenge" via the special route, a pre-production may be performed to encourage whether or not the route will be the special route. This pre-effect may be executed within the symbol variation period in which the 50% challenge is executed, or may be a look-ahead effect executed in a symbol variation prior to the symbol variation in which the 50% challenge is executed. Good. An example of a pre-production that encourages whether or not a special route is used is a "chance-eye production" in which the main drawing is stopped or temporarily stopped with a combination of symbols in a specific out-of-order mode. For example, if the main drawing stops or temporarily stops with the symbol combination of "135", it enters the 50% challenge, and if it stops or temporarily stops with the symbol combination of other outliers, it does not become a 50% challenge. Is suggested. In the chance eye effect, for example, three symbol rows are temporarily stopped in the order of left, right, and center, and the chance eye effect is started when the left symbol is temporarily stopped at "1". Next, when the right symbol temporarily stops at "5", the chance eye effect continues, and when the right symbol temporarily stops at "6" without temporarily stopping at "5", the chance eye failure occurs. Also, if the right symbol temporarily stops at "5" and then the center symbol temporarily stops at "3", the chance is successful. On the other hand, if the central symbol does not temporarily stop at "3" but temporarily stops at "4", the chance will fail. In addition, as another example of the pre-production that encourages whether or not it will be a special route, a panel with the wording "?% Challenge" is displayed, and the panel changes to "50% challenge" or "0% challenge". You may perform a panel fanning effect that fuels whether it changes.

At the start or after the start of the "50% challenge" via special, a promotion effect that further increases the expectation of a big hit is executed, and may be promoted to, for example, "77% challenge". In addition, a "33% challenge" with a low expectation of a big hit may be prepared, and a promotion effect may be executed in which the expectation of a big hit is promoted from 33% to 50% or 77%. The promotion effect may be executed after the title indicating that the 50% challenge starts, that is, before the display of the effect selection screen. The promotion effect may be executed immediately after the display of the effect selection screen, or the numerical value of the degree of expectation displayed on the right side of the screen in FIG. 60 may be switched from 50% to 77%. The promotion effect may be executed after selecting any option on the effect selection screen, or may be executed before the start of the subsequent battle reach.

When the battle reach effect via special is executed, the specific effect that can be executed in connection with the battle reach effect via normal may be executable. For example, the title change effect (notice B in FIG. 41) and the hold change effect (notice C in FIG. 41) may be executed even in the battle reach effect via special. On the other hand, when the battle reach effect via special is executed, another specific effect that can be executed in connection with the battle reach effect via normal may not be executed. For example, in the battle reach production via special, the above-mentioned advance suggestion production, full-screen development, sudden strongest, etc. may not be executed.

In the variable production process via the special route and the normal route, a "fierce heat notice" suggesting that the jackpot expectation is very high or a "confirmed notice" that confirms that the jackpot will be a big hit may be executed. The intense heat notice may suggest that, for example, the expectation of a big hit is 50% or more or 80% or more. An example of intense heat notice is a notice effect with a specific display mode (for example, a giraffe pattern) indicating that the degree of expectation is very high, and various effects such as a cut-in effect with a giraffe pattern and a hold change effect are applicable. Can be done. The intense heat notice may be a special illumination effect (giraffe flash effect) in which the decorative lamp 111 blinks in yellow or gold in the image of a giraffe pattern. In addition, an example of the confirmation notice is a notice effect with a specific display mode (for example, rainbow color) indicating that the jackpot is confirmed, and is a cut-in effect with rainbow color, a hold change effect, an accessory operation effect, or an illumination. Various productions such as productions can be applied.

The above-mentioned intense heat notice and final notice may be feasible in any of the variable production process via special route and normal route. When a hot heat notice or a confirmation notice occurs, the expectation that it will be a big hit is very high (for example, the expectation is 50% or more or 80% or more) or the big hit is confirmed regardless of whether it is via special route or normal route. It may be suggested in advance that there is. For example, when the 50% challenge effect is executed via special, the jackpot expectation is 50%, but when the intense heat notice occurs and the 50% challenge effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is 80%. May be. Similarly, when the battle reach effect is executed via normal, the jackpot expectation is 3% to 15% depending on the type of enemy characters A to F, but a fierce heat notice occurs and the battle is performed via normal. When the reach effect is executed, the jackpot expectation may be 80% regardless of the types of enemy characters A to F. Therefore, even if the big hit expectation (80%) when the intense heat notice is generated and the route is a special route is the same as the jackpot expectation (80%) when the intense heat notice is generated and the route is a normal route. Good. Further, the jackpot expectation (80%) when the intense heat notice occurs and the normal route is used may be higher than the jackpot expectation (50%) via the special route where the intense heat notice does not occur. Similarly, the big hit expectation (80%) when a hot heat notice occurs and a specific high expectation effect (for example, the strongest ritual reach) is the big hit expectation (50%) via a special where the hot heat notice does not occur. ) May be higher. In addition, the jackpot expectation (80%) when the intense heat notice occurs and goes through normally is the jackpot expectation (for example, the strongest ritual reach) when the intense heat notice does not occur and it becomes a specific high expectation effect (for example, the strongest ritual reach). For example, it may be higher than 25%). In the above example, the same thing can be said even if the intense heat notice is read as a final notice.

It is suggested that the big hit expectation will be 80% or 100% when the intense heat notice or the final notice is executed, so if the 50% challenge production via special is executed after that, it will be a big hit. It gives the player the impression that the degree of expectation has dropped, and there is a risk that the production will not be consistent. Therefore, when the special effect is executed after the intense heat notice or the final notice is executed, it may be notified that the expectation degree of a big hit at the time of executing the special effect is 80% or 100%. For example, if the intense heat notice is executed before the title of the 50% challenge effect is displayed, the promotion effect that changes the expectation level displayed in the special effect from 50% to 80% may be executed. Further, if the big hit confirmation notice is executed before the title of the 50% challenge effect is displayed, the promotion effect may be executed to change the expectation level displayed in the special effect from 50% to 99% or 100%. In addition, by applying prohibition processing such as preventing the special route from being executed when the intense heat notice or confirmation notice is executed, or preventing the intense heat notice or confirmation notice from occurring when the special route is used. The consistency of the production may be maintained. In addition, prohibition processing may be applied so that any advance notice effect cannot be executed in the case of a special route, and prohibition processing may be applied so that only a specific advance notice effect cannot be executed in the case of a special route. May be applied. For example, in the case of a special route, it is impossible to execute a notice effect that exceeds the jackpot expectation (50%) suggested by the special route, while in the case of a special route, the jackpot suggested by the special route is disabled. It may be possible to execute a notice effect that is less than the expected degree (50%).

According to an aspect of the present embodiment, there are at least a first effect and a second effect as effects that can be executed while the game is in progress, and the player executes the first effect or the second effect while the game is in progress. May be selectable. When the first effect or the second effect is executed triggered by the player's selection, the expectation level that is hit after the execution of the first effect and the expectation level that is hit after the execution of the second effect are the same. May be good. When the first effect or the second effect is executed without being triggered by the player's selection, the degree of expectation that is hit after the execution of the first effect and the degree of expectation that is hit after the execution of the second effect are different. May be good. Here, an example of the first effect and the second effect is a battle reach effect in which the opponent (enemy character) is different, but the first effect and the second effect may be other effects. For example, the first production may be "development mission" or "weak reach", and the second production may be "battle reach first half" or "strongest ritual reach". That is, any combination of productions whose expectations may differ depending on the type of production corresponds to the combination of the first production and the second production, and at least a part of the productions to be suggested by the above-mentioned prior suggestion production is the first. It can correspond to a production or a second production.

According to an aspect of the present embodiment, there are at least a plurality of specific effects and special effects that can be executed while the game is in progress, and the player executes one of the plurality of specific effects while the game is in progress. May be selectable. When any of the plurality of specific effects is executed triggered by the player's selection, the degree of expectation that is hit after the execution of the specific effect may be higher than the degree of expectation that is hit after the execution of the special effect. When any of a plurality of specific effects is executed without being triggered by the player's selection, the degree of expectation that will be hit after the execution of the specific effect is lower than the degree of expectation that will be hit after the execution of the special effect. Good. Here, an example of a plurality of specific effects is a battle reach effect in which the opponent (enemy character) is different, and an example of a special effect is the strongest ritual reach, but various other effects are a plurality of specific effects. It can correspond to a special production. For example, at least a part of the effects to be suggested by the above-mentioned prior suggestion effects may be a plurality of specific effects or special effects. As a modification, even if any of a plurality of specific effects is executed without being triggered by the player's selection, the expectation that is hit after the execution of the specific effect is higher than the expectation that is hit after the execution of the special effect. May be high. Examples of special effects in this case are development missions and weak reach, but various other effects can correspond to special effects.

According to an aspect of this embodiment, there are at least a first effect and a second effect as effects that can be executed while the game is in progress, and at least the first effect and the second effect are candidates for selection while the game is in progress. The effect selection screen to be displayed may be displayed. The degree of expectation that is hit when the first effect is executed after the effect selection screen is displayed may be higher than the degree of expectation that is hit when the first effect is executed without displaying the effect selection screen. .. Here, an example of the first effect and the second effect is a battle reach effect in which the opponent (enemy character) is different, but the first effect and the second effect may be other effects, and the above-mentioned advance. At least a part of the effect to be suggested by the suggestion effect may correspond to the first effect or the second effect.

According to a certain aspect of the present embodiment, as the effect processes that can be executed during the progress of the game, the first effect process in which the specific effect is executed after the execution of the special effect and the specific effect are executed without the special effect being executed. There is a second effect process to be performed, and the first advance notice effect and the second advance notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation to be hit in the first effect process and the second effect process may be feasible. The first notice effect is executed and the second notice effect is not executed. The expectation level that is hit after the execution of the second effect process is that the first notice effect is not executed and the second notice effect is not executed. It may be higher than the expected degree of winning after the execution, and may be lower than the expected degree of hitting after the execution of the first effect process in which the first notice effect is executed and the second notice effect is not executed. The first notice effect is executed and the second notice effect is executed. The expectation level that is hit after the execution of the second effect process is the second effect process in which the first notice effect is executed and the second notice effect is executed. It may be the same as the expectation that will be hit after the execution of. Here, an example of a special effect is a 50% challenge accompanied by a display of an effect selection screen, and an example of a specific effect is a battle reach effect. Further, an example of the first notice effect is a notice effect such as a cut-in effect that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is very high, and an example of the second notice effect is a movable notification that a big hit is confirmed. It is a character production. The examples of the special effect, the specific effect, the first advance notice effect, and the second advance notice effect are not limited to these, and at least a part of the effects to be suggested by the above-mentioned prior suggestion effect may correspond to these effects. For example, the first notice effect may be the above-mentioned intense heat notice, and the second notice effect may be the above-mentioned jackpot confirmation notice.

According to a certain aspect of the present embodiment, as the effect processes that can be executed during the progress of the game, the first effect process in which the specific effect is executed after the execution of the special effect and the specific effect are executed without the special effect being executed. There is a second production process to be performed, and the first notice production that suggests the expectation that will be a hit in the first production process is feasible, and the second notice effect that suggests the expectation that will be a hit in the second production process is feasible. Is feasible, and the second notice effect may not be feasible in the first effect process. The degree of expectation that is hit after the execution of the second effect process in which the second notice effect is executed is higher than the degree of expectation that is hit after the execution of the first effect process in which the first notice effect is not executed, and the first notice effect is It may be lower than the expected degree that will be hit after the execution of the first effect process to be executed. Here, an example of a special effect is a 50% challenge accompanied by a display of an effect selection screen, and an example of a specific effect is a battle reach effect. In addition, an example of the first notice production is a movable accessory production that confirms that it is a big hit, and an example of the second notice production is a cut-in production that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is very high. It is a notice production of. The examples of the special effect, the specific effect, the first advance notice effect, and the second advance notice effect are not limited to these, and at least a part of the effects to be suggested by the above-mentioned prior suggestion effect may correspond to these effects. For example, the second notice effect may be the above-mentioned intense heat notice, and the first notice effect may be the above-mentioned jackpot confirmation notice.

In this embodiment, when the first special symbol becomes a big hit and the special game is executed, the game shifts to the probability fluctuation state or the normal probability state after the special game, while the second special symbol becomes a big hit and the special game When is executed, it may be applied to a pachinko gaming machine that is always shifted to a probability fluctuation state after the special game. In this case, it may be determined whether or not the game shifts to the probability fluctuation state depending on whether or not the game ball enters a specific area in the large winning opening that is opened during the special game after the big hit. That is, the configuration may be called "ball probability" or "V probability" in which the transition to the probability fluctuation state is determined by entering the ball (V prize) in the specific area during the special game. As a large winning opening that can be opened during a special game, a first large winning opening in which a specific area is not provided in the large winning opening and a second large winning opening in which a specific area is provided in the large winning opening are provided. The first unit game in which the first special winning opening is opened and the second unit game in which the second large winning opening is opened may be executed during the special game. In this case, it is possible to execute a second unit game in which the opening mode and opening time of the second big winning opening are different depending on the type of the jackpot symbol, and it is possible to execute the second unit game in which the ease of entering a specific area is different. Therefore, the transition probability to the probability fluctuation state may be different depending on the type of the jackpot symbol. For example, when the big hit symbol A is a big hit and a special game is executed, the second unit game in which the opening time of the second big winning opening is relatively long is executed, and it becomes easy to enter the specific area. You may do so. On the other hand, when the big hit symbol B becomes a big hit and a special game is executed, the second unit game in which the opening time of the second big winning opening is relatively short is executed, and it is difficult to enter the specific area. It may be. In addition, by making the opening timing of the big winning opening and the operating timing of the distribution mechanism for distributing the game ball to either a specific area or a non-specific area in the big winning opening different according to the type of the big hit symbol, A special game (big hit symbol A) that makes it easy or possible to enter a specific area or a special game (big hit symbol B) that makes it difficult or impossible to enter a special area may be executed. In addition, only a large winning opening in which a specific area is provided is provided, and a distribution mechanism for distributing a game ball to either a specific area or a non-specific area is operated in a specific number of unit games (for example, the fourth round). , A special game that makes it easy or possible to enter a specific area by making the operation mode different according to the type of the jackpot symbol (big hit symbol A, the distribution time value that enables the ball to enter the specific area is 10). Seconds) and a special game (big hit symbol B, distribution time value that allows the ball to enter the specific area is 0.05 seconds) that makes it difficult or impossible to enter the specific area. Good.

In the above-mentioned "V probability" configuration, the execution mode of the second unit game when the first special symbol becomes a big hit and the special game is executed, and the special game is executed when the second special symbol becomes a big hit. By making the execution mode of the second unit game different from the execution mode in the case of the above, the transition probability to the probability fluctuation state may be different. For example, when the first special symbol becomes a big hit and the special game is executed, the opening time of the second big winning opening in the second unit game is relatively shortened, and the ball entering the specific area is relatively short. On the other hand, when the second special symbol becomes a big hit and the special game is executed, the opening time of the second big winning opening in the second unit game is made relatively long to enter a specific area. The ball may be relatively easy to enter. To give a specific example, when the first special symbol becomes a big hit and a special game is executed, the probability of entering a specific area in the second big winning opening is set to about 50%, while the second special When the symbol becomes a big hit and the special game is executed, the probability of entering the second big winning opening may be about 80%. In addition, when the second special symbol becomes a big hit and the special game is executed, the opening time of the second big winning opening in the second unit game is lengthened (for example, 5 seconds or more, 10 seconds or more, or 20 seconds or more). By doing so, the second unit game may be configured so that the ball is almost certainly entered into the second big winning opening as long as the game ball is launched toward the second big winning opening during the special game. As a result, when the second special symbol becomes a big hit and the special game is executed, the probability of entering a specific area in the second big winning opening may be substantially 100%. That is, the probability of transition to the probability fluctuation state when the second special symbol becomes a big hit may be substantially 100%. In this case, the probability of transition to the probability fluctuation state when the first special symbol becomes a big hit may be less than 100%, and the transition probability to the probability fluctuation state when the first special symbol becomes a jackpot is 50%. It may be about 80%. That is, in the configuration of "V probability", the special figure 1 may be set to less than 100% probability variation, and the special figure 2 may be set to 100% probability variation.

Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be further described. In this embodiment, it is possible to execute "3. Operation effect (also referred to as button effect)" for instructing the player to perform an input operation to the operation input means such as the effect button 109 and the effect lever 112. When the button effect is executed, it is possible to execute the "button fanning effect" that suggests the occurrence of the button effect before the button effect is executed. In addition, it is possible to execute a "time adjustment effect" for absorbing a deviation in the effect execution time due to a difference in the input operation timing of the player in the button effect. In this embodiment, "4. Step-up effect" is executed, in which the continuous suggestion effect that suggests the continuation of the effect due to the symbol change can be executed a plurality of times, and the effect is gradually advanced according to the number of times the continuous suggestion effect is executed. Make it possible. In addition, it is possible to shift to "5. Special pseudo-ream zone" that enables the pseudo-continuous fluctuation effect to be continuously executed over a plurality of symbol changes.

(3. Button production)
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of an effect process when the button effect is executed. Each of FIGS. 61 (a) to 61 (c) shows a fluctuation effect process over one symbol fluctuation period from the start of fluctuation of the symbol to the stop of fluctuation. First, the normal effect is executed when the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, and then the "button fanning effect" that suggests the occurrence of the button effect is executed. After the button fanning effect is executed, a button effect is executed in which the player is instructed to perform an input operation to the operation input means such as the effect button 109 or the effect lever 112. In the button effect, an operation valid period (also referred to as a button valid period) in which the input operation to the operation input means is effective is defined. In the button effect, an image imitating the operation input means to be input is displayed, and it is indicated that the button is within the valid period. In the button effect, the remaining time until the end of the button validity period may be shown in a dramatic manner. For example, the remaining time of the button validity period is displayed by a countdown display of numbers or a bar display whose length gradually shortens with the passage of time. The time is shown.

The button effect ends when the input operation within the button validity period is triggered or when the button validity period ends. After the end of the button effect, a specific effect that can be executed is executed when the button effect ends. An example of a specific effect is a development effect that suggests a high degree of expectation, and is, for example, a super reach effect that can be executed after the decorative pattern is in the reach mode. Further, after the button effect is completed and before the specific effect is executed, the movable accessory effect (also simply referred to as the character effect) accompanied by the operation of the movable accessory 66 can be executed. After the execution of the specific effect, all of the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, and the combination of the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped suggests the result of success or failure. After the decorative symbols are displayed in the temporarily stopped state, all of the decorative symbols are fixedly stopped, and the winning / failing result is definitively indicated by the symbol combination of the decorative symbols that are fixedly stopped. In the example shown in FIG. 61, a special effect indicating that the specific effect ends and shifts to the normal effect is executed before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and after the special effect is executed, the decorative pattern is shifted to the normal effect and then the decorative pattern Is fixed and stopped. The special production is also called an "eye-catching production" that attracts the player's eyes and switches the production without discomfort.

FIG. 61A shows an effect process when an input operation to the effect button is not performed within the button validity period in which the button effect is executed. In FIG. 61A, the execution time t1 of the button fanning effect is, for example, about 5 to 10 seconds, for example, about 6 seconds, 7 seconds, or 8 seconds. Further, the time t2 of the button effective period in the button effect is, for example, about 3 seconds to 8 seconds, and for example, about 4 seconds, 5 seconds, or 6 seconds. Therefore, the execution time t1 of the button fanning effect may be longer than the button valid period time t2 in the button effect. In FIG. 61A, when the input operation to the effect button is not performed within the button validity period, the accessory effect is executed with the end of the button validity period as a trigger. The execution time t3 of the character production is, for example, about 1 second to 2 seconds. In FIG. 61A, the time t4 from the temporary stop of all the decorative symbols to the start of the special effect is, for example, about 2 seconds to 4 seconds, and the execution time t5 of the special effect is, for example, 0. It is about 5 seconds to 2 seconds, and the time t6 from the end of the special effect to the final stop of the decorative symbol in the normal effect is, for example, about 1 second to 3 seconds. In a certain embodiment, the time t4 from the temporary stop of the decorative symbol to the start of the special effect may be the same as the time t6 from the end of the special effect to the final stop of the decorative symbol, or the time t6. It may be longer or shorter than the time t6. In FIG. 61A, the execution time t5 of the special effect may be shorter than the time t6 from the end of the special effect to the final stop of the decorative symbol.

FIG. 61B shows an effect process when an input operation to the effect button is performed during the button validity period. In FIG. 61 (b), the accessory effect is executed triggered by the input operation, and then the accessory effect is continuously executed until the timing when the specific effect can be started. In FIG. 61B, the input operation is performed when the time t2'elapses from the start of the button effect, and the input operation is performed under the condition that there is a remaining time Δt until the end of the button valid period. As a result, the accessory effect is executed at a timing earlier than that in the case of FIG. 61A by the remaining time Δt of the button valid period. In FIG. 61 (b), the time of the character effect is longer by the remaining time Δt of the button valid period than in the case of FIG. 61 (a), and the time remaining in the time t3 in which the character effect is executed in FIG. 61 (a). The accessory effect is continuously executed over the time t3'= t3 + Δt to which the time Δt is added. By adjusting the execution time of the accessory effect in this way, it is possible to absorb the deviation of the effect execution timing according to the input operation timing. That is, regardless of the difference in the input operation timing, the specific effect can be started at the same timing as in FIG. 61A in which the input operation is not performed. As a result, in FIG. 61 (b), the effect time from the start of fluctuation of the symbol to the final stop can be set to the same time as in FIG. In the case of FIG. 61 (b), the accessory effect corresponds to the “time adjustment effect”. In FIG. 61B, the time t4 from the temporary stop of all the decorative symbols to the start of the special effect, the execution time t5 of the special effect, and the time until the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped after the end of the special effect. The time t6 is the same as in the case of FIG. 61 (a).

FIG. 61 (c) shows another effect process when an input operation to the effect button is performed during the button validity period. In FIG. 61 (c), as in FIG. 61 (b), the input operation is performed when the time t2'elapses from the start of the button effect, and the accessory effect is executed triggered by the input operation. However, the time for executing the character effect in FIG. 61 (c) is the same time t3 as in FIG. 61 (a), and from the time t3'= t3 + Δt for executing the character effect in FIG. 61 (b). Is also short. As a result, in FIG. 61 (c), the start timing of the specific effect is earlier than in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), and the timing is earlier than in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b) by the remaining time Δt of the button valid period. A specific effect is executed with. In FIG. 61 (c), since the start timing of the specific effect is early, the timing at which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped is earlier than in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b). Therefore, in FIG. 61 (c), the execution time of the special effect executed after all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped is made longer than that of FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b) by Δt, so that the input operation timing can be adjusted. Absorbs the deviation of the production execution timing. Specifically, in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), the special effect is continuously executed for a time t5'= t5 + Δt obtained by adding the remaining time Δt of the button valid period to the time t5 at which the special effect is executed. By adjusting the execution time of the special effect in this way, the end timing of the special effect can be aligned with the same timing as in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b). As a result, in FIG. 61 (c), the effect time from the start of fluctuation of the symbol to the final stop can be set to the same time as in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b). In the case of FIG. 61 (c), the special effect corresponds to the “time adjustment effect”.

According to the effect process of FIG. 61 (c), the execution time t3 of the character effect is the same as that of FIG. 61 (a), so that the execution time of the character effect is t3'= t3 + Δt as shown in FIG. 61 (b). It can be prevented from becoming too long. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect process from giving the player an extended impression due to the execution of a long character effect in the middle of the effect process in which the result of success or failure is not determined. On the other hand, according to the effect process of FIG. 61 (c), a special effect that becomes a time adjustment effect is executed after all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and the result of success or failure is suggested, so that it may be a hit. It is possible to prevent the production from being delayed in the production process in which the sense of expectation is raised.

In a certain embodiment, when the input operation is performed within the button valid period, the effect process of FIG. 61 (c) may be executed. In this case, the duration of the special effect (eye catch effect) may differ depending on whether or not there is an input operation within the button validity period during the execution of the button effect. Specifically, if there is no input operation within the button validity period, the duration of the special effect (eye catch effect) becomes relatively short, and if there is an input operation within the button validity period, the special effect (eye catch effect) is relatively short. The duration of the catch effect) may be relatively short. Further, the duration of the special effect (eye catch effect) may be different depending on the input operation timing within the button validity period. Specifically, the shorter the elapsed time from the start of the button validity period to the input operation, the longer the duration of the special effect (eye catch effect) may be. In other words, the later the input operation timing during the button validity period, the shorter the duration of the special effect (eye catch effect) may be.

In a certain embodiment, the execution mode of the accessory effect or the specific effect after the execution of the button effect may be different depending on the presence or absence of the input operation within the button validity period. Further, a special effect (for example, a premier effect) may be executed only when the button is not operated within the button validity period. In this case, it is possible to provide a special effect to the player who finds the button operation troublesome. This special effect can be executed only when the fluctuation becomes a big hit, and may not be executed when the fluctuation is out of the range. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with an option not to intentionally operate the button during the button effect in order to generate a special effect after the button effect. For example, if a highly-expected effect that is a big hit is executed in the effect process from the start of fluctuation to the occurrence of a button effect, the player feels that a special effect that is confirmed to be a big hit may occur. It is possible to take the action of not operating the button in the button production while increasing the value. In this way, it is possible to provide playability with an increased degree of freedom for the player to select.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of the button fanning effect and the effect process of the button effect. 62 (a) and 62 (b) show screen examples of the button fanning effect. First, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), two dragons (dragons) 508 appear, and the process in which the two dragons 508 are intertwined is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), a state in which two dragons 508 roar while facing each other is shown. FIG. 62 (c) shows a screen example of the button effect, a button image 510 imitating the effect button 109 is displayed in the center of the screen, and the wording “press !!” prompting the player to operate the effect button 109 is displayed. Will be done. The display of the button image 510 suggests to the player that the button operation is within the valid period of the button. Further, a timer image 512 for showing the button valid period is displayed below the button image 510, and the remaining time until the button valid period ends by gradually shortening the length of the bar 513 of the timer image 512. Is suggested. FIG. 62 (d) shows an execution example of the movable accessory effect, and operates so that the movable accessory 514 imitating two dragons appears in front of the screen. In this embodiment, by making two dragons appear in the button fanning effect shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b), the occurrence of the button effect is suggested in advance, and the two dragons are imitated after the button effect. It is suggested in advance that the movable character 514 will appear in the character effect. The button fanning effect is a kind of generation suggestion effect that suggests the occurrence of the button effect or the occurrence of the movable accessory effect after the button effect. In the production process of FIGS. 62 (a) to 62 (d), the simple symbol 500 composed of three rows of symbols is displayed in a variable manner at the lower right of the screen, suggesting that the symbols are changing.

In this embodiment, the execution time t1 of the button effect shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b) is configured to be longer than the execution time (button valid period) t2 of the button effect shown in FIG. 62 (c). To. Since the button effect is an effect that can trigger the occurrence of a notification effect that notifies the winner of the fluctuation, it can be said that it is an extremely important effect for the player and is the moment when the degree of expectation is highest. By prolonging the execution time of the button fanning effect that fuels the generation of the button effect toward such a moment of tension when the degree of expectation increases, the player's expectation can be more effectively fanned. In recent years, it has been required to lengthen the average value of the fluctuation time of one symbol fluctuation in order to optimize the ball output rate per hour. For example, the fluctuation time of a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time. Is required to be longer. If the execution time of the normal production or the reach production is simply lengthened in accordance with the lengthening of the fluctuation time, the player may be shunned because the production gives the impression of being delayed. In that respect, since the above-mentioned button fanning effect is executed at a timing when the player's expectation is high, it is difficult to give the impression that the effect is delayed even if the execution time of the button fanning effect is lengthened. Therefore, according to this embodiment, by lengthening the execution time of the button fanning effect, the average value of the symbol variation time is lengthened to avoid giving the impression that the effect is delayed, and the ball output rate per hour is increased. Can be optimized.

A plurality of types of operation effects may be prepared. For example, as an operation effect, a "button effect" that commands the pressing of the effect button 109 and a "lever effect" that commands the pulling of the effect lever 112 may be executed. The "lever effect" may be an effect that suggests that the degree of expectation is higher than that of the "button effect". Further, as the "button effect", a first button effect in which a normal button is displayed and a second button effect in which a chance button suggesting a high degree of expectation is displayed may be prepared, and the second button may be prepared. The production may be a production with a higher degree of expectation than the first button production. Further, as the "lever effect", a first lever effect in which the normal lever is displayed and a second lever effect in which the intense heat lever suggesting that the degree of expectation is high may be displayed. The degree of expectation of the effect may be higher in the order of first button effect <second button effect <first lever effect <second lever effect. The higher the expectation of the operation effect, the longer the time value from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the operation effect may tend to be. For example, the second time value from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the first lever effect may be longer than the first time value from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the first button effect. On the other hand, the button validity period in each of the plurality of types of operation effects may be the same, and may be shorter than the execution time of the occurrence suggestion effect (button fanning effect) executed before the start of the operation effect.

A plurality of types of generation suggestion effects (button fanning effects) that suggest the occurrence of operation effects may be prepared. For example, depending on the type of button fanning effect, the type of button effect to be executed after the end of the button fanning effect may be suggested. For example, a first type of button fanning effect and a second type of button fanning effect having a higher expectation than the first type may be prepared. When the second type of button fanning effect is executed, the expectation that the lever effect is executed may be higher than that when the first type button fanning effect is executed. The second time value from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the second type of button fanning effect may be longer than the first time value from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the first type of button fanning effect. The execution time of the second type of button fanning effect may be the same as the execution time of the first type of button fanning effect, or may be shorter or longer than the execution time of the first type of button fanning effect. You may. Further, the time value at which the button fanning effect is executed may differ depending on the time value from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the button fanning effect. For example, the button when the button fanning effect is executed after the second hour, which is longer than the first hour from the start of the fluctuation, than the execution time of the button fanning effect when the button fanning effect is executed the first hour after the start of the fluctuation. The execution time of the fanning effect may be long.

FIG. 63 is a diagram schematically showing an effect process in which the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped after the execution of the special effect, and shows an example of a screen when the result of success or failure is incorrect. FIG. 63A shows an example of a screen before all of the decorative symbols 502 composed of three rows of symbols are temporarily stopped, and the left and right symbol rows of the decorative symbols 502 are temporarily stopped at the same symbol “3”. In addition to the reach mode, the central symbol row of the decorative symbol 502 is temporarily stopped at the symbol "3" to be a big hit, or is temporarily stopped at the symbol "4" to be disengaged. .. At the lower right of the screen, a simple symbol 500 composed of three rows of symbols is displayed in a variable manner, suggesting that the symbols are changing. In FIG. 63A, an image used in the specific effect is displayed as the background display 520 of the decorative symbol 502 and the simple symbol 500. The display example of the background display 520 is a background image used in a high-expectation effect such as a battle effect or the strongest effect, and is different from the background image of the normal effect that can be executed at the start of fluctuation.

FIG. 63 (b) shows an example of a screen in which all of the decorative symbols 502 are temporarily stopped after the display of FIG. 63 (a), and the decorative symbols 502 are temporarily stopped by the symbol combination of "343" indicating that they are detached. At this time, the decorative symbol 502 is not fixedly stopped, and is displayed in a temporarily stopped state in which minute shaking is maintained. At this time, the simple symbol 500 at the lower right of the screen is displayed in a variable manner, suggesting that the symbol is changing. The background display 520 of the decorative symbol 502 and the simple symbol 500 is the same as the background display 520 of FIG. 63 (a), and the specific effect is continued.

FIG. 63 (c) shows a screen example of a special effect suggesting a transition to the normal effect after the display of FIG. 63 (b). In the special effect (eye catch effect), the decorative symbol 502 is temporarily hidden, and the image dedicated to the special effect is displayed in full screen. In the special effect, an image 516 of the main character (main character) appearing in the effect and an image 518 showing the title of the game machine "CR Dragon II" are displayed. The background display 522 in the special effect is different from the background display 520 in the specific effect shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b). The simple symbol 500 at the lower right of the screen is displayed in a variable manner, suggesting that the symbol is changing.

FIG. 63 (d) shows a screen example in which the decorative symbol 504 is fixedly stopped after the display of FIG. 63 (c), and shows a screen example of a normal effect. The decorative symbol 504 is fixedly stopped at the same "343" symbol combination as the decorative symbol 502 temporarily stopped in FIG. 63 (b), indicating that the result of winning or failing is incorrect. At this time, the simple symbol 500 at the lower right of the screen is also stopped fluctuating, suggesting that the symbol is stopped. The simple symbol 500 is stopped and displayed at the symbol combination of "343", which is the same symbol combination as the decorative symbol 504, and the simple symbol 500 also indicates that the result is incorrect. In the normal production, the background display 524 for the normal production is used, and for example, an image displaying a landscape such as a cityscape or a wilderness in the daytime is used as the background display 524. The background display 524 of the normal effect is different from the background display 520 for the specific effect shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), and is also different from the background display 522 for the special effect shown in FIG. 63 (c).

The decorative symbol 502 shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b) is composed of only a portion indicating the symbol type, and starts from a portion indicating a number (for example, "3" or "4") for identifying the symbol type. It has a display form. On the other hand, the decorative symbol 504 in the normal effect shown in FIG. 63 (d) indicates a first portion 504a indicating a number "3" or "4" for identifying the symbol type, and a character displayed incidentally to the number. It has a display form in combination with the second portion 504b. The type of the second portion 504b indicating the character differs depending on the type of the first portion 504a indicating the number that identifies the symbol type. That is, the type of character differs depending on the type of symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 63, the display form of the decorative symbol 502 used in the specific effect and the decorative symbol 504 used in the normal effect are different.

The display form of the decorative symbol used in the specific effect may be the same as the display form of the decorative pattern used in the normal effect. Specifically, in both the specific effect and the normal effect, as in the decorative symbol 504 shown in FIG. 63 (d), a display in which the first portion indicating the symbol type and the second portion displayed incidentally are combined. A decorative pattern having a form may be used. On the contrary, in both the specific effect and the normal effect, a decorative symbol having a display form consisting of only a portion indicating the symbol type, such as the decorative symbol 502 shown in FIG. 63 (a), may be used. In addition, the display form of the decorative pattern may be different depending on the game state. For example, in the normal effect in the left-handed state, as in the decorative symbol 504 shown in FIG. 63 (d), the decoration has a display form in which the first portion indicating the symbol type and the second portion displayed incidentally are combined. Designs may be used. On the other hand, in the normal effect in the right-handed state, a decorative symbol consisting only of a portion indicating the symbol type may be used, as in the decorative symbol 502 shown in FIG. 63 (a). Further, in the specific effect, the display form of the decorative symbol may be different depending on the game state as in the normal effect, or the display form of the decorative symbol may be common regardless of the game state. For example, in the specific effect, a decorative symbol consisting only of a portion indicating the symbol type is used, such as the decorative symbol 502 shown in FIG. 63 (a), regardless of whether the state is left-handed or right-handed. You may.

The effect process accompanied by the above-mentioned special effect (eye catch effect) may be feasible only in a specific gaming state. For example, an effect process accompanied by a special effect (eye catch effect) may be executed only in the left-handed state and may not be executed in the right-handed state.

64 (a) to 64 (c) are diagrams showing an example of variations in the production process of FIG. 61 (c). FIG. 64A shows a case where the decorative symbol comes off and stops fixedly, and after a lapse of a predetermined time t6 from the end of the special effect, the decorative symbol comes off and stops, and from the fluctuation stop to a predetermined time t7. It shows the flow in which the next fluctuation is started after the passage of. The time t7 from the final stop of the decorative symbol to the start of the next fluctuation is, for example, about 0.5 seconds to 1 second, and is from the time t6 from the end of the special effect to the final stop of the decorative symbol. It may be short. In the case of FIG. 64A, the normal effect is started after the end of the special effect, the normal effect is continued even when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped after that, and the normal effect is continued even when the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate thereafter. Continued, for example, the background display 524 shown in FIG. 63 (d) is continuously displayed.

FIG. 64 (b) shows a case where the decorative symbol hits and the confirmation is stopped. In FIG. 64 (b), after the start of the specific effect, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in a hitting manner, and then the special effect is executed. After the end of the special effect, the process shifts to the normal effect and the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped in the hit mode. After that, the start demonstration of the special game is started, and the special game is executed with the opening of the big winning opening. In FIG. 64 (b), the time t6'from the end of the special effect to the final stop of the decorative symbol in the hit mode is the time t6'in which the decorative symbol is removed after the special effect is completed in FIG. 64 (a). It may be the same as the time t6 until the fixed stop, or may be longer than the time t6. In the latter case, by setting the time t6'that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the hitting mode after the end of the special effect to be longer, it is possible to give the player a longer time to realize that the hit has been made.

FIG. 64 (c) shows a case where the decorative symbol is disengaged after the end of the special effect, and the revival effect is executed by re-variating without stopping the determination. In the case of FIG. 64 (c), the temporary stop state of the decorative symbol is continued for a time t6 "that is longer than the time t6 until the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped after the end of the special effect in FIG. 64 (a). The temporary stop state continues even at the timing when the decorative symbol should be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time t6 has elapsed from the end of the effect. In FIG. 64 (c), the temporary stop state of the decorative symbol after the end of the special effect. By lengthening the duration t6 ”, it can be suggested that the effect will continue further due to the continuation of the temporary stop state, and after that, the decorative pattern will be re-variated to execute the revival effect, which is highly expected. It can be a production process. In FIG. 64 (c), the duration t6 ”of the temporary stop state of the decorative symbol after the end of the special effect is, for example, about 3 seconds to 5 seconds. In FIG. 64 (c), the decoration after the end of the special effect. The duration t6 "in the temporarily stopped state of the symbol may be longer than the execution time t5'of the special effect. On the other hand, in FIG. 64A, the duration t6 of the temporary stop state of the decorative symbol after the end of the special effect may be shorter than the execution time t5'of the special effect. The duration t6 ”of the temporary stop state of the decorative symbol after the end of the special effect in FIG. 64 (c) is the same as the duration t6 ′ of the temporary stop state of the decorative symbol after the end of the special effect in FIG. 64 (b). It may be longer than the time t6', or it may be shorter than the time t6'.

The revival effect in FIG. 64 (c) may be common to at least a part of the effect process that can be executed as a specific effect. As the revival effect in FIG. 64 (c), a super reach effect such as a battle effect or the strongest effect may be executed. As the revival effect in FIG. 64 (c), a button fanning effect or a button effect may be executed. In this case, the time adjustment effect may be executed according to the input operation timing in the button effect. At this time, the time adjustment effect may be executed in the accessory effect as shown in FIG. 61 (b), or the time adjustment effect may be executed in the special effect as shown in FIG. 61 (c). Good. In the latter case, the special effect may be executed again after the revival effect executed after the special effect is executed.

A plurality of types of special effects (eye-catching effects) may be prepared, and for example, a plurality of types of eye-catching effects having different display colors may be feasible. When the eye-catching effect is executed, the degree of expectation of the effect development after the end of the eye-catching effect may be suggested depending on the type of the eye-catching effect. For example, when the second type of eye-catching effect, which is the display color of red, is executed, the revival effect is performed after the eye-catching effect, as compared with the case where the first type of eye-catching effect, which is the normal color, is executed. It may be more likely to be executed. In addition, when a third type of eye-catching effect having a golden display color is executed, the revival effect may be executed without fail after the eye-catching effect. That is, it may be definitively suggested that the revival effect is executed after the third type of eye-catching effect, which is a golden display color. As a result, the time for the decorative symbol to maintain the temporarily stopped state after the end of the third type of eye-catching effect may be a relatively long time t6 ". In other words, the first type or the first type. Compared to the time (for example, t6) for the decorative symbol to maintain the temporary stop state after the end of the two types of eye-catching effects, the time for the decorative symbol to maintain the temporary stop state after the end of the third type of eye-catching effect (for example, t6). ") May be long.

FIG. 65 is a diagram schematically showing an effect process in which the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped after the execution of the special effect, and shows a screen example when the result of winning or failing is a hit. FIG. 65 (a) shows an example of a screen in which the decorative symbol 502 becomes a hit mode and temporarily stops in a specific effect, and the symbol combination of “333” in which the decorative symbol 502 indicates a hit after the display of FIG. 63 (a) is shown. Indicates a state in which it is temporarily stopped. FIG. 65 (b) shows an example of a screen of a special effect suggesting a transition to a normal effect after the display of FIG. 65 (a), and like FIG. 63 (c), an image dedicated to the special effect is displayed in full screen. .. FIG. 65 (c) shows an example of a screen in which the display shifts to the normal effect after the display of FIG. 65 (b), and the decorative symbol 504 temporarily stops in the hit mode in the normal effect. In FIG. 65 (c), the effect of highlighting the hit by the animation display of the decorative symbol 504 is executed, and the character portion displayed along with the number “3” indicating the symbol type is enlarged. An animation display (also called a symbol action display) is performed with the action. FIG. 65 (d) shows an example of a screen in which the decorative symbol 504 is fixedly stopped after the display of FIG. 65 (c). In FIG. 65 (d), the character portion of the decorative symbol 504 is displayed in a normal size, and the decorative symbol 504 is fixedly stopped at the symbol combination of "333" which is the winning mode. At this time, the simple symbol 500 displayed at the lower right of the screen is stopped and displayed with the symbol combination of "333" which is the same symbol combination as the decorative symbol 504, suggesting that the symbol is stopped.

FIG. 66 is a diagram schematically showing an effect process in which the decorative symbol revariates after the execution of the special effect. FIG. 66A shows an example of a screen in which the decorative symbol 502 is temporarily stopped in a detached mode in a specific effect, and the symbol combination of “343” indicating that the decorative symbol 502 is detached after the display of FIG. 63 (a) is used. Indicates a state in which it is temporarily stopped. FIG. 66 (b) shows an example of a screen of a special effect suggesting a transition to a normal effect after the display of FIG. 66 (a), and like FIG. 63 (c), an image dedicated to the special effect is displayed in full screen. .. In FIG. 66 (b), the display colors of the character image 516, the title image 518, and the background display 522 are different from those in FIG. 63 (c), and can be displayed in display colors suggesting high expectations such as red and gold. is there. By setting the display color of the image dedicated to the special effect to a high-expectation color, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the revival effect will be executed after the end of the special effect, and that the occurrence of the revival effect will be confirmed. FIG. 66 (c) shows an example of a screen in which the display shifts to the normal effect after the display of FIG. 66 (b), and the decorative symbol 504 temporarily stops in the normal effect in the detached mode. In FIG. 66 (c), the decorative symbol 504 is maintained in the temporarily stopped state, and the simple symbol 500 at the lower right of the screen also continues to be displayed in a variable manner. FIG. 66 (d) shows an example of a screen in which the decorative symbol 504 revariates after the display of FIG. 66 (c). The re-variation of the decorative symbol 504 suggests that the effect is continuously performed and the revival effect is executed.

In a certain embodiment, it may be possible to execute an operation effect (button effect) for instructing the player to input an operation to the operation input means (effect button or effect lever) during the variable display of the symbol. The specific effect may be started when the input operation to the operation input means during the execution of the operation effect is triggered or when the operation effect is completed. It may be possible to display a special effect (eye catch effect) suggesting a transition to the normal effect on the effect display device after the end of the specific effect and before the stop display of the symbol. It may be possible to start the normal effect after the end of the special effect. The duration of the special effect differs depending on whether or not there is an input operation to the operation input means during the execution of the operation effect, or depending on the timing at which the input operation to the operation input means is performed during the execution of the operation effect. May be good.

In a certain embodiment, when there is no input operation to the operation input means during the execution of the operation effect, the time for the decorative symbol to maintain the temporarily stopped state after the end of the special effect may be longer than the duration of the special effect. On the other hand, when there is an input operation to the operation input means during the execution of the operation effect, the time for the decorative symbol to maintain the temporarily stopped state after the end of the special effect may be shorter than the duration of the special effect.

In a certain embodiment, the first type of special effect (eye catch effect) and the second type of special effect (eye catch effect) may be feasible. The time for the decorative symbol to maintain the temporarily stopped state after the end of the second type of special effect may be longer than the time for the decorative symbol to maintain the temporarily stopped state after the end of the first type of special effect.

In a certain embodiment, it may be possible to execute an operation effect (button effect) for instructing the player to perform an input operation to the operation input means (effect button or effect lever) while the game is in progress. The player may be shown that the input operation to the operation input means is within the valid period when the operation effect is started. It may be possible to execute a generation suggestion effect (button fanning effect) that suggests the occurrence of the operation effect before the start of the operation effect. The elapsed time from the start of the occurrence suggestion effect to the start of the valid period may be longer than the elapsed time from the start to the end of the valid period.

In a certain embodiment, a plurality of types of operation effects may be feasible. The length of the valid period of each of the plurality of types of operation effects may be the same. The time from the start of the fluctuation of the symbol to the start of any of the plurality of types of operation effects may differ depending on the type of operation effect to be executed. The longer the time from the start of the fluctuation of the symbol to the start of the operation effect, the easier it may be that the type of operation effect having a relatively high expectation is executed.

In a certain embodiment, it may be possible to execute a plurality of types of generation suggestion effects (button fanning effects). The execution time of each of the plurality of types of occurrence suggestion effects may be longer than the length of the valid period of the operation effects. The execution time of each of the plurality of types of occurrence suggestion effects may be different. The longer the time from the start of fluctuation of the symbol to the start of any of the plurality of types of occurrence suggestion effects, the easier it may be that the types of occurrence suggestion effects having a relatively long execution time are executed.

(4. Step-up production)
FIG. 67 is a diagram schematically showing the production process of the step-up effect. The "step-up effect" in this embodiment is an effect in which a continuous suggestion effect that suggests the continuation of the effect due to a symbol change can be executed a plurality of times, and the effect is gradually advanced according to the number of times the continuous suggestion effect is executed. Say that. As the step-up effect in this embodiment, there is a pseudo continuous variation effect that suggests the continuation of the effect by temporarily stopping and re-variating the decorative symbol, and a special effect that suggests the continuation of the effect by an effect different from the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol. There is a step-up effect. In the special step-up effect, the continuation of the effect is suggested by the dedicated screen effect such as the cut-in effect and the movable accessory effect that operates the movable accessory 66.

FIG. 67A shows an effect process of a pseudo continuous variation effect in which the continuation of the effect is suggested by the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol. FIG. 67A shows a case where a three-step pseudo continuous variation is executed before the decorative symbol reaches the reach. A normal effect is executed at the start of the change of the decorative symbol, and the first stage of the pseudo continuous change effect starts in the middle of the effect. At the end of the first stage, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, and the first continuous suggestion effect is executed, which suggests whether or not the effect is continued depending on whether or not the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is re-variated. When the effect is continued in the second stage, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at the end of the second stage, and the second continuous suggestion effect is executed depending on whether or not the temporarily stopped decorative symbol changes again. When the effect is continued in the third stage, it is suggested that the effect is continued by the decorative symbol becoming the reach mode at the end of the third stage, and the development effect such as the super reach effect is executed. At the end of the first stage, the second stage, or the third stage, the decorative symbol may be fixed and stopped, resulting in an effect process in which the effect is not continued.

In the pseudo-continuous variation effect of FIG. 67 (a), the pseudo-continuous variation of only one stage or two stages may be executed according to the progress of the effect, or the pseudo-continuous variation of four or more stages may be executed. In the pseudo-continuous variation effect, a display may be made to indicate to the player which stage of the pseudo-variation effect is being executed. For example, "1st stage" or "1st stage" is displayed during the execution of the 1st stage production, and "2nd stage" or "2nd stage" is displayed during the execution of the 2nd stage production. May be done. During the execution of the third stage production, "third stage" or "third stage" may be displayed, or "final stage" or "MAX" may be displayed to indicate that the production is the final stage. It may be displayed. It should be noted that, during the execution of the first stage production, the player may not know whether or not the pseudo continuous fluctuation production will occur. Therefore, the display indicating the stage of the production is not displayed during the execution of the first stage production. You may. In other words, the "○ th" and "○ th" are displayed only during the execution of the second and subsequent stages of the production, and these displays may not be displayed during the execution of the first stage of the production. That is, the display indicating the effect stage may not be displayed until the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped for the first time, and the display indicating the effect stage may be displayed after the decorative symbol is re-variated after the first temporary stop.

In the pseudo-continuous variation effect of FIG. 67 (a), the start effect may be executed at the start of the first stage effect. The start effect may be a cut-in effect that suggests a transition from a normal effect to a pseudo-continuous variation effect, or may be an accessory effect in which a movable accessory operates. When the start effect is executed, the background display of the effect may change before and after the start effect. Specifically, the background display for the normal effect may be changed to the background display for the pseudo continuous variation effect. The pseudo-continuous variation effect may be executed in a display mode in which the normal effect continues, and the background display may not change before and after the start effect. That is, the background display of the pseudo continuous variation effect may be the same as the background display of the normal effect. When the background display of the pseudo continuous variation effect is the same as the background display of the normal effect, the start effect does not have to be executed, and the effect display does not switch between the normal effect and the first stage of the pseudo continuous variation effect. It may be executed continuously. That is, the normal effect at the start of the variation may be the first stage of the pseudo continuous variation effect.

In the continuation suggestion effect in the pseudo continuous variation effect of FIG. 67 (a), the decorative symbol in the display form that can be displayed in the normal effect at the start of the variation may be temporarily stopped, and may not be displayed in the normal effect. The special symbol may be temporarily stopped. As the special symbol, for example, a symbol indicating a wording suggesting that the production such as "continuation", "continuation", and "NEXT" may be continued may be used. In the continuation suggestion effect in the pseudo continuous variation effect, only one special symbol may be temporarily stopped, or all three rows of decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped in a mode including at least one special symbol. In the continuation suggestion effect in the pseudo continuous variation effect, the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped in a detached mode instead of the reach mode. As a symbol combination at the time of temporary stop of the decorative symbol, a "misaligned stitch" may be used in which one or two rows of the three rows of decorative symbols deviate from the hitting mode.

FIG. 67B shows an effect process of a special step-up effect in which the continuation of the effect is suggested by the dedicated screen effect. The special step-up effect is a dedicated effect different from the normal effect, and the effect proceeds with a background display different from the background display of the normal effect. As a special step-up effect, for example, a "street battle effect" is executed in which the main character (leading role) advances while kicking a large number of small fish characters in the city. The special step-up effect shown in FIG. 67 (b) has a three-step effect process similar to the pseudo continuous variation effect shown in FIG. 67 (a). The production becomes feasible. At the start of the special step-up effect, a start effect that suggests entering a "street battle" is executed.

In the first stage of the street battle production, a display indicating staying in the first stage such as "first stage" is made, and the street battle production continues. After that, the continuation suggestion effect of displaying the wording of "second stage" on the full screen at the end of the first stage suggests continuation to the second stage. After that, the second stage street battle effect is executed, and a display indicating that the player stays in the second stage, such as "second stage", is displayed on the screen. At the end of the second stage, the continuation suggestion effect of displaying the wording of the "third stage" on the full screen suggests the continuation to the third stage. After that, the street battle effect of the third stage is executed, and a display indicating that the player stays in the third stage, such as "third stage", is displayed on the screen. By displaying a wording suggesting that the final stage has been reached, such as "final stage", at the end of the third stage on the full screen, a development suggestion effect suggesting continuation to the subsequent development effect is executed. If the special step-up effect ends in the middle, the decorative symbol is removed and stopped and displayed without the continuation suggestion effect being executed at the end of the specific stage.

FIG. 67 (c) shows the production process of the special step-up production, which suggests the continuation of the production by the character production. As the special step-up effect of FIG. 67 (c), for example, an "episode effect" in which episodes related to the characters appearing are displayed in order in a story format is executed. The special step-up effect shown in FIG. 67 (c) has a three-stage effect process similar to the pseudo continuous variation effect shown in FIG. 67 (a), and the episodes of the specific character continue from the first episode to the third episode. As a result, the subsequent development production becomes feasible. At the start of the special step-up effect, a start effect that suggests entering the episode effect is executed. In the first stage of the special step-up production, a display indicating staying in the first stage such as "Episode 1" is made, and the story progresses. After that, at the end of the first stage (first episode), the continuation suggestion effect of operating the movable accessory is executed, and the continuation to the second stage (second episode) is suggested. After that, the episode production of the second stage is executed, and the continuation suggestion effect of operating the movable accessory at the end of the second stage (second episode) suggests the continuation to the third stage (third episode). After that, the episode production of the third stage is executed, and the development suggestion production that activates the movable accessory at the end of the third stage (third episode) suggests the continuation to the subsequent development production.

FIG. 68 is a diagram schematically showing the production process of the special step-up effect, and shows a screen example of the “street battle effect” of FIG. 67 (b). FIG. 68A is a screen example of the start effect of the street battle, and the wording “Street battle rush !!” is displayed in the center of the screen. FIG. 68B shows a screen example of the first stage street battle effect, and shows the effect process in which the main character defeats a large number of enemy characters. In the upper right corner of the screen of FIG. 68 (b), the wording of "1st STAGE" indicating that the person is staying in the first stage is displayed. FIG. 68 (c) shows a screen example of the continuation suggestion effect to the second stage, and the wording of “2nd STAGE” suggesting the transition to the second stage is displayed in the center of the screen. FIG. 68D shows a screen example of the street battle effect of the second stage, and the effect process in which the main character battles with an enemy character different from that of the first stage is displayed. In the upper right corner of the screen of FIG. 68 (d), the wording of "2nd STAGE" indicating that the person is staying in the second stage is displayed. In the special step-up effect shown in FIGS. 68 (a) to 68 (d), the decorative symbol is hidden, and the variable display of the simple symbol 500 displayed at the lower right of the screen suggests that the symbol is changing.

The step-up effects shown in FIGS. 67 (a) to 67 (c) may be configured so that the effect times are the same as each other. In other words, the effect time of the special step-up effect of FIGS. 67 (b) and 67 (c) may be configured to be the same as the effect time of the pseudo continuous variation effect of FIG. 67 (a). Further, the effect time of each stage of the special step-up effect of FIGS. 67 (b) and 67 (c) is configured to be the same as the pseudo variation time of each stage of the pseudo continuous variation effect of FIG. 67 (a). May be good. As a result, it is possible to execute a special step-up effect in which the stage of the effect progresses at the same timing as when the pseudo-variation is repeated a plurality of times in the pseudo continuous variation effect. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the pseudo-variation is repeated a plurality of times even though the decorative pattern is not temporarily stopped and re-variated in the special step-up effect. .. The production time from the start effect of the special step-up effect and the pseudo continuous variation effect to the development suggestion effect may be the same, while the effect time of each stage of the special step-up effect and the pseudo continuous variation effect may be different. .. For example, if the start or end timings of the special step-up effect and the pseudo continuous variation effect of a specific stage (the end of the first stage, the start of the second stage, the end of the second stage, or the start timing of the third stage) are different from each other. You may let it.

The development effect that can be transferred after the end of the special step-up effect of FIGS. 67 (b) and 67 (c) may be the same as the development effect that can be transferred after the end of the pseudo continuous variation effect of FIG. As a result, in the symbol variation in which a specific development effect is executed, it is possible to prepare an effect pattern in which a special step-up effect or a pseudo continuous variation effect is executed before the start of the specific development effect, and the variation of the effect is increased. be able to. In addition, the production expectation of the special step-up effect and the production expectation of the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect are made different from each other. For example, the production expectation of the special step-up effect is higher than the production expectation of the pseudo continuous variation effect. You may do so. As a result, depending on whether the special step-up effect or the pseudo continuous variation effect is executed before the specific development effect is executed, the degree of expectation of the effect over one symbol change period from the start of the change to the stop of the symbol can be obtained. It is possible to make a difference, and it is possible to prepare a large number of production variations with different expectations.

The step-up effect shown in FIGS. 67 (a) to 67 (c) may be executed after the decorative symbol is in the reach mode, not before the decorative symbol is in the reach mode. For example, the pseudo continuous variation effect or the special step-up effect may be started when the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode. In this case, the start effect of the pseudo continuous variation effect of FIG. 67 (a) is executed by the effect display in which the left and right symbol rows of the three rows of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the same symbol to be in the reach mode. You may. The start effect of the special step-up effect of FIGS. 67 (b) and 67 (c) may be executed immediately after the decorative symbol is in the reach mode, and is different from the effect display in which the decorative symbol is in the reach mode. May suggest the start of a special step-up effect. Further, the continuation suggestion effect of the pseudo continuous variation effect of FIG. 67A may be an effect display in which a special symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol row of the decorative symbols in the reach mode. Further, when the step-up effect shown in FIGS. 67 (a) to 67 (c) is executed after the decorative symbol is in the reach mode, the button effect may be executed as the development suggestion effect, and the button effect may be executed as an opportunity. The development to the development production may be suggested by the possible movement of the character. Further, the button fanning effect may be executed before the button effect executed as the development suggestion effect.

FIG. 69 is a diagram schematically showing the effect process of the pseudo continuous variation effect. In each of FIGS. 69 (a) to 69 (c), three pseudo-variations are performed by temporarily stopping and re-variating the decorative symbol twice in one symbol variation period from the start of the symbol variation to the stop of the variation. It is a pseudo continuous fluctuation effect that executes. In the third pseudo-variation, which is the final round, a development effect with a high degree of expectation is executed, and it is possible to execute an effect that incites whether or not the decorative pattern is a hit. In each of FIGS. 69 (a) to 69 (c), the timing at which the decorative symbol is in the reach mode is different.

FIG. 69A shows an example of the effect process in which the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode in the third pseudo-variation. The normal effect is executed at the start of the fluctuation, and the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped for the first time during the execution of the normal effect. After that, the decorative symbol re-variates during the execution of the normal effect, and the second pseudo-variation is started. After that, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped for the second time during the execution of the normal effect. After that, the decorative symbol is re-variated during the execution of the normal effect, and the third pseudo-variation is started. After that, in the middle of the third pseudo-variation, the decorative design becomes the reach mode, and the development effect is executed with the reach as an opportunity. At the end of the development production, the decorative design will be temporarily stopped and then fixedly stopped. FIG. 69A shows a case where the normal effect is continuously executed until the decorative symbol reaches the reach mode, but a specific effect different from the normal effect may be executed at an arbitrary timing. .. When executing the specific effect, a background display different from the background display used in the normal effect may be used.

FIG. 69B shows an example of the effect process in which the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode in the second pseudo-variation. The effect process in the first pseudo-variation in FIG. 69 (b) is the same as the effect process in the first pseudo-variation in FIG. 69 (a). In FIG. 69 (b), after the first temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, and the special effect is executed with the reach as an opportunity. The special effect has an effect process in which the effect time is relatively long, and has a longer effect time than the second pseudo-variation period of FIG. 69 (a) in which the special effect is not executed. An example of a special effect is a battle effect in which the process in which the main character battles with an enemy character is displayed, or a mission effect in which the process until the main character completes a specific mission is displayed. At the end of the special effect, an effect that encourages whether or not the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect continues is executed. For example, an effect of inciting whether or not the special symbol suggesting the continuation of the effect is temporarily stopped, or whether the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in a detached manner is executed. In the special production, it is suggested that the decoration pattern will change again after the temporary stop due to the victory in the battle production or the achievement of the mission in the mission production. Therefore, it can be said that the special effect shown in FIG. 69B is an effect suggesting whether or not the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect can be continued. When the decorative symbol is re-variated after the end of the special effect and the third pseudo-variation is executed, the development effect is executed triggered by the re-variation of the decorative symbol. At the end of the development production, the decorative design will be temporarily stopped and then fixedly stopped.

FIG. 69 (c) shows an example of the effect process in which the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode in the first pseudo-variation. In FIG. 69 (c), the normal effect is executed at the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol, and then the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, and the special effect is executed with the reach as an opportunity. The special effect of FIG. 69 (c) is the same as the special effect of FIG. 69 (b), and has an effect process in which the effect time is relatively long. The special effect of FIG. 69 (c) has a longer effect time than the first pseudo-variation period of FIG. 69 (a) in which the special effect is not executed. After executing the special effect, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped for the first time in response to the end of the special effect. After that, the decorative pattern is re-variated and the second pseudo-variation is executed, and the special effect is changed to the normal effect. A chance-up effect suggesting that the degree of expectation increases in response to the start of the second pseudo-variation may be executed. After that, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped for the second time during the execution of the normal effect. After that, when the decorative symbol is re-variated and the third pseudo-variation is executed, the development effect is executed triggered by the re-variation of the decorative symbol. At the end of the development production, the decorative design will be temporarily stopped and then fixedly stopped.

According to the pseudo continuous variation effect including the special effect of FIGS. 69 (b) and 69 (c), the special effect is not executed by enabling the special effect to be executed in the pseudo variation other than the final round. It can be a production with a higher degree of expectation than a pseudo continuous fluctuation production. In addition, instead of simply temporarily stopping and re-variating the decorative symbol during the execution of the normal effect to suggest whether or not the pseudo continuous variation effect can be continued, the decorative symbol is set as the reach mode and the special effect is triggered by the reach. By starting and suggesting whether or not the production can be continued, it is possible to make the production process with a higher degree of expectation.

In a certain embodiment, there may be a first effect (pseudo continuous fluctuation effect), a second effect (special step-up effect), and a third effect (development effect). In one symbol variation, the third effect may be executed after the first effect is executed. In one symbol variation, the third effect may be executed after the second effect is executed. The first effect and the second effect include a continuation suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the displayed effect continues, and have an effect process in which the effect progresses stepwise according to the number of executions of the continuation suggestion effect. May be good. In the first effect, the continuation of the effect may be suggested by the first continuation suggestion effect in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and then re-variated. As the second effect, the continuation of the effect may be suggested by a second continuation suggestion effect (dedicated screen effect, movable character effect) different from the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol. The third effect may be a reach effect including a process in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the reach mode.

In a certain embodiment, the production time of the first effect (pseudo continuous fluctuation effect) and the effect time of the second effect (special step-up effect) may be the same. In a certain embodiment, after the first continuous suggestion effect (temporary stop and revariation of the decorative symbol) is executed in the first effect (pseudo continuous variation effect), the next first continuous suggestion effect (temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol) is executed. The time value until the re-variation) is executed, and the next second continuation suggestion after the second continuation suggestion effect (dedicated screen effect or character movable effect) is executed in the second effect (special step-up effect). The time value until the effect (dedicated screen effect or movable character effect) is executed may be the same. In a certain embodiment, the decorative symbol may be displayed during the execution of the first effect, while the decorative symbol may be hidden during the execution of the second effect.

In a certain embodiment, even if it is possible to execute a pseudo continuous fluctuation effect that makes it appear as if a plurality of symbol fluctuations have been executed by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol in one symbol variation and then re-variating it. Good. In the pseudo continuous variation effect, the special effect may be started when the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode. The special effect may include an effect process that suggests whether or not the decorative symbol re-variates after the temporary stop of the decorative symbol to continue the pseudo continuous variation effect. As the pseudo continuous variation effect, there may be a first pseudo continuous variation effect in which the special effect is executed and a second pseudo continuous variation effect in which the special effect is not executed. In the first pseudo continuous variation effect, the time value from when the decorative symbol reaches the reach mode before the start of the special effect until the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped after the start of the special effect is determined by the decorative symbol in the second pseudo continuous variation effect. It may be longer than the time value of one pseudo-variation period from the re-variation to the next temporary stop of the decorative symbol.

(5. Special pseudo-ream zone)
FIG. 70 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the game flow. In the game flow of FIG. 70, "normal mode", "first time saving mode", and "second time saving mode" are prepared as production modes during the normal game, and it is possible to shift to the "special pseudo-ream zone" in the second time saving mode. is there. The normal mode is an initial mode executed at the start of the game. The normal mode is executed in the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state (so-called low probability and low ball entry state), and becomes a so-called left-handed state. Therefore, in the normal mode, the special figure 1 is a game aiming to be a big hit. In the normal mode, for example, the game progresses along the flow of the variable effect shown in FIG. 40, and the above-mentioned "1. advance suggestion effect", "2. fixed expectation effect", "3. button effect", and "4. step up""Direction" etc. can be executed. When the special figure 1 becomes a big hit in the normal mode, the special game is executed, and after the special game is completed, the mode is changed to the "first time saving mode" or the "second time saving mode". In the game flow of FIG. 70, the transition destination is determined according to the type of jackpot, and when it becomes a "3R jackpot", it shifts to the first time saving mode, and when it becomes a "10R jackpot", it shifts to the second time saving mode. Will be migrated.

The ratio of special figure 1 to "10R big hit" is set very low. For example, the ratio of "10R big hit" of special figure 1 is 5%, and the ratio of "3R big hit" of special figure 1 is 95%. Is. The "10R jackpot" is always with a probability change, and is shifted to the probability fluctuation state after the execution of the special game of 10R. On the other hand, the "3R jackpot" includes a "3R probability variation jackpot" that shifts to the probability fluctuation state and a "3R normal jackpot" that does not shift to the probability fluctuation state. In the case of "3R probability variation jackpot", the player shifts to the probability fluctuation state after executing the 3R special game. On the other hand, in the case of "3R normal jackpot", the game shifts to the normal probability state after the execution of the 3R special game. The probabilities of "3R probability variation jackpot" and "3R normal jackpot" are about the same. For example, the proportion of "3R probability variation jackpot" is 50%, and the proportion of "3R normal jackpot" is 45%.

The first time saving mode is shifted to the case where the normal mode becomes "3R probability variation jackpot" or "3R normal jackpot". The first time saving mode is executed in the easy entry state (high entry state), and becomes a so-called right-handed state. Therefore, in the first time saving mode, the special figure 2 is a game aiming to be a big hit. The first time saving mode is executed in a state in which whether it is a probability fluctuation state or a normal probability state is concealed, and becomes a so-called latent probability change state. The final period is set in the first time saving mode, and when the symbol variation of a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is completed, the first time saving mode is shifted to the normal mode. When a big hit is made in the first time saving mode, a special game is executed, and after the special game is completed, the game shifts to the "second time saving mode". As the jackpot of the special figure 2, "10R probability variation jackpot", "3R probability variation jackpot", and "3R normal jackpot" are prepared as in the special figure 1. In special figure 2, the ratio of "10R big hit" is set higher than that in special figure 1. For example, the proportion of "10R jackpot" in Special Figure 2 is 50%, the proportion of "3R probability variation jackpot" is 25%, and the proportion of "3R normal jackpot" is 25%.

The second time saving mode is shifted to the case where the 10R big hit is obtained in the normal mode or the case where the big hit is obtained in the first time saving mode. In addition, even if a big hit is made in the second time saving mode, the mode is shifted to the second time saving mode. Similar to the first time-saving mode, the second time-saving mode is executed in an easy-to-enter state (high-entry state), becomes a so-called right-handed state, and is a game aiming at a big hit in Special Figure 2. Further, in the second time saving mode, it can be said to be a "ream villa mode" because it is a game that aims to loop the second time saving mode by repeatedly generating the big hit of the special figure 2. In the second time saving mode, the probability fluctuating state or the normal probability state is set depending on the type of the jackpot that triggered the transition to the second time saving mode. When it becomes a 10R jackpot and shifts to the second time reduction mode, it is confirmed that it will shift to the probability fluctuation state, so the second time reduction mode is executed in a manner that the player can know that it is in the probability fluctuation state. May be done. On the other hand, when the 3R jackpot is set and the mode is shifted to the second time saving mode, the player does not necessarily know which of the "3R probability variation jackpot" and the "3R normal jackpot" is the jackpot. The second time saving mode may be executed in a latent probability change state in which the player does not know whether or not there is. The final period is set in the second time saving mode, and when the symbol variation of a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is completed, the second time saving mode is shifted to the normal mode.

The second time saving mode is composed of two stages of production modes, a "special pseudo-ream zone" and a "RUSH zone". The special pseudo-ream zone is executed from the transition to the second time saving mode until the symbol variation of a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) is completed. In the special pseudo-continuous zone, it is possible to execute the pseudo-continuous fluctuation effect in which the number of pseudo-variations is 3, 6, 12, or 18 times, and one pseudo-variation period is shortened to about 1 second or less than 1 second. As a result, it becomes a production process that makes it appear as if a very large number of symbol fluctuations were executed at high speed. In addition, in the symbol variation of a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) which is the end of the special pseudo-ream zone, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation effect does not have to be executed, and the special pseudo-ream zone becomes a big hit or the special pseudo-ream zone becomes An effect may be executed to encourage whether the player finishes and shifts to the RUSH zone.

The RUSH zone is shifted at the end of the special pseudo-ream zone, and is executed from the transition to the second time saving mode until the symbol variation of a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is completed. If the end of the second time saving mode is 100 symbol fluctuations and the end of the special pseudo-ream zone is 20 symbol fluctuations, the RUSH zone can be continued until 80 symbol fluctuations are completed in the RUSH zone. .. In the RUSH zone, a background display different from that of the special pseudo-ream zone is used, and the production process is not accompanied by pseudo-continuous fluctuation. The RUSH zone may be composed of a plurality of stages of production. For example, the first half of the RUSH zone (for example, until the end of 60 symbol changes) is in the "chance mode", while the second half of the RUSH zone (for example, until the end of the remaining 20 symbol changes) is in the "pinch mode". It may be configured. For example, in the chance mode, the production process may proceed in a situation where there are few enemy characters, whereas in the pinch mode, the production process may proceed in a situation surrounded by many enemy characters.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of the effect process of the special pseudo-ream zone. Each of FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (d) shows a screen example when the decorative symbol 506 is temporarily stopped in the pseudo continuous variation effect. For example, FIG. 71 (a) is an example of a screen in a temporarily stopped state for the first time, FIG. 71 (b) is an example of a screen in a temporarily stopped state for the second time, and FIG. 71 (c) is a screen example for the third time. It is a screen example of the temporary stop state, and FIG. 71 (d) is the screen example of the 4th temporary stop state. An image 536 of the main character is displayed in the center of the screen, and a state in which the main character decides various poses according to the pseudo fluctuation of the decorative symbol 506 is displayed. At the lower center of the screen, a decorative symbol 506 composed of three rows of symbols is displayed. The decorative symbol 506 has a display form in which the decorative symbol 506 is composed of only a portion indicating a number for identifying the symbol type and does not include an incidental display portion such as a character. On each of the left and right sides of the screen, a band image 532 with the wording "special ZONE" indicating that the user is staying in the special pseudo-ream zone is displayed. The band image 532 extends in the vertical direction of the screen, and the wording of "special ZONE" can be displayed so as to be scrolled in the vertical direction. In the upper right corner of the screen, the wording "right-handed" indicating that the screen is in a right-handed state and an image 534 showing a right-pointing arrow are displayed. Is displayed in a variable manner.

In the special pseudo-ream zone, 1) the symbol combination at the time of temporary stop of the decorative symbol 506, 2) the display color of the band image 532, and 3) the display mode of the main character image 536 suggests a high degree of expectation. Further, by changing the display modes of 1) to 3) in response to the execution of the pseudo-variation, it is suggested that the fluctuation is highly expected to be a big hit. For example, by gradually changing the display mode of 1) to 3) to the display mode of high expectation according to the increase in the number of pseudo-changes within one symbol change period, the change becomes a big hit. It is suggested that the degree of expectation is high. Further, in the special pseudo-ream zone, 4) the scroll display mode of the band image 532 is changed according to the hit / fail result or the look-ahead result of the fluctuation pattern, thereby suggesting a high degree of expectation of a big hit. For example, it is suggested that the display mode in which the band image 532 is scrolled at a low speed in a normal state is set, and the band image 532 is scrolled at a high speed or the band image 532 is scrolled at a high speed in a display mode in which the band image 532 is emphasized to achieve a high expectation. Make it possible.

FIG. 72 is a table showing an example of a symbol combination at the time of temporary stop of the decorative symbol 506. There are five types of symbol combinations at the time of temporary stop of the decorative symbol 506 in the special pseudo-ream zone: a) loose stitch, b) white order, c) blue same color, d) green same color, and e) red same color. Be prepared. The decorative symbols 506 used in the special pseudo-ream zone are numerical symbols of "1" to "9", and the even-numbered symbols of "2", "4", "6", and "8" are blue, and "1" and "5". The odd-numbered symbols of "9" are green, and the odd-numbered symbols of "3" and "7" are red. a) The loose stitch is a symbol combination in which the numbers of the three rows of decorative symbols 506 are all different. For example, in the symbol combination of "174" shown in FIG. 71 (a), the symbol color is "blue-red-green". .. b) The white order is a symbol combination in which the numbers of the three rows of decorative symbols 506 are sequentially increased by one, and is, for example, the symbol combination of "345" shown in FIG. 71 (b). b) In the white order symbol combination, a) in order to emphasize that it is different from the loose pattern combination, the symbol color is different from the normal blue-green-red, for example, a white symbol. The same color of c) to e) is a symbol combination in which the symbol colors of the three rows of decorative symbols 506 are the same. For example, a pattern in which the symbol color is all blue in the symbol combination of "468" shown in FIG. 71 (c), or a pattern in which the symbol color is all green in the symbol combination of "159" shown in FIG. 71 (d). It is a pattern that becomes. The degree of expectation of the symbol combination is set so that the degree of expectation increases stepwise in the order of a) to e), the degree of expectation of the disparity in a) is the lowest, and the degree of expectation of the red color of e) is the same. The highest degree of expectation is set.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol combination when the decorative symbol 506 is fixed and stopped. As a combination of symbols when the decorative symbol 506 in the special pseudo-ream zone is stopped, f) blue same color, g) green same color, h) red same color, i) blueprint, j) green, k) blue. Eight types are prepared: per figure, l) per green figure, and m) per red figure. f) The same blue color is a combination of symbols in which the left and right symbols have different numbers and the same color in blue, but the middle symbol is green or red. g) Green same color Gase is a combination of symbols in which the left and right symbols are different numbers in green and the same color is used, but the middle symbol is blue. h) Red same color Gase is a combination of symbols in which the left and right symbols have different numbers and the same color in red, but the middle symbol is blue. The same-colored gussets of f) to h) are selected when the reach mode is not reached before the final stop of the decorative symbol 506. i) Blueprint off is a combination of symbols in which the left and right symbols are blueprints with the same number and reach, but the middle symbol is different from the left and right symbols and is out of alignment. j) The green symbol off is a symbol combination in which the left and right symbols have the same number as the green symbol and the reach mode is obtained, but the middle symbol has a different number from the left and right symbols and is out of alignment. k) A blueprint hit is a combination of symbols in which three rows of symbols become blueprints with the same number and become a hit. l) A green symbol hit is a combination of symbols in which three rows of symbols become green symbols with the same number and become a hit. m) The red symbol hit is a combination of symbols in which the three rows of symbols become red symbols with the same number and become a hit. The symbol combinations i) to m) are selected when the reach mode is reached before the final stop of the decorative symbol 506. It should be noted that a) loose stitches may be used as the symbol combination at the time of fixed stop. Further, as the symbol combination at the time of temporary stop, the same color gasses of f) to h) may be used.

There are four types of display colors of the band image 532 in the special pseudo-ream zone: white, blue, green, and red. The display color of the band image 532 is set so that the degree of expectation is gradually increased in the order of white, blue, green, and red, the degree of expectation of white is the lowest, and the degree of expectation of red is the highest. The display color of the band image 532 in the special pseudo-ream zone may change with the start of fluctuation or the start of re-variation of the decorative symbol 506. For example, the display color of the band image 532 of FIG. 71 (a) is "white", but the display color changes with the subsequent re-variation of the decorative symbol 506, and the display of the band image 532 of FIG. 71 (b) is displayed. The color will be "blue". The display color may not change as a result of the re-variation of the decorative symbol 506. For example, the display color of the band image 532 may be maintained as "blue" as shown in FIG. 71 (c). The display color may change after the display color of the band image 532 is maintained over a plurality of pseudo fluctuations. For example, the display color of the band image 532 changes to "green" as shown in FIG. 71 (d). There is also. In this way, by gradually changing the display color of the band image 532 to a display color having a higher degree of expectation, it is suggested that the degree of expectation that the fluctuation becomes a big hit is high. In addition, "gold" may be used as the display color of the band image 532, and when the display color of the band image 532 is gold, the fluctuation becomes a big hit, or the reserved winning / failing lottery value becomes a big hit. It may be confirmed that That is, the golden band display may be a correct effect suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed.

The main character image 536 displayed in the center of the screen in the special pseudo-ream zone is displayed so as to continue the performance while deciding a plurality of types of poses. For example, about 6 types of fixed poses are prepared, and the production progresses by deciding a plurality of types of poses in order. At this time, the chance-up effect may be executed when a specific type of determined pose occurs, and the chance-up effect may suggest the continuation of the pseudo continuous variation effect. For example, it may be suggested that the 7th and subsequent pseudo-variations or the 13th and subsequent pseudo-variations continue by performing a specific type of fixed pose in the 6th pseudo-variation and the 12th pseudo-variation.

FIG. 74 is a diagram schematically showing an effect pattern that can be executed in the special pseudo-ream zone. In the special pseudo-ream zone, an effect pattern is prepared in which pseudo fluctuations of 1, 3, 6, 12, or 18 times are executed. FIG. 74A is a pattern in which one symbol variation is executed without executing the pseudo continuous variation. The effect time of the pattern of FIG. 74 (a) is about 2 to 3 seconds, and the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and fixedly stopped 1 to 2 seconds after the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol. FIG. 74B is a pattern in which the pseudo-variation is executed three times. After the start of the variation of the decorative symbol, the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol are executed twice, and the decorative symbol is generated by the third pseudo-variation. It will be in a temporary stop state and will stop fixedly. The one pseudo fluctuation period in FIG. 74 (b) is about 1 second, which is shorter than the one symbol fluctuation time in FIG. 74 (a). The effect time of the pattern shown in FIG. 74 (b) is about 4 to 5 seconds. FIG. 74 (c) shows a pattern in which the pseudo-variation is executed 6 times. After the start of the variation of the decorative symbol, the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol are executed 5 times, and the decorative symbol is executed at the 6th pseudo-variation. It will be in a temporary stop state and will stop fixedly. The one pseudo-variation period in FIG. 74 (c) is about 1 second, which is the same as the one pseudo-variation period in FIG. 74 (b). The effect time of the pattern shown in FIG. 74 (c) is about 7 to 8 seconds.

FIG. 74 (d) shows a pattern in which the pseudo-variation is executed six times. However, in the sixth pseudo-variation, the decorative symbol becomes a reach mode and the development effect can be executed. Different from the pattern. In the pattern of FIG. 74 (d), the effect process until the start of the sixth pseudo-variation is configured in the same manner as the pattern of FIG. 74 (c). On the other hand, the pattern of FIG. 74 (d) is configured to have a reach mode corresponding to the timing at which the decorative symbol stops fluctuating in the pattern of FIG. 74 (c). In the pattern of FIG. 74 (d), the button effect is executed when the decorative symbol reaches the reach in the sixth pseudo-variation, and when the decorative symbol comes off after the button effect is completed and the confirmation is stopped, the button is pressed. When a development effect with a high degree of expectation is executed after the end of the effect, there is a case where a direct hit jackpot is announced after the end of the button effect. When the development effect is executed in FIG. 74 (d), a pattern that becomes a big hit and a pattern that becomes a miss are prepared after that.

FIG. 74 (e) is a pattern in which the pseudo-variation is executed 12 times. The 1st to 6th pseudo-variations in the first half of FIG. 74 (e) are the same as the pattern in FIG. 74 (c), but the decorative symbols are not fixedly stopped by the 6th pseudo-variation and the temporary stop state is maintained. It differs from the pattern of FIG. 74 (c) in that it remains as it is. The time for the decorative symbol to maintain the temporarily stopped state in the sixth pseudo-variation in FIG. 74 (e) may be longer than the time for the decorative symbol to maintain the temporarily stopped state in the first to fifth pseudo-variations. A time of about 1 to 2 seconds may be secured. During the time when the decorative symbol maintains the temporarily stopped state in the sixth pseudo-variation of FIG. 74 (e), a continuation suggestion effect suggesting that the seventh and subsequent pseudo-variations continue may be executed. For example, when the character in the center of the screen decides a specific type of pose, a chance-up effect suggesting the continuation of the pseudo-variation may be executed. It is not necessary to execute the continuation suggestion effect in the sixth pseudo-variation in FIG. 74 (e).

The 7 to 12 pseudo-variations in the latter half of FIG. 74 (e) are the same as the pattern of FIG. 74 (d). After the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped by the sixth pseudo-variation, the decorative symbol is re-variated and the seventh pseudo-variation is performed. After that, the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol are executed five times, and the twelfth pseudo-variation is executed. In the pattern of FIG. 74 (e), the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode in the twelfth pseudo-variation, and the button effect is executed with the reach as an opportunity. When the decorative design comes off after the end of the button effect and the confirmation is stopped, when the development effect with high expectation is executed after the end of the button effect, or when the big hit is announced after the end of the button effect. Is prepared. Also in FIG. 74 (e), when the development effect is executed, a pattern that becomes a big hit and a pattern that becomes a miss are prepared after that.

FIG. 74 (f) is a pattern in which the pseudo-variation is executed 18 times. The 1 to 6 pseudo-variations and the 7 to 12 pseudo-variations in FIG. 74 (f) are the same as the 1 to 6 pseudo-variations in the first half of FIG. 74 (e). Also in the pattern of FIG. 74 (f), the time for the decorative symbol to maintain the temporarily stopped state in the 6th and 12th pseudo fluctuations is that the decorative symbol is provisionally in the 1st to 5th and 7th to 11th pseudo fluctuations. It may be longer than the time to maintain the stopped state. In addition, a continuation suggestion effect suggesting that the 7th and subsequent pseudo-variations or the 13th and subsequent pseudo-variations continue during the time during which the decorative symbol maintains the temporarily stopped state in the 6th and 12th pseudo-variations in FIG. 74 (f). May be executed. It is not necessary to execute the continuous suggestion effect at least one of the sixth and twelfth pseudo-variations. The 13 to 18 pseudo-variations in FIG. 74 (f) are similar to the pattern in FIG. 74 (d). After the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped by the 12th pseudo-variation, the decorative symbol is re-variated and the 13th pseudo-variation is performed, and then the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol is executed 5 times, 18 The second pseudo-variation is executed. At the 18th pseudo-variation, the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, and the button effect is executed with the reach as an opportunity. The pattern of FIG. 74 (f) is selected only when the winning / failing result is a big hit, and a pattern in which a high-expectation development effect is executed after the end of the button effect to become a big hit and a big hit after the end of the button effect. A pattern that will be a direct hit jackpot that announces confirmation will be prepared.

In the special pseudo-ream zone, 6 pseudo-variations are used as the basic pattern, and 12 and 18 pseudo-variations, which are multiples of 6 times, can be executed. That is, when the number of pseudo fluctuations of the basic pattern is N times (N is an integer of 2 or more), M × which is M times the basic pattern such as 2 × N times and 3 × N times (M is an integer of 2 or more). A multiple pattern that executes pseudo-variation N times is prepared. In the basic pattern, the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol are executed N-1 times to execute the pseudo-variation N times. In the multiple pattern, the pseudo-variation of M × N times is executed by temporarily stopping and re-variating the decorative symbol M × N-1 times.

In the special pseudo-ream zone, it is possible to execute the pseudo-variation effect of the basic pattern in a plurality of consecutive symbol fluctuations, and it is possible to make it appear as if the pseudo-variation of the multiple pattern is executed. In other words, by executing the multiple pattern in one symbol variation, it is possible to execute the pseudo variation effect of the basic pattern multiple times and make it appear as if the symbol variation was executed multiple times. To do. For example, when the pseudo-variation pattern of 6 times is executed twice in succession, it can be made to appear as if the pseudo-variation pattern of 12 times is executed. Further, when the pseudo-variation pattern of 6 times is executed three times in a row, it can be made to appear as if the pseudo-variation pattern of 18 times is executed. Further, when the 6-time pseudo-variation pattern and the 12-time pseudo-variation pattern are continuously executed, it can be made to appear as if the 18-time pseudo-variation pattern was executed.

FIG. 75 shows an effect pattern in which the pseudo variation is executed 12 times. (1) is a pattern in which the pseudo-variation is executed 12 times in one symbol variation period, and the pattern of FIG. 74 (e) is executed. (2) is a pattern in which the pseudo-variation is executed 12 times in the two symbol variation periods, and the pattern of FIG. 74 (d) is executed after the execution of the pattern of FIG. 74 (c). In both the patterns (1) and (2), an interval is provided at the end of the sixth pseudo-variation, and the effect process is in that the development effect can be executed in the reach mode at the twelfth pseudo-variation. Common. The difference between the patterns (1) and (2) is whether the decoration symbol can be continuously suggested without being fixedly stopped after the temporary stop in the 6th pseudo-variation, or it is decorated in the 6th pseudo-variation. Whether the symbol will be fixedly stopped after being temporarily stopped. Therefore, it can be said that it is difficult to distinguish between the pattern (1) and the pattern (2) unless the production mode at the end of the sixth pseudo-variation is carefully observed.

FIG. 76 shows an effect pattern in which the pseudo-variation is executed 18 times. (1) is a pattern in which the pseudo-variation is executed 18 times in one symbol variation period, and the pattern of FIG. 74 (f) is executed. (2) is a pattern in which the pseudo-variation is executed 18 times in the two symbol variation periods, and the pattern of FIG. 74 (e) is executed after the execution of the pattern of FIG. 74 (c). (3) is a pattern in which the symbol variation is executed 18 times in the symbol variation period of 3 times, and the pattern of FIG. 74 (d) is executed after the pattern of FIG. 74 (c) is executed twice in succession. Will be done. In any of the patterns (1) to (3), an interval is provided at the end of the 6th and 12th pseudo-variations, and the 18th pseudo-variation becomes a reach mode and the development effect can be executed. The production process is common. The difference between the patterns (1) to (3) is whether the continuous suggestion effect can be executed without the decorative symbol being fixedly stopped after the temporary stop in the 6th and 12th pseudo-variations, or the 6th and 12th times. Whether the decorative pattern will be fixedly stopped after the temporary stop. Therefore, it can be said that it is difficult to distinguish the patterns (1) to (3) unless the production mode at the end of the sixth and twelfth pseudo-variations is carefully observed.

In the special pseudo-ream zone, the expectation that a big hit will be obtained when the pseudo-variation of 12 or 18 times, which is a multiple pattern, is executed is higher than the case where the pseudo-variation of 6 times, which is the basic pattern, is executed. It is configured to be. In such a configuration, by making it possible to execute the effect pattern as shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, is the pseudo variation of the multiple pattern executed even though the pseudo variation of the basic pattern is executed? It is possible to give an impression like this to the player and raise the expectation of the player. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the special pseudo-ream zone, and it is possible to make it difficult to understand the remaining number of fluctuations until the end of the special pseudo-ream zone is reached. As a result, it is possible to create an effect that arouses the feeling of frustration that the special pseudo-ream zone does not last for a long time. In the special pseudo-ream zone, the end of the special pseudo-ream zone may be obscured by concealing the number of symbol fluctuations without displaying it on the screen. On the other hand, in the RUSH zone, the end of the RUSH zone may be clarified by displaying the number of symbol fluctuations on the screen. For example, by counting down the number of remaining fluctuations until the end of the high-entry state is reached in the pinch mode, it may be possible to arouse the feeling of frustration that the high-entry state may end soon.

FIG. 77 is a diagram schematically showing a pseudo-variation scenario. The pseudo-variation scenario defines the detailed contents of the effect in one symbol variation period of the special pseudo-ream zone. Pseudo-variation scenarios are prepared corresponding to each of the patterns of FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (f). One type of pseudo-variation scenario is prepared for each of the patterns in FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (d) in which the number of pseudo-variations is 6 or less. Specifically, in the pattern of FIG. 74 (a), a) a scenario of one-time variation is selected, and in the pattern of FIG. 74 (b), b) a scenario of three-time variation is selected. In the pattern of FIG. 74 (c), c) the scenario without 6 times fluctuation development is selected, and in the pattern of FIG. 74 (d), d) the scenario with 6 times fluctuation development is selected. On the other hand, in the pattern in which the number of pseudo fluctuations in FIG. 74 (e) is 12, e-1) a scenario with 12 fluctuation developments and e-2) "6 times without fluctuation development" and "6 times with fluctuation development". Two types of scenarios that combine are prepared. The pseudo-variation scenario of e-2) corresponds to a combination of the pseudo-variation scenarios of c) and d). Further, in the pattern in which the number of pseudo fluctuations in FIG. 74 (f) is 18, f-1) a scenario with 18 fluctuation developments and f-2) "6 times without fluctuation development" and "12 times with fluctuation development". This is a scenario that combines f-3) "6 times without fluctuation development" and 2 times and "6 times with fluctuation development". The pseudo-variation scenario of f-2) corresponds to a combination of the pseudo-variation scenarios of c) and e-1), and the pseudo-variation scenario of f-3) is a combination of the pseudo-variation scenarios of c) and d). Corresponds to the one.

As "scenario elements" that constitute the pseudo-variation scenario corresponding to each of the patterns of FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (f), "1 time fluctuation", "3 times fluctuation", "6 times fluctuation development", and "6 times fluctuation development" Six types are prepared: "Yes", "12 times with fluctuation development", and "18 times with fluctuation development". The pseudo-variation scenario is realized by using any one of the six types of scenario elements alone or by using two types of scenario elements in combination. Further, for each type of scenario element, there are a "symbol change pattern" that defines a change pattern of the symbol combination at the time of temporary stop of the decorative symbol 506 and a "band color change pattern" that defines a change pattern of the display color of the band image 532. Be prepared. In addition, a plurality of symbol change patterns and a plurality of band color change patterns are prepared according to the type of scenario element, and a lottery for determining the symbol change pattern and a lottery for determining the band color change pattern are separated. Make it feasible. As a result, for one scenario element, it is possible to execute the number of effect patterns obtained by multiplying the number of types of the symbol change pattern and the number of types of the band color change pattern, and it is possible to execute an effect rich in variation.

FIG. 78 shows an example of the pattern change pattern and the band color change pattern in “1 time variation”, “3 times variation”, and “6 times variation without development”. FIG. 78A shows a symbol change pattern and a band color change pattern corresponding to the scenario element of “one-time variation”. In the one-time variation, only one type of symbol change pattern is prepared in which the symbol combination at the time of the fixed stop of the decorative symbol 506 is "a) looseness", and the display color of the band image 532 is "white". Only the band color change pattern of is prepared. FIG. 78 (b) shows a symbol change pattern and a band color change pattern corresponding to the scenario element of “three times variation”. In the case of three fluctuations, "a) loose stitches" or "b) white order at the first and second temporary stops, and" a) loose stitches "or" f) blue same color at the third fixed stop. Two types of symbol change patterns are prepared. Further, in the case of the three-time variation, only one type of band color change pattern is prepared in which the display color of the band image 532 is "white" over the entire pseudo variation of the first to third times. In FIG. 78 (b), "ba" means "a) loose stitches", and "order" means "b) white stitches".

FIG. 78 (c) shows an example of a pattern change pattern and a band color change pattern without 6-fold variation development. Five types of symbol change patterns are prepared in the scenario element of "6 times fluctuation and no development". In "No 6-time fluctuation development", the reach mode is not obtained in the 6th pseudo-variation, so the symbol combinations of the decorative symbols 506 that are fixedly stopped in the 6th pseudo-variation are the same color as f) to h) (blue). It becomes a ghost, a green ghost, a red ghost). In FIG. 78 (c), "blue" means "c) the same color as blue", and "blue / green / red" means the same color as f) to h) (blue, green, red). It means that it becomes one of.

In the symbol change patterns 1 to 4 of "6 times fluctuation no development" in FIG. 78 (c), the symbol combination at the time of the first and second temporary stops is the symbol change pattern of "3 times fluctuation" in FIG. 78 (b). Same as 1-2. Therefore, when the symbol change patterns 1 to 4 are executed, it is not possible to determine whether the number of pseudo fluctuations is 3 or 6 at the timing of the second temporary stop of the decorative symbol. In the symbol change pattern 5 of FIG. 78 (c), the symbol combination at the time of the second temporary stop is "a) a loose stitch", which is different from the symbol change patterns 1 and 2 of the "three times variation". .. Therefore, when the symbol change pattern 5 is obtained, it is determined that the pseudo-variation is 6 times or more. In addition, in the symbol change patterns 1 to 5 of "6 times no fluctuation development", the symbol combination at the time of the third temporary stop is "a) loose stitch", "b) white order" or "c) blue same color. , And the symbol combination at the time of the fourth temporary stop is "b) white order" or "c) blue same color". The symbol combination at the time of the fifth temporary stop is "c) Blue same color".

In the symbol combination at the time of the 1st to 5th temporary stop of the decorative symbol, the symbol combination may change to a relatively high expectation as the number of temporary stops increases, but the symbol combination has a relatively low expectation. Does not change. Specifically, after becoming "b) white order", it does not change to "a) loose eyes", and after becoming "c) blue same color", "a) loose eyes" or " b) It does not change to "white order". In addition, the symbol combination at the time of temporary stop is configured to change step by step. For example, it may change to "b) white order" after "a) loose eyes", but skip "b) white order" after "a) loose eyes" and "c". ) It does not change to "blue same color". In the symbol change pattern, the symbol combination does not always change for each temporary stop, and the same type of symbol combination can be obtained at a plurality of consecutive temporary stop timings. For example, the white order is repeated three times as in the symbol change pattern 2, the blue same color is repeated three times as in the symbol change pattern 3, and the disparity is repeated three times as in the symbol change pattern 5. It may be lost. In addition, different types of symbol combinations may be obtained at three consecutive temporary stop timings. For example, as in the symbol change pattern 3, three pseudo fluctuations may result in loose stitches, white order, and blue color. The symbol combination may change in the order of the same color.

In "No 6-fold variation development" in FIG. 78 (c), two types of band color change patterns are prepared. In the band color change pattern 1, the display color of the band image 532 in the pseudo fluctuations of 1 to 3 times is "white", and the display color of the band image 532 in the pseudo fluctuations of 4 to 6 times is "blue". The display color of the band image 532 of the 1st to 3rd band image 532 of the band color change pattern 1 of "6 times variation no development" is the same as the band color change pattern of "3 times variation", and attention was paid to the band color change pattern. In this case, it is not possible to determine whether the number of pseudo fluctuations is 3 or 6. In the band color change pattern 2 of "6 times no fluctuation development", the display color of the band image 532 in the 1st to 2nd pseudo fluctuations is "white", and the band image 532 in the 3rd to 6th pseudo fluctuations. The display color is "blue". According to the band color change pattern 2, it is suggested that the display color of the band image 532 changes in the third pseudo variation, which is different from the band color change pattern of the "three times variation", and the pattern is different from the band color change pattern after the fourth time. It can be suggested that the pseudo-variation of is continued.

FIG. 79 shows an example of the pattern change pattern and the band color change pattern in "6 times fluctuation development". In the scenario element of "6 times fluctuation development", 22 types of symbol change patterns are prepared. In the scenario element of "6 times fluctuation development", since the reach mode is reached at the 6th pseudo-variation, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at the symbol combination that is out of reach or hit. In the symbol change patterns 1 to 5, the symbol combination at the time of 1 to 5 temporary stops is the same as the symbol change pattern of "6 times no fluctuation development" in FIG. 78 (c), and at the 6th fixed stop. Only the symbol combination is different. The symbol combinations of the symbol change patterns 1 to 5 at the 6th fixed stop are either i) out of blueprint, j) out of greenprint, k) per blueprint, l) per greenprint, or m) per redprint. Become. When the symbol change patterns 1 to 5 of FIG. 79 are executed, it can be said that it cannot be determined whether or not the decorative symbol is in the reach mode at the timing of the fifth temporary stop of the decorative symbol.

The symbol change patterns 6 to 12 in FIG. 79 are patterns in which the symbol combination at the time of the fifth temporary stop of the decorative symbol is “d) green same color”, and the expectation is higher than that of the symbol change patterns 1 to 5. Suggest that. If "d) the same color as green" is obtained at the fifth temporary stop of the decorative symbol, it can be said that the decorative symbol is determined to be in the reach mode. The symbol combinations of the symbol change patterns 6 to 12 at the 6th fixed stop are either j) out of the green diagram, l) per green diagram, m) per red diagram, and k) per blueprint or i) blueprint. It will not come off. The symbol change patterns 13 to 20 in FIG. 79 are patterns in which the symbol combination at the time of the fifth temporary stop of the decorative symbol is "e) red same color", and the expectation is higher than that of the symbol change patterns 1 to 12. Suggest that. The symbol combination at the time of the sixth fixed stop of the symbol change patterns 13 to 20 is m) only for the red symbol. Therefore, it can be said that if "e) the same color as red" is obtained at the fifth temporary stop of the decorative symbol, it is confirmed that the red symbol is a big hit.

The symbol change patterns 21 to 22 in FIG. 79 are premier patterns in which the decorative symbol at the time of temporary stop of 1 to 5 times becomes “gold” or “giraffe pattern”. Since the symbol combination of the symbol change pattern 21 at the sixth fixed stop is "l) per green diagram" or "m) per red diagram", it becomes a "golden" symbol combination at the first temporary stop. In that case, it is confirmed that the green symbol or the red symbol will be a hit. In addition, since the symbol combination of the symbol change pattern 22 at the sixth fixed stop is only "m) per red symbol", if the symbol combination is "giraffe pattern" at the first temporary stop, It is confirmed that the red symbol will be a hit (for example, a 10R big hit). It should be noted that these premier patterns can be executed only with the scenario elements of "6 times fluctuation development", and are not executed with the scenario elements of "12 times fluctuation development" and "18 times fluctuation development" described later. Will be done. In the premier pattern, it is confirmed that a big hit will be made at the first temporary stop, so if it is applied to an effect pattern with a large number of pseudo stops such as 12 times or 18 times, the effect until the hit symbol is confirmed and stopped will be delayed. This is because it can be annoying.

In the symbol change pattern of "6 times fluctuation development" in FIG. 79, the symbol combination at the time of temporary stop may not change one step at a time, or may be configured to change two or more steps at a time. For example, in the symbol change pattern 10, after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped for the third time, it becomes "a) loose stitches, and then it becomes" d) green same color when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped for the fourth time, and "b) white. It is configured to skip "order" and "c) blue same color". Further, in the symbol change patterns 13 to 16, after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped for the fourth time, it becomes "c) blue same color", and then it becomes "e) red same color at the fifth temporary stop of the decorative symbol". d) It is configured to skip "green same color". Since such a symbol change pattern does not exist in the symbol change patterns of FIGS. 78 (a) to 78 (c), the decorative symbol may be in the reach mode when the symbol combination is changed by two or more steps at a time. It can be said that it is confirmed and it is suggested that the degree of expectation is high.

In the symbol change pattern of "6 times variation development" in FIG. 79, the symbol combination at the time of temporary stop of the decorative symbol 506 from the first pseudo variation is the same color of "c) blue same color" or "d) green same color". There are eye patterns 11, 12, 19, and 20. Such a symbol change pattern does not exist in the symbol change patterns of FIGS. 78 (a) to 78 (c). Therefore, when the symbol combination at the time of the first temporary stop is the same color, it can be said that the decorative symbol is determined to be in the reach mode, and it is suggested that the degree of expectation is high.

In "6 times fluctuation development" in FIG. 79, 13 types of band color change patterns are prepared. The band color change patterns 1 and 2 in FIG. 79 are the same as the band color change patterns 1 and 2 in FIG. 78 (c) with "no 6-fold variation development". The band color change patterns 3 to 6 in FIG. 79 are patterns in which the display color of the band image 532 changes to green, suggesting that the expectations are higher than those of the band color change patterns 1 and 2. The pattern in which the display color of the band image 532 is green suggests that the decorative pattern is determined to be reachable. The band color change patterns 7 to 13 in FIG. 79 are patterns in which the display color of the band image 532 changes to red, suggesting that the expectations are higher than those of the band color change patterns 1 to 6. The pattern in which the display color of the band image 532 is red suggests that the development effect is executed after the decorative pattern reaches and the button effect is executed, or it is confirmed that the direct hit is a big hit. That is, when the display color of the band image 532 is red, it is confirmed that the band image 532 does not come off immediately after the button effect after the reach, which suggests that the degree of expectation is high.

In the band color change pattern of “6 times variation development” in FIG. 79, there are patterns 5, 6, 9 to 13 in which the display color of the band image 532 is blue or more from the first pseudo variation. Such a band color change pattern does not exist in the band color change patterns of FIGS. 78 (a) to 78 (c). Therefore, it can be said that when the display color of the band image 532 in the first pseudo-variation is not white, it is determined that the decorative pattern is reachable.

FIG. 80 is a table showing an example of the symbol combination of the premier pattern. FIG. 80 shows a symbol combination at the time of temporary stop of the decorative symbols 1 to 5 times in the symbol change patterns 21 and 22 of FIG. 79. In the premier pattern in which the decorative pattern is a gold pattern or a giraffe pattern, the puns are matched by the combination of the symbols at the time of temporary stop, suggesting that the expectation is high. In the example of FIG. 80, nine types of puns for the gold pattern and the puns for the giraffe pattern are prepared, each of which has a left symbol of "1" to "9". In the premier pattern, not only the decorative symbol of the symbol combination to be the pun may be temporarily stopped and displayed, but also the wording indicating the meaning of the pun may be displayed. For example, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped by the symbol combination of "129" in the gold symbol, the word "pause" may be displayed. In addition, in order to more clearly indicate that the numbers of the symbols are puns, a word such as "Ippatsu (129)" may be displayed in which the meaning of the puns and the combination of the symbols are written together.

FIG. 81 shows an example of the pattern change pattern and the band color change pattern in “12 times fluctuation development”. FIG. 81A shows 12 types of symbol change patterns of “12 times fluctuation development”. The symbol change patterns 1 to 5 in FIG. 81 (a) are patterns in which the symbol combination at the 11th temporary stop of the decorative symbol is "d) the same color as green", and the symbol combination at the 12th fixed stop is , J) Off the green map, l) Per green map, m) Per red map. The symbol change patterns 6 to 12 in FIG. 81A are patterns in which the symbol combination at the 11th temporary stop of the decorative symbol is "e) the same color as red", and the symbol combination at the 12th fixed stop is , "M) Only per red figure". In the scenario element of "12 times fluctuation development", the decorative symbol is not fixedly stopped by the 6th pseudo fluctuation, and the decorative symbol re-variates after the 6th temporary stop of the decorative symbol, and the 7th and subsequent pseudo fluctuations occur. Will be executed. Therefore, in the symbol change patterns 1 to 12 of "12 times fluctuation development", the symbol combination at the time of the 6th temporary stop is the same color of c) to e), and the same color of f) to j) or the reach is lost. It is not a combination of symbols. In addition, the symbol change patterns 1 to 12 are configured so that the symbol combinations at the time of the 6th and 7th temporary stops are the same type, and the pseudo variation does not end in 6 times and continues after the 7th time. Is suggested.

In the symbol change patterns 1 to 12 of "12 times fluctuation development" in FIG. 81 (a), the symbol combination at the time of the first temporary stop is "b) white order", and at the time of the first temporary stop. It is suggested that the degree of expectation is higher than that in the case where the symbol combination of is "a)". The symbol combination at the time of the 3rd to 5th temporary stop is "b) white order" or "c) blue same color", which suggests high expectation, "d) green same color" and "e). It is configured so that it does not become "red same color". In other words, "d) green same color" and "e) red same color, which suggest high expectations, are used as a symbol combination at the time of temporary stop after the 6th time, and the pseudo fluctuation after the 7th time. Is used after the timing when the player knows that will continue. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether or not the pseudo-variation after the 7th time is continued only by looking at the symbol combination at the time of the temporary stop of 1 to 5 times. However, a pattern such as the symbol change patterns 5 and 10 in which the symbol combination at the time of temporary stop of 1 to 4 times is "b) white order" is a symbol change pattern in which the number of pseudo fluctuations is 6 times or less. Does not exist. Therefore, when the symbol change patterns 5 and 10 are executed, it can be said that it is suggested that the pseudo-variation is confirmed 12 times or more.

FIG. 81B shows 11 types of band color change patterns of “12 times fluctuation development”. The band color change patterns 1 to 5 in FIG. 81B are patterns in which the display color of the band image 532 changes to green, and the display color of the band image 532 becomes green in at least the seventh pseudo-variation, and the decorative pattern becomes green. It suggests that the reach will be confirmed. The band color change patterns 6 to 11 in FIG. 81B are patterns in which the display color of the band image 532 changes to red, and the development effect is executed after the decorative pattern reaches and the button effect is executed. Or, it suggests that it will be a direct hit jackpot. In the band color change pattern of “12 times variation development” in FIG. 81 (b), there are patterns 5, 10 and 11 in which the display color of the band image 532 is blue or more from the first pseudo variation. Since such a band color change pattern does not exist in the band color change patterns of FIGS. 78 (a) to 78 (c), if the display color of the band image 532 in the first pseudo variation is not white, it is decorated. It can be said that it is suggested that the design will reach.

FIG. 82 shows an example of the pattern change pattern and the band color change pattern in “18 times fluctuation development”. FIG. 82 (a) shows 10 types of symbol change patterns of “18 times fluctuation development”. The symbol change patterns 1 to 5 in FIG. 82 (a) are patterns in which the symbol combination at the 17th temporary stop of the decorative symbol is "d) the same color as green", and the symbol combination at the 18th fixed stop is , "L) per green map" or "m) per red map". The symbol change patterns 6 to 10 in FIG. 81A are patterns in which the symbol combination at the 17th temporary stop of the decorative symbol is "e) the same color as red", and the symbol combination at the 18th fixed stop is , "M) Only per red figure". In the scenario element of "18 times fluctuation development", the decorative design is not fixedly stopped by the 6th and 12th pseudo fluctuations, and the decorative design re-changes after the 6th temporary stop of the decorative design after the 7th time. Pseudo-variation is executed, and after the 12th temporary stop of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol is re-variated and the 13th and subsequent pseudo-variations are executed. Therefore, even in the case of "18 times fluctuation development", the symbol change patterns 1 to 10 are configured so that the symbol combinations at the 6th and 7th temporary stops are the same type, and the pseudo fluctuation does not end in 6 times. It is suggested that it continues after the 7th time. On the other hand, the symbol combinations at the time of the 12th and 13th temporary stops are configured to be different from the symbol change patterns 1 to 5 in which the 12th and 13th times are the same type of symbol combination. There are symbol change patterns 6 to 10 to be performed. If the symbol combination at the time of the 12th temporary stop becomes the "same color" that suggests the continuation of the pseudo-variation, it is confirmed that the pseudo-variation is executed 18 times, so that the pseudo-variation continues after the 13th time. This is because there is little need to explicitly suggest that they are doing so.

FIG. 82 (b) shows 11 types of band color change patterns of “18 times fluctuation development”. In the band color change patterns 1 to 11 of FIG. 82 (b), the display color of the band image 532 changes to red.
The change pattern of the display color of the band image 532 in the 1st to 12th pseudo fluctuations of the band color change pattern 1 to 11 in FIG. 82 (b) is the band color of “12 times variation development” in FIG. 81 (b). It is the same as the change patterns 1 to 11. In the band color change patterns 1 to 11 of FIG. 82 (b), the display color of the band image 532 in the pseudo fluctuations of 13 to 18 times becomes red, the decorative pattern reaches and the button effect is executed, and then the development effect is performed. Suggests that it will be executed or that it will be a direct hit jackpot.

In this embodiment, when the scenario elements are determined according to the effect patterns of FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (f), a lottery for determining the symbol change pattern and a band color change are performed according to the type of the scenario elements. A lottery to determine the pattern is performed separately. As a result, as the number of pseudo-variations increases, the decorative pattern 506 changes to a display mode suggesting a high degree of expectation (for example, the same color of green or the same color of red), while the band image 532 suggests a high degree of expectation. It may not change to the display mode (for example, green or red). On the contrary, the decorative pattern 506 does not change to the display mode (for example, the same color of green or the same color of red) suggesting a high degree of expectation as the number of pseudo fluctuations increases, while the band image 532 suggests a high degree of expectation. It may change to a display mode (for example, green or red). In addition, both the decorative symbol 506 and the band image 532 may change to a display mode suggesting a high degree of expectation, and both the decorative symbol 506 and the band image 532 do not change to a display mode suggesting a high degree of expectation. There can also be. Further, since the combination of the symbol change pattern and the band color change pattern is randomly determined, the timing at which the symbol combination at the time of temporary stop of the decorative symbol 506 changes and the timing at which the display color of the band image 532 changes are synchronized. Sometimes it can be out of sync.

FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of the symbol change pattern and the band color change pattern in the scenario element of “6 times fluctuation development”, and shows an example of the case where the change timing is synchronized and the case where the change timing is not synchronized. FIG. 83A shows an example of a case where the symbol change pattern and the change timing of the band color change pattern are synchronized, and shows a case where the symbol change pattern 2 and the band color change pattern 1 of FIG. 79 are selected. As shown, the symbol combination of the decorative symbol 506 is "b) white order in 1 to 3 pseudo variations, and" c) blue same color in 4 to 6 pseudo variations. "F) Blue same color Gase". The display color of the band image 532 is white in the pseudo-variations of 1 to 3 times and blue in the pseudo-variations of 4 to 6 times. Therefore, in this combination of patterns, the display color of the band image 532 changes from white to blue with the start of the fourth pseudo-variation, and the decorative symbol 506 has a relatively high expectation in the fourth pseudo-variation. Since it changes to "c) Blue same color" and temporarily stops, it can be said that the chance-up effect is executed in synchronization with the same timing. Further, since the decorative pattern 506 changes to blue and the display color of the band image 532 also changes to blue, it can be said that the chance-up effect suggesting the same high degree of expectation is synchronously executed.

FIG. 83B shows an example in which the change timings of the symbol change pattern and the band color change pattern are not synchronized, and shows the case where the symbol change pattern 1 and the band color change pattern 4 of FIG. 79 are selected. As shown in the figure, the symbol combination of the decorative symbol 506 is "a) in the first pseudo-variation, and is" b) in the white order in the second to third pseudo-variations, 4 It becomes "c) the same color of blue in the pseudo fluctuations of 5 to 5 times, and becomes" g) the same color of green at the 6th fixed stop. On the other hand, the display color of the band image 532 is white in the pseudo-variations of 1 to 2 times, blue in the pseudo-variations of 3 to 4 times, and green in the pseudo-variations of 5 to 6 times. Therefore, in this pattern combination, the display color of the band image 532 changes with the start of the odd number of pseudo-variations (3 times, 5 times), whereas the display color of the band image 532 changes in the odd-numbered pseudo-variations, whereas the decorative symbol 506 is temporarily stopped. The pattern combination of time does not change. On the other hand, in the even number of pseudo fluctuations (2 times, 4 times, 6 times), the display color of the band image 532 does not change with the start of the pseudo fluctuation, whereas the symbol combination at the time of temporary stop of the decorative symbol changes. To do. That is, it can be said that the chance-up effect due to the change in the display mode of the decorative symbol 506 and the chance-up effect due to the change in the display mode of the band image 532 are executed at different timings.

In the special pseudo-ream zone, since the pseudo-continuous fluctuation effect having a large number of pseudo-variations such as 6, 12 or 18 times is executed, it can be said that the chance-up effect is unlikely to be executed in each pseudo-variation. In the special pseudo-ream zone, it can be said that it is difficult to perform a chance-up effect based on a symbol display mode, such as a change in the type of symbol combination at the time of temporary stop in one pseudo-variation. Further, in the special pseudo-ream zone, it can be said that it is difficult to perform a chance-up effect based on a display mode different from the symbol, such as a change in the display color of the band image in one pseudo-variation. On the other hand, the pseudo-continuous variation effect (also referred to as normal pseudo-ream) that can be executed in an effect mode (for example, normal mode) different from the special pseudo-ream zone has a small number of pseudo-variations such as 2 or 3 times, so each time. It can be said that there is a high possibility that a chance-up effect will be executed in the pseudo-variation of. In the normal pseudo-ream, it can be said that a chance-up effect based on a symbol display mode such as a temporary stop display of a special symbol such as "continuation" is easily executed in one pseudo-variation. In addition, in the normal pseudo-ream, it is based on a display mode different from the design such as a display suggesting continuation to the next stage such as "second stage" in one pseudo-variation or execution of a special effect such as a mission effect. It can be said that the chance-up effect is easy to execute. In the normal pseudo-ren, a chance-up effect using a special symbol can be executed, whereas in the special pseudo-ren zone, a chance-up effect is executed using a normal number symbol, and a chance-up effect using a special symbol is executed. Is configured not to be executed. Further, in the normal pseudo-ream, it is possible to execute a symbol action display that changes the display mode of the decorative symbol while fixing the display position of the decorative symbol when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, whereas in the special pseudo-ream zone, the symbol action can be executed. It is configured so that the display is not executed.

In the special pseudo-ream zone, a pseudo-continuous fluctuation effect with a large number of pseudo-variations such as 6, 12, or 18 is executed. Therefore, in each pseudo-variation, the symbol combination at the time of temporary stop of the decorative symbol is the same color with high expectation. It can be said that it is unlikely that it will change to the chance. This is in contrast to the situation in which there is a high possibility that the decorative symbol will change to the same color chance eye with high expectation in each symbol variation when the confirmation of multiple symbol fluctuations is stopped in the normal mode. It can be said that. The "chance eye effect" in the normal mode may be a so-called look-ahead effect, in which the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the symbol variation prior to the symbol variation related to the pre-read lottery value are odd-numbered or even-numbered combinations or the same color symbols. The combination of the above may be used to create an out-of-order mode. In the chance eye production, it is suggested that the chance eyes of the even number combination and the chance eyes of the blue symbol combination are low expectations, while the chance eyes of the odd number combination and the chance eyes of the red symbol combination are high expectations. It is suggested that. In the chance eye production, it may be executed continuously over a plurality of symbol fluctuations, and it becomes a blue chance when the first symbol is stopped, a green chance when the second symbol is stopped, and a red chance when the symbol is stopped for the third time. It may be an eye. In the chance eye production, the same color chance is set when the symbol is stopped 1 to 3 times, and the same color chance is changed when the symbol is stopped for the 2nd and 3rd times, so that the same color chance is changed when the symbol is stopped for the 4th time. It may be suggested that the expectation of becoming a big hit is high.

The special pseudo-ream zone is configured so that one pseudo-variation period is shorter than that of the normal pseudo-ream that can be executed in the normal mode. That is, in the special pseudo-ream zone, the pseudo-variation is repeated at a higher speed than that of the normal pseudo-ream. The special pseudo-ream zone is configured so that one pseudo-variation period is fixed, and the length of each pseudo-variation period of a plurality of pseudo-variations is constant. In the special pseudo-ream zone, a predetermined pseudo-variation period may be configured to be relatively long. Specifically, the length of the pseudo-variation period of 6, 12, and 18 times in the special pseudo-ream zone is 1 to 5, 7 to 11 times, and 13 to 17 times in the special pseudo-ream zone. It may be longer than the length of the pseudo-variation period. On the other hand, in the normal pseudo-ream, a plurality of pseudo-variation periods may all be common, or a plurality of pseudo-variation periods may all be different.

In the special pseudo-ream zone, the length of one pseudo-variation period may change according to the number of pseudo-variations. For example, in the special pseudo-ream zone, the length of one pseudo-variation period may be shortened as the number of pseudo-variations increases. For example, the length of the pseudo-variation period of 1 to 3 times is 2 seconds, the length of the pseudo-variation period of 4 to 6 times is 1.5 seconds, and the length of the pseudo-variation period of 7 to 9 times is set to 1.5 seconds. The length of the pseudo-variation period of 10 to 12 times may be 0.5 seconds, and the length of the pseudo-variation period of 13 to 18 times may be 0.2 seconds. That is, in the special pseudo-ream zone, the length of one pseudo-variation period is changed triggered by a plurality of (for example, two or three times) pseudo-variations, and one pseudo-variation as the number of pseudo-variations increases. The length of the period may be shortened. It should be noted that the length of the pseudo-variation period may change according to the number of pseudo-variations even in the normal pseudo-ream. In the normal pseudo-ream, the length of the period of one pseudo-variation may be increased as the number of pseudo-variations increases. Further, in the normal pseudo-ream, the length of one pseudo-variation period may be changed each time one pseudo-variation is executed, instead of being triggered by a plurality of pseudo-variations.

In the special pseudo-ream zone, the timing at which each of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the decorative symbol 506 composed of the three rows of symbols changes to the temporarily stopped state may be simultaneous. On the other hand, in the normal pseudo-ream, the decorative symbol composed of the three rows of symbols is temporarily stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and the timing at which each of the three rows of symbols changes to the temporarily stopped state. May be different. In the special pseudo-ream zone, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol may be temporarily stopped in this order, and the timing at which each of the three rows of symbols changes to the temporary stop state. May be different. Further, in the normal pseudo-ream, the timing at which each of the three rows of symbols changes to the temporarily stopped state may be the same. In addition, in the special pseudo-ream zone, the timing at which each of the three columns of symbols changes to the temporary stop state may be simultaneous or different depending on the number of pseudo fluctuations. For example, in the pseudo-variation in which one symbol fluctuation period is equal to or longer than a predetermined value (for example, 1 second or longer), the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are temporarily stopped in this order when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. In the pseudo-variation in which one symbol fluctuation period is less than a predetermined value (for example, less than 1 second), the timing at which the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol change to the temporary stop state at the same time when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped is the same. You may. That is, in the special pseudo-ream zone, in the first period in one symbol change period, the timing at which the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol change to the temporary stop state is different when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, whereas 1 In the second period after the first period in the symbol variation period of the times, the timing at which the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol change to the temporarily stopped state may be the same when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped.

In the special pseudo-ream zone, a dedicated background music (BGM) may be output. The background music output in the special pseudo-ream zone may be started to be played at the start of the special pseudo-ream zone, and may be continuously output without interruption over a plurality of consecutive symbol fluctuations in the special pseudo-ream zone. For example, when the next variation starts after the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped in the special pseudo-ream zone and the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect is executed, the same background music is output from the fixed stop of the decorative symbol to the start of the next variation. Moreover, the output of the same background music is continued even in the pseudo continuous fluctuation production after the start of the next fluctuation. In the special pseudo-ream zone, the background music may be switched when the development effect is executed after the decorative symbol is in the reach mode and the button effect is executed. For example, the first background music for the special pseudo-ream zone is played until the button effect is executed, the reproduction of the first background music is interrupted when the button effect ends or the development effect starts, and the first background music is played. The playback of the second background music different from the above may be started. The first background music may be continuously played even when the development effect is executed in the special pseudo-ream zone. On the other hand, when the normal pseudo-ream is executed or the special step-up effect is executed in the normal mode, the background music may be switched with the start of the normal pseudo-ream or the special step-up effect. In other words, even if the background music that was output before the start of the normal pseudo-ren or special step-up effect is interrupted at the start of the normal pseudo-ren or special step-up effect, and the output of another background music is started. Good.

In the special pseudo-ream zone, it may be possible to suggest that it is confirmed that some event will occur in the pseudo-variation before the final pseudo-variation such as the 6th, 12th, or 18th. For example, it may be suggested that the reach is determined in the final pseudo-variation by setting the symbol combination at the time of temporary stop of the decorative symbol to "d) green same color" in the special pseudo-ream zone. It may be suggested that the jackpot is confirmed by the symbol combination at the time of temporary stop of the decorative symbol in the special pseudo-ream zone being "e) red same color", or it is suggested that the probability variation jackpot is confirmed. Alternatively, it may be suggested that a jackpot (for example, a 10R jackpot) in which the profit given to the player in the special game is relatively large is fixed. It may be suggested that the reach is determined in the final pseudo-variation by the display color of the band image becoming green in the special pseudo-ream zone. By making the display color of the band image red in the special pseudo-ream zone, it may be suggested that the development effect is executed after the reach in the final pseudo-variation, or it is confirmed that the jackpot will be a big hit. Further, in the special pseudo-ream zone, even after it is suggested that some event will occur in the pseudo-variation before the final pseudo-variation, the subsequent pseudo-variation may continue. .. On the other hand, in the normal pseudo-ream, it may be possible to suggest that it is confirmed that some event will occur by executing the final pseudo-variation. For example, when four pseudo-variations can be executed in a normal pseudo-ream, a special symbol of "continue" is displayed at the third temporary stop of a decorative symbol, or the fourth re-variation is started. Therefore, it may be confirmed that the fourth pseudo-variation will result in reach or a big hit. In this case, since the fourth pseudo-variation that suggests reach or jackpot confirmation is the final round, the normal pseudo-ream is configured so that the decorative symbol does not temporarily stop and re-variate after the confirmation suggestion is made. May be good.

In the special pseudo-ream zone, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at the symbol combination (for example, "e) red same color" indicating the highest expectation among the types of the decorative symbol symbol combination at the time of temporary stop. Even so, the decorative symbol may re-variate after the temporary stop and the pseudo-variation may continue. In the special pseudo-ream zone, the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol may be executed and the pseudo-variation may be continued even after the symbol combination having the highest expectation in the symbol change pattern is established. In the special pseudo-ream zone, even if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in a display mode (for example, red) that suggests that the display different from the decorative symbol (for example, a band image) has the highest degree of expectation, the temporary stop is performed. After the stop, the decorative symbol may change again and the pseudo change may continue. In the special pseudo-ream zone, even after the display color of the band image has become the most promising display color in the band color change pattern, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and re-variated, and the pseudo-variation is continued. May be good.

In the special pseudo-ream zone, the reach may be achieved with the same symbol color as the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped due to the pseudo fluctuation immediately before the decorative symbol reaches the reach. In the special pseudo-ream zone, the reach may be achieved with a symbol color having a higher degree of expectation than the symbol color of the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped due to the pseudo fluctuation immediately before the decorative symbol reaches the reach. Therefore, in the special pseudo-ream zone, the reach may be achieved with a symbol color suggesting an expectation degree higher than the expectation degree indicated by the symbol color of the decorative symbol temporarily stopped by the pseudo fluctuation immediately before the decorative symbol reaches the reach. ..

In a certain embodiment, in one symbol variation from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the stop display, the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed on the effect display device is temporarily stopped and then re-variated, thereby pseudo-multiple times. It may be possible to execute a pseudo continuous variation effect that makes it appear as if the symbol variation has been executed. As a pseudo continuous variation effect, the first pseudo continuous variation effect that makes it appear as if N symbol variation was executed by executing temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol N-1 times (N is an integer of 2 or more). , The second pseudo continuous variation effect that makes it appear as if N × M symbol variation was executed by executing temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol N × M-1 time (M is an integer of 2 or more). May be feasible.

In the pseudo continuous variation effect of a certain embodiment, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation by the symbol display mode (for example, symbol combination) at the time of temporary stop of the decorative symbol, and the expectation is made by the specific display mode (for example, band image) of the display different from the decorative symbol. It may be possible to suggest the degree. As the symbol display mode, there may be a first symbol display mode and a second symbol display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is higher than that of the first symbol display mode. As the specific display mode, there may be a first specific display mode and a second specific display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is higher than that of the first specific display mode. When the decorative symbol first temporarily stops in the first symbol display mode after the display of the first specific display mode, a) the decorative symbol revariates after the first temporary stop, and the decorative symbol changes after the display of the first specific display mode. May be second temporarily stopped in the first symbol display mode. b) The decorative symbol may change again after the first temporary stop, and the decorative symbol may be second temporarily stopped in the second symbol display mode after the display of the first specific display mode. c) The decorative symbol may change again after the first temporary stop, and the decorative symbol may be second temporarily stopped in the first symbol display mode after the display of the second specific display mode. d) The decorative symbol may change again after the first temporary stop, and the decorative symbol may be second temporarily stopped in the second symbol display mode after the display of the second specific display mode. As a symbol display mode that can suggest the degree of expectation, a display mode in which the numbers of the symbols are a specific combination may be used, or a display mode in which the symbol colors are a specific combination may be used. As a specific display mode that can suggest the degree of expectation, a display mode in which a display different from the decorative symbol has a specific display color may be used, or a display different from the decorative symbol is displayed with a specific action. A display mode may be used.

As the pseudo-continuous variation effect of a certain embodiment, the first pseudo-continuous variation effect (for example, normal pseudo-ream) and the second pseudo-second pseudo in which the number of temporary stops and re-variations of the decorative symbol is likely to be larger than that of the first pseudo continuous variation effect. There may be a continuous fluctuation effect (for example, a special pseudo-ream zone). Compared with the second pseudo-continuous variation effect, the first pseudo-continuous variation effect has a display mode at the time of the first temporary stop of the decorative symbol and a display mode at the time of the second temporary stop following the first temporary stop of the decorative symbol. May be different. Compared to the second pseudo continuous variation effect, the first pseudo continuous variation effect corresponds to the display mode of the advance notice effect that can be executed corresponding to the first temporary stop of the decorative symbol and the second temporary stop of the decorative symbol. It may be easy to be different from the display mode of the feasible notice effect.

In a certain embodiment, the decorative symbol temporarily stopped in the first pseudo-continuous variation effect (for example, normal pseudo-ream) has a first portion (for example, a number portion) indicating the symbol type and a second portion attached to the first portion. It may have a display form in which (for example, a character portion) is combined. The decorative symbol temporarily stopped in the second pseudo-continuous variation effect (for example, a special pseudo-continuous zone) may have a display form (for example, a display form of only a number portion) including a portion indicating the symbol type.

In a certain embodiment, when the first pseudo-continuous variation effect (for example, normal pseudo-ream) is executed, the background music output before the start of the first pseudo-continuous variation effect is used to start the first pseudo-continuous variation effect. It may be interrupted accordingly. When the second pseudo continuous variation effect (for example, a special pseudo continuous variation zone) is executed, the background music output before the start of the second pseudo continuous variation effect is continued after the start of the second pseudo continuous variation effect. May be good.

In a certain embodiment, a chance-up effect suggesting that the degree of expectation increases in response to the temporary stop or re-variation of the decorative symbol in the pseudo continuous variation effect may be feasible. When the chance-up effect is executed in the first pseudo-continuous variation effect (for example, normal pseudo-ream), the decorative symbol may not be temporarily stopped and re-variated after the chance-up effect is executed. On the other hand, when the chance-up effect is executed in the second pseudo continuous variation effect (for example, the special pseudo-continuous zone), the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped and re-variated after the chance-up effect is executed.

In the pseudo continuous variation effect of a certain embodiment, the first notice effect may be executed in response to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol. The second notice effect may be executed in response to the stop display of the decorative symbol in a plurality of symbol fluctuations of the special symbol. In the pseudo continuous variation effect, when the first notice effect is executed three times in response to the three consecutive temporary stops of the decorative symbol, the modes of the three first notice effects may be different from each other. However, when the second notice effect is executed in response to the three consecutive stop displays of the decorative symbol, it may be more likely that the modes of the three second notice effects are different from each other. .. The first notice effect may be a notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation by the combination of symbols when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. The second notice effect may be a notice effect (for example, a chance eye effect) that suggests the degree of expectation by combining the symbols in the disengaged mode when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

As the pseudo-continuous variation effect of a certain embodiment, the first pseudo-continuous variation effect (for example, normal pseudo-ream) in which the upper limit of the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol is the first number (for example, 4 times), and the decorative symbol There may be a second pseudo-continuous variation effect (for example, a special pseudo-continuous zone) in which the upper limit of the temporary stop and re-variation is a second number (for example, 6 times) that is larger than the first number. When the first pseudo continuous variation effect is executed, it is determined that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit on condition that the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol in the first pseudo continuous variation effect is the first number of times. May be possible to suggest. When the second pseudo continuous variation effect is executed, it is determined that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit before the number of temporary stops and re-variations of the decorative symbol in the second pseudo continuous variation effect becomes the second number. It may be possible to suggest, and then the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative design may be continued.

1) In a certain embodiment, when it is determined in advance by pre-reading that the jackpot fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation, it is possible to execute a fluctuation effect accompanied by a temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol in the jackpot fluctuation or the fluctuation before the jackpot fluctuation. May be good. In the jackpot fluctuation, regardless of whether or not the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol was executed in the symbol fluctuation immediately before the jackpot fluctuation, it is possible to execute the variation effect accompanied by the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol in the jackpot fluctuation. You may. As a variation effect accompanied by temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol, a pseudo continuous variation effect may be executed, or a resurrection effect that is re-variated after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in a detached mode is executed. It may be possible.

2) In a certain embodiment, the first effect (for example, low expectation effect) and the second effect (for example, high expectation effect) can be executed, and the pattern in which the first effect is executed and the second effect are The pattern to be executed and the pattern in which the second effect is executed after the execution of the first effect may be executable. A plurality of types of the first effect can be executed, and the degree of expectation that the second effect is subsequently executed may differ depending on the type of the first effect. For example, the expectation that the second effect will be executed after the execution of the first effect of the second type may be higher than the expectation that the second effect will be executed after the execution of the first effect of the first type. .. Further, a plurality of types of the first effect and a plurality of types of the second effect can be executed, and the expectation of the second effect is high when the second effect is subsequently executed according to the type of the first effect. May be different. For example, a second type that has a higher expectation after the execution of the first effect of the second type than an expectation that the second effect of the type that has a high expectation is executed after the execution of the first effect of the first type. The degree of expectation that the production will be executed may be higher. Further, in the pattern in which the second effect is executed after the execution of the first effect, the second effect may be executed at a plurality of timings within the symbol variation period, and the second effect may be executed according to the execution timing of the second effect. 2 The high expectations of the production may be different. For example, the longer the time value from the start of fluctuation to the execution timing of the second effect, the longer.

3) In a certain embodiment, the pseudo continuous variation effect may be executed after the decorative symbol is in the reach mode. In this case, the degree of expectation that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and re-variated after the reach and the pseudo-variation continues may be different depending on the effect mode at the time of reach.

4) When the pseudo continuous variation effect is executed in a certain embodiment, the advance notice effect is executed once and the advance notice effect is executed a plurality of times during the pseudo change after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and re-variated. In some cases. During the pseudo-variation in this case, a plurality of types of advance notice effects may be executed, or the same type of advance notice effects may be executed a plurality of times. When a certain type of advance notice effect is executed multiple times during the pseudo-variation, a certain type of first notice effect suggesting a lower expectation level than the expectation degree suggested by the first advance notice effect after the execution of the first advance notice effect of a certain type. 2 Execution of the notice effect may be disabled. In other words, after executing a certain kind of first notice effect, it may be possible to execute a certain kind of second notice effect that suggests an expectation degree higher than the expectation degree suggested by the first notice effect. The high expectation of a certain type of second notice effect may be the same as the high expectation of a certain type of first notice effect, or higher than the high expectation of a certain type of first notice effect. It may be expensive.

5) In a certain embodiment, the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped and re-variated after the execution of the specific effect. The specific effect is a "slip effect" in which the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol is changed to a low speed so as to suggest a temporary stop of the decorative symbol, and then the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol is changed to a high speed without temporarily stopping the decorative symbol. May be. In the sliding effect, after slowing down the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol toward the display position where the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol is increased at the display position where the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. , The decorative design is displayed so that it does not stop at the display position where it should be temporarily stopped. When a specific effect (for example, a slip effect) is executed, the decorative symbol temporarily stops and re-changes after the specific effect is executed, and the decorative symbol stops fixedly and does not change again after the specific effect is executed. There may be. The decorative design may be temporarily stopped and re-variated without executing the specific effect (for example, the sliding effect). In this case, the degree of expectation that the decorative symbol re-variates after the execution of the specific effect may be higher than the degree of expectation that the decorative symbol re-variates without the specific effect being executed. There may be a case where a specific effect (for example, a sliding effect) is executed after the decorative symbol is in the reach mode, or a case where the specific effect is executed before the decorative symbol is in the reach mode. In this case, the degree of expectation that the decorative symbol re-varies after the specific effect is executed after the decorative symbol is in the reach mode is that the decorative symbol re-variates after the specific effect is executed before the decorative symbol is in the reach mode. It may be higher than expected. After the re-variation of the decorative pattern, a predetermined effect different from the specific effect may be executed.

6) In a certain embodiment, the variation pattern selection process for determining the variation time of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) and the second special symbol (special diagram 2) may be common. For example, a common variation pattern selection criterion (for example, a common lottery table) for selecting a variation pattern is provided, and a common variation pattern selection criterion is provided in the selection of the variation pattern of Special Figure 1 and the selection of the variation pattern of Special Figure 2. May be used. The data regarding the selected variation pattern of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 may be stored in the same area of the main RAM 291 of the main board 200. For example, the area of the main RAM 291 in which the data defining the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is stored may be common. At the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, a command indicating which of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 (for example, a fluctuation start command) may be transmitted. As the variation pattern, there may be a variation pattern corresponding to the time value of the re-variation effect pattern in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and re-variated. Further, the jackpot processing of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be common.

7) In a certain embodiment, a re-variation suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the decorative symbol re-variates after the execution of the reach effect that can be executed with the decorative symbol in the reach mode may be feasible. There is a pattern in which the decorative symbol is re-variated after the re-variation suggestion effect is executed and then the development effect is executed, and a pattern in which the development effect is executed without re-variating the decorative symbol after the re-variation suggestion effect is executed. May be good.

8) In a certain embodiment, a first pattern in which the decorative symbol temporarily stops in the reach-out mode and then develops into a specific effect, and a second pattern in which the decorative symbol develops into a specific effect without temporarily stopping in the reach-out mode. There may be. The specific production may be a high-expectation SP reach (strong reach) production such as a battle reach production or the strongest ritual reach production. When the number of re-variations of the decorative symbol in one symbol variation period is equal to or greater than the first number, the second pattern may be executed. When the number of re-variations of the decorative symbol in one symbol variation period is the second number less than the first number, the expectation that the second pattern is executed is lower than when the number of re-variations is the first number or more. You may.

9) In a certain embodiment, the first effect (for example, a challenge effect that can be executed only in the probability variation state) may be executed in the symbol variation period in which the decorative symbol does not re-variate. In the symbol variation period in which the decorative symbol changes again, a second effect different from the first effect (for example, a step-up notice effect that can be executed only in the normal probability state) may be feasible. During the symbol variation period in which the first effect is executed and the symbol variation period in which the second effect is executed, a third effect (for example, an operation effect such as a fiery heat button effect) different from the first effect and the second effect is executed. It may be possible. The third effect may be executed after the execution of the first effect and the second effect within the symbol variation period.

10) In a certain embodiment, it may be possible to output a "one-shot notification sound" that notifies the player that a single-shot sound effect is output. The probability of occurrence of the one-shot notification sound may differ depending on the type of look-ahead effect executed before the timing when the one-shot notification sound can be output. For example, when the first look-ahead effect and the second look-ahead effect with a higher expectation than the first look-ahead effect can be executed, the second look-ahead effect is more than the probability that a one-shot notification sound is generated after the execution of the first look-ahead effect. The probability that a one-shot notification sound will be generated after the pre-reading effect is executed may be higher.

11) In a certain embodiment, the effect corresponding to the number of times corresponding to the number of times of re-variation of the decorative symbol may be feasible. For example, in a situation where the number of re-variations of the decorative symbol is the first number, the first number of times effect corresponding to the first number of times may be feasible. Further, in a situation where the number of re-variations of the decorative symbol is the second number, the second number of times effect corresponding to the second number of times may be feasible. In a situation where the number of fluctuations of the decorative symbol is the first, the second effect may not be feasible, and in a situation where the number of fluctuations of the decorative symbol is the second, the first effect cannot be executed. You may. After a predetermined timing under the situation where the re-variation of the decorative pattern is the final round (for example, after the start of the development effect after the reach is established), the number-numbered effect (for example, the first and second effect) is executed. It may not be possible.

12) In a certain embodiment, there may be a plurality of types of re-variation effect patterns in which the re-variation timing of the decorative symbol is different. The probability that the re-variation timing of the decorative symbol will be the specific timing when the hit / fail result is a big hit may be higher than the probability that the re-variation timing of the decorative symbol will be the specific timing when the hit / fail result is out of order. In the case where there is a first big hit and a second big hit in which the profit that can be obtained in the special game executed after the big hit is larger than that of the first big hit, the re-variation timing of the decorative symbol is a specific timing when the first big hit is obtained. In the case of the second big hit, the probability of the re-variation timing of the decorative symbol and the specific timing may be higher than the probability of becoming. It has a plurality of types of effect modes that determine an effect tendency over a plurality of symbol variation periods, and the tendency of selecting a re-variation effect pattern of a decorative symbol may differ depending on the type of effect mode. For example, the possibility that the re-variation timing of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined timing may differ depending on the type of effect mode.

13) In a certain embodiment, there may be a first notice effect, a second notice effect, and a third notice effect as the advance notice effects that can be executed after the decorative symbol is re-changed. The first notice effect suggests the denial that the decorative symbol further changes after the execution of the first notice effect, that is, the notice effect suggests that the decorative symbol does not change again after the execution of the first notice effect (for example). , Next notice production). The second notice effect does not deny that the decorative design further changes after the execution of the second notice effect, that is, the notice effect suggests that the decorative design may change again after the execution of the second notice effect. (For example, a step-up notice production) may be used. The third notice effect suggests that the decorative symbol revariates after the execution of the third notice effect, that is, the notice effect suggests that the revariation of the decorative symbol is confirmed after the execution of the third notice effect (for example, It may be a continuous symbol display). There is a pattern in which the development effect is executed after the decorative pattern is in the reach mode after the decorative pattern is re-changed, and a pattern in which the development effect is executed without the decorative pattern being in the reach mode after the decorative pattern is re-changed. May be good.

14) In a certain embodiment, there are a first pattern (normal pattern) and a second pattern (extreme heat pattern) that suggests a higher degree of expectation than the first pattern as an effect that can be executed after the decorative pattern is re-variated. You may. It is possible to re-variate the decorative symbol multiple times within one symbol fluctuation period, and depending on the number of re-variations of the decorative symbol within one symbol fluctuation period, the number of re-variations of the decorative symbol during the number of re-variations of the decorative symbol. It may be different whether the two patterns are executed.

15) In a certain embodiment, a plurality of steps of step-up notice effect may be feasible. For example, the step-up notice of the second stage may be executed after the step-up notice of the first stage, and the step-up notice of the third stage may be executed after the step-up notice of the second stage. The decorative symbol can be re-changed during the execution of the step-up notice effect, and after the decorative symbol is re-changed, the first step-up notice is executed regardless of the number of stages of the step-up notice effect during execution. May be done. The effect process of the step-up notice executed within the symbol variation period is determined at the start of the variation of the decorative symbol, and may not be determined at the start of the re-variation of the decorative symbol. The step-up notice A executed during the Ath revariation of the decorative symbol may be different from the step-up notice B executed during the Bth revariation of the decorative symbol. The step-up notice A and the step-up notice B may be step-up notices in which at least one of the number of steps, the display mode, and the type of effect is common (same). The jackpot expectation when the step-up notice A executed during the Ath re-change of the decorative symbol and the step-up notice B executed during the B-th re-change of the decorative design are different is the step-up notice A and the step. It may be higher than the jackpot expectation when the up notice B is the same. Even if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped with the normal symbol, a display element having a display form different from the normal symbol is displayed, the display element is changed and displayed, and the decorative symbol is displayed as a temporary stop symbol (special symbol). Good. There is a first jackpot (for example, 10R jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second jackpot (for example, 3R jackpot, normal jackpot), which gives a lower profit to the player than the first jackpot, depending on the number of re-variations of the decorative symbol. Therefore, the degree of expectation for the first big hit may be different.

16) In a certain embodiment, a re-variation suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the decorative symbol re-varies may be feasible. The re-variation suggestion effect may be a frame light emission effect that causes a decorative lamp (for example, a decorative lamp 111) provided on the frame of the game machine to emit light. The re-variation suggestion effect may be a specific operation effect that can be executed by an input operation to an operation input means such as the effect button 109 or the effect lever 112. There may be a plurality of reach types in which the symbol types of the decorative symbols that serve as the reach mode are different. For example, there may be a first reach type in which the left and right symbols of the decorative symbol reach in the first symbol, and a second reach type in which the left and right symbols of the decorative symbol reach in the second symbol. The tendency of which reach type is selected according to the number of re-variations of the decorative symbol may be different. For example, the probability of becoming the first reach type and the probability of becoming the second reach type may differ depending on the number of re-variations of the decorative symbol. There may be a reach type that is not selected when the number of re-variations of the decorative symbol reaches a predetermined number. The number of reach type types that can be selected when the number of re-variations of the decorative symbol reaches a predetermined number is larger than the number of types of reach types that can be selected when the number of re-variations of the decorative symbol exceeds the predetermined number. May be good.

17) In a certain embodiment, even if the pseudo-variation effect in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and re-variated is executed, the specific effect may be executed only once within one symbol variation period. The specific production may be a one-shot notification production that announces that it will be a big hit.

18) In a certain embodiment, the decorative symbol may be fixedly stopped without the re-variation of the decorative symbol being executed after the execution of the re-variation suggestion effect. If the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped without re-variation of the decorative symbol after the re-variation suggestion effect is executed, the hold change effect that changes the display mode of the hold object that suggests the expectation of the lottery value to be held is executed. You may.

19) In a certain embodiment, there is a re-variation effect pattern in which an effect process for re-variating the decorative pattern is defined, and it may be possible to preliminarily determine that the effect pattern is a re-variation effect pattern. Based on the pre-determination result of the re-variation effect pattern, the look-ahead suggestion effect suggesting that the re-variation effect pattern may re-variate in the variation before the selected variation may be feasible. When a specific development effect (for example, SP reach effect) is executed after the decorative symbol is re-changed, the type of advance notice effect displayed in the middle of the symbol change may be different depending on the number of times the decorative symbol is re-changed. However, the degree of expectation that a certain kind of advance notice effect occurs in the middle of the symbol change may be different.

20) In a certain embodiment, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, all of the plurality of symbol rows of the decorative symbol may be changed from the variable state to the temporary stop state at the same time. When re-variating after the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, all of the plurality of symbol rows may be changed from the temporary stop state to the variable state at the same time. When the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped after re-variation, it is not necessary that all of the plurality of symbol rows of the decorative symbol change from the variable state to the temporary stop state at the same time. For example, each of the plurality of symbol strings may change from the variable state to the temporary stop state at different timings.
In a certain embodiment, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, it is not necessary that all of the plurality of symbol rows of the decorative symbol change from the variable state to the temporary stop state at the same time. When re-variating after the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, it is not necessary that all of the plurality of symbol rows change from the temporary stop state to the variable state at the same time. When the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped after re-variation, all of the plurality of symbol rows of the decorative symbol may be changed from the variable state to the temporary stop state at the same time.
In one embodiment, when the decorative symbols are re-variated, the plurality of symbol rows are displaced in the direction opposite to the normal fluctuation direction (for example, downward direction) (for example, upward direction), and then the plurality of symbol rows are displaced in the normal fluctuation direction (for example, upward direction). For example, it may be displaced downward) and fluctuated at high speed in a normal fluctuation direction (for example, downward).
In one embodiment, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and fixedly stopped after the last re-change of the decorative symbol, a part of the plurality of symbol rows is changed from the variable state to the temporary stop state, and then the remaining symbol rows are changed. It may be changed from the fluctuating state to the temporary stop state. For example, when the decorative symbol is composed of three rows of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, the middle symbol may be changed to the temporary stop state after the left and right symbols are changed to the temporary stop state. At this time, the left and right symbols may be changed from the variable state to the temporary stop state at the same time, or the left and right symbols may be changed from the variable state to the temporary stop state at different timings (for example, in the order of the left symbol and the right symbol). Good.

21) In a certain embodiment, a sound effect (sound) may be output when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, or the sound effect when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped may be different depending on the number of re-variations of the decorative symbol. As the number of re-variations of the decorative symbol increases, the output time of the sound effect when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped may be lengthened, or the volume of the sound effect may be increased. For example, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped after the second number of re-variations, which is more than the first number of decorative symbols, than the sound effect output when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped after the first re-variation of the decorative symbol. The sound effect output to may have a longer output time and / or may be louder. Further, the decorative lamp effect of turning on the decorative lamp (frame lamp) when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped may be executed, or the execution mode of the decorative lamp effect may be changed according to the number of re-variations of the decorative symbol. As the number of re-variations of the decorative symbol increases, the execution period of the decorative lamp effect when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped may be lengthened, the brightness of the decorative lamp may be increased, or the decorative lamp may be lit by the decorative lamp effect. The lighting color of the decorative lamp may be different, or the lighting pattern (blinking pattern, etc.) of the decorative lamp may be different.

22) In a certain embodiment, a condition presentation effect for presenting a condition for revariating the decorative symbol may be executed. There may be a plurality of conditions that must be satisfied in order for the decorative pattern to fluctuate again. The degree of expectation that the conditions presented by the condition presentation effect will be achieved may differ depending on the execution mode of the advance notice effect during the symbol variation period in which the condition presentation effect is executed. The degree of expectation that the condition presented by the condition presentation effect is achieved may differ depending on the execution mode of the look-ahead effect executed in the variation before the variation in which the condition presentation effect is executed. The condition achievement effect for notifying the success or failure of the condition presented in the condition presentation effect may be feasible. The condition achievement effect may be a specific operation effect that can be executed triggered by an input operation to an operation input means such as the effect button 109 or the effect lever 112. In addition, a re-variation suggestion notice for preliminarily suggesting that the decorative pattern may re-variate may be feasible. There may be multiple re-variation suggestion notices. The degree of expectation that the decorative symbol will re-variate after the occurrence of the re-variation suggestion notice may differ depending on the execution mode of the notice effect during the symbol change period in which the re-variation suggestion notice occurs. The degree of expectation that the decorative symbol re-variates after the occurrence of the re-variation suggestion notice may differ depending on the execution mode of the look-ahead effect executed in the variation before the change in which the re-variation suggestion notice is executed. The condition presentation effect does not have to be executed in the specific effect mode. In a specific effect mode, the re-variation suggestion notice may not occur. The condition presentation effect does not have to be executed during the symbol variation period in which a specific advance notice effect occurs. It is not necessary that the re-change suggestion notice occurs during the symbol change period in which the specific notice effect occurs.

23) In a certain embodiment, a special effect suggesting that a specific effect is executed may be executed in response to the re-variation of the decorative pattern. The special effect may be a display of a symbol dedicated to re-variation or a symbol developed. A specific effect may be executed after changing the display mode of the special effect. For example, the specific effect may be executed after changing the display mode of the revariable dedicated symbol or the display mode of the developed symbol. During the symbol variation period in which the special effect is executed, the same type of special effect (for example, display of the developed symbol) may not be executed after the execution of a certain type of special effect (for example, display of the developed symbol).

24) In a certain embodiment, the execution of the change notice suggesting the re-change of the decorative symbol may be restricted (cannot be executed) until the predetermined condition is satisfied. Satisfaction of the predetermined condition may be, for example, an input operation in an operation effect for instructing an input operation to the operation input means, or an elapse of the button validity period. Further, the execution of the look-ahead notice suggesting the re-variation of the decorative pattern may be restricted (cannot be executed) until the predetermined condition is satisfied.

25) In a certain embodiment, the ball is normally entered (low entry state or low base state), and is acquired when the ball enters the first starting port corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1). If there is a ball entering the second starting port corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2) in the situation where the lottery value is held, the special figure 2 is displayed in a variable manner in the next fluctuation, and the special figure 2 is displayed. The decorative design may change again during the variation display of 2. In this case, the probability that the decorative symbol will change again during the variable display of the special figure 2 when the special figure 2 becomes a big hit is that the decorative symbol will change again during the variable display of the special figure 2 when the special figure 2 is out of alignment. It may be higher than the probability of fluctuation. The number of candidates for the variation pattern of the special figure 1 that can be selected in the normal ball entry state may be larger than the number of candidates for the variation pattern of the special figure 2 that can be selected in the normal ball entry state.

26) In a certain embodiment, the effect sound (sound) output when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped before it re-variates may be different from the effect sound output when the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped, and the decoration may be different. It may be different from the effect sound output when the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped in the normal variation effect in which the symbol is not re-variated. Based on the pre-reading of the reserved lottery value, the effect sound output when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped at the chance eye due to the symbol variation before the symbol variation corresponding to the pre-read lottery value usually fluctuates. It may be different from the effect sound output when the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with a symbol combination different from the chance eye in the effect. The effect sound (sound) output when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped before it re-variates may be different from the effect sound output when the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at the chance.

27) In a certain embodiment, it is possible to superimpose the decorative symbol in front of the display of the predetermined effect so that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the display of the predetermined effect is continuously changed even during the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol. A predetermined effect may be advanced by letting it proceed. For example, the display mode of the predetermined effect may be changed during the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol, or the display mode of the predetermined effect may be switched.

28) In a certain embodiment, even if the number of re-variations of the decorative symbol is the same, the fluctuation time from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the final stop may be different. Even when the number of re-variations of the decorative symbol is large, the fluctuation time from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the final stop may be shorter than when the number of re-variations of the decorative symbol is small. For example, there are a first pseudo-continuous variation effect in which the number of re-variations of the decorative symbol is the first, and a second pseudo-continuous variation effect in which the number of re-variations of the decorative symbol is the second number less than the first. The fluctuation time from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the final stop when the first pseudo continuous fluctuation effect is executed is the fluctuation time from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the final stop when the second pseudo continuous fluctuation effect is executed. It may be shorter.

29) In a certain embodiment, the button operation effect may be executed during the re-variation of the decorative symbol. The specific operation effect that can be executed when the button operation effect ends may be configured so that it does not fall after the re-variation. For example, the first specific operation effect triggered by the button operation effect can be executed before the decorative symbol is re-changed, and the second specific operation effect triggered by the button operation effect can be executed after the decorative symbol is re-changed. In this case, the expected degree of the second specific operation effect may be configured to be equal to or higher than the expected degree of the first specific operation effect. When the number of re-variations of the decorative symbol is large, the frequency of button operation effects may be lower during the period until the left and right symbols of the decorative symbol are temporarily stopped. For example, the frequency with which the button operation effect occurs during the period from the first re-variation of the decorative symbol to the temporary stop of the left and right symbols of the decorative symbol is the second frequency, which is less than the first. The frequency may be lower than the frequency at which the button operation effect occurs during the period from the re-variation to the temporary stop of the left and right symbols of the decorative symbol. The button operation effect may be a one-shot button effect that commands one button operation within the valid period of the button operation. The button operation effect may be a continuous hit button effect that commands a plurality of button operations within the valid period of the button operation. The timing at which the button image for the button operation effect is displayed during the re-variation of the decorative symbol may be the first half of the period from the start of the re-variation of the decorative symbol to the temporary stop timing of the left and right symbols. The number of times the button image for the button operation effect is displayed during the re-variation of the decorative pattern may be relatively small, for example, may be one or less. On the other hand, the number of times that the button image for the button operation effect is displayed after the timing at which the left and right symbols of the decorative symbol are temporarily stopped after the final revariation of the decorative symbol may be relatively large. If the button operation effect occurs multiple times after the timing when the left and right symbols of the decorative symbol are temporarily stopped after the last re-change of the decorative symbol, the period from the temporary stop of the left and right symbols of the decorative symbol to the final stop of the decorative symbol. Of these, the button operation effect may occur in the latter half of the period.

30) In a certain embodiment, when the decorative symbol is re-variated after the advance notice effect A is executed, the advance notice effect B having a higher expectation than the advance notice effect A may be executed after the re-variation of the decorative symbol. The execution of the advance notice effect B may be restricted (cannot be executed) until the predetermined conditions are satisfied. Satisfaction of the predetermined condition may be, for example, an input operation in an operation effect for instructing an input operation to the operation input means, or an elapse of the button validity period.

31) In a certain embodiment, the symbol at the time of temporary stop of the decorative symbol in the pseudo continuous variation effect for executing the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol may be different depending on the effect mode. For example, in the first effect mode, a normal symbol used as a symbol combination when the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped may be used as the symbol when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. In the second effect mode, as the symbol when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, a dedicated symbol which is not used as a symbol combination when the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped may be used. The dedicated symbol may be a pseudo-ream dedicated symbol that is used only at the time of temporary stop in the pseudo-continuous variation effect.

32) In a certain embodiment, a suggestion effect suggesting that the decorative pattern is being re-variated may be feasible. There may be multiple types of suggestion effects. The suggestion effect may be executed by using a special symbol at the time of temporary stop of the decorative symbol. The suggestion effect may be executed triggered by an input operation to the operation input means. The suggestion effect may be executed after the end of the operation effect for instructing the input operation to the operation input means, or may be executed when the button validity period ends. The suggestion effect may be performed during a revariation other than the last revariation of the decorative symbol, or may be performed during a revariation prior to the last revariation of the decorative symbol. The suggestion effect may be performed after the decorative symbol is in the reach mode.

33) In a certain embodiment, one pseudo-variation time from the re-variation of the decorative symbol to the temporary stop may be shortened as the number of re-variations of the decorative symbol increases. That is, the interval from the re-variation of the decorative symbol to the next re-variation may become shorter as the number of re-variations of the decorative symbol increases.

The present invention has been described above based on examples. This embodiment is merely an example, and it is understood by those skilled in the art that various modifications are possible for each of these components and combinations of each processing process, and that such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention. is there. Hereinafter, modification examples will be given.

At least one of the above-mentioned "1. advance suggestion effect", "2. fixed expectation effect" and "3. button effect" can be applied to the slot machine shown in the prerequisite technology 2, and the casino can be applied. It can also be applied to slot machines and gaming machines installed in games and arcades.

11 ... 1st start port, 12 ... 2nd start port, 60 ... effect display device, 80 ... game board, 81 ... game area, 210 ... lottery means, 220 ... win / fail judgment means, 230 ... fluctuation pattern determination means 260 ... Special game control means, 303 ... effect determination means, 304 ... effect control means.

Claims (1)

A game board with a game area formed,
A start port provided in the game area and
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value acquired when the ball enters the starting port.
A special symbol display device in which the special symbol is variablely displayed and the result of the hit / fail judgment is shown by the stop display of the special symbol, and
When the special symbol indicating that the hit / fail determination has a predetermined result is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, the special game control means that enables the player to execute a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game after the stop display. When,
An operation input means that accepts input operations from the player,
Equipped with an effect display device that can display effects,
A normal effect can be displayed on the effect display device at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol.
It is possible to execute an operation effect for instructing the player to perform an input operation to the operation input means during the variable display of the special symbol, and triggered by an input operation to the operation input means during the execution of the operation effect, or , The specific effect can be started with the end of the operation effect.
A special effect suggesting a transition to the normal effect can be displayed on the effect display device after the end of the specific effect and before the stop display of the special symbol, and the normal effect is started after the end of the special effect. It is possible and
The special effect of the special effect is performed according to the presence or absence of an input operation to the operation input means during the execution of the operation effect, or according to the timing at which the input operation to the operation input means is performed during the execution of the operation effect. Ball game machines with different durations.

Images